Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Permit M2000-099 - AUTO TRIM DESIGN
M2000 -099 Auto Trim Design 17000 W Valley Hy City of Tukwila Community Development / Public Works • 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite 100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 Permit No: M2000 -099 Type: B -MECH Category: NRES Address: 17000 WEST VALLEY HY Location: Parcel #: 252304 -9044 Contractor License No: ALLANMS008BC TENANT OWNER CONTACT CONTRACTOR MECHANICAL PERMIT AUTO TRIM DESIGN 17000 WEST VALLEY HY, TUKWILA, WA 98188 ERICKON ELDON 17000 W VALLEY HWY, TUKWILA WA 98188 DAVID 'SMITH 911 12th. ST NE, AUBURN, WA 98002 ALLAN'S MECHANICAL SRVCS LLC 3709 NE 19 ST, RENTON, WA 98056 * k*** k* * *k*k * *kk* ******k** *•k : 4 * kirk* kk* k** kkk*k*k* ** * **kk * * * * Permit Description: Siynatu Print N INSTALL ONE PART''S PAINT BOOT/PREP STATION /PAINT MIXING ROOM WITH SCREW COMPRESSOR. Permit Center A orized Signature a d erearmr.•■•■••• • Date L. AL T i t l e Phone: P -- Date: 4 .., � w�s .r te (206) 431 -3670 Status: ISSUED Issued: 06/12/2000 Expires: 32/09/2000 Phone: 25: -939 -4812 Phone: 206- 255 -7191 UMC Edition: 1997 Valuation: 20,000.00 Total Permit Fee: 51.75 * k* k*k k** k• k*k** ** ***•kkkk•kk*k**k• kit* k*•k k, k• kk 4 k*• ** k•*•k*k* *-k * **k•k*****k* I hereby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the pr•. ons of any other state or local laws regulating construction o the •erfornrance of word:. I an authorized to sign for and obtain this b 11d .o oe,r"it This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days from the data of issuance, or if the wort, is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. CITY OF TUKWILA Address: 17000 WEST VALLEY HY suite: Tennant:: AUTO TRIM DESIGN Type: 0-MECH Parcel II: 252304 -9044 . C* k*, k***** k**1*** k* k*k****** Ak* kkk- k* k*•k* k*** k, k** *A *k* *•k*k* * *k * *,k *h***44**** Permit Conditions: 1. Electrical permits shall be obtained through the Washington ;State Division of Labor and Industries and all electrical work will be inspected by that agency (248-6630). No changes will be rude to the plans unless approved by the Engineer and the Tukwila Building Division, ,. . All permits, inspection records, and approved plans shall be 'available at the job site prior to the start Of any con- structi on. ' . These ; documents are to be ma t me i ned and avail - able until final inspection approval Is granted. . All conatruotion to be done in conformance with approved p 1 ans .;and requirements of. the Uniform Building Code (1997' ,Ed i t i ors) as amended, Uniform Mechanical Code (1997 Edition), and ; Washington State Energy Code (1997 Edition). Ve l l d i ty of Permit. The issuance of a permit or approval of :plans, specifications, and computations shall not be con - strued to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation, of } any of the p r o v i s i o n s of the b u i l d i n g code or of any other ordinance of the jurisdiction, No permit presumingrto give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of this code; shall be valid. Manufacturers installation instructions required on site for. the b u i l d i n g inspectors review. Permit No: M2000-099 Status: ISSUED Applied: 05 /12/2000 Issued: 06/12/2000 'BUILDING' • N O ` AUTH. ZED Cit State/Zip: Ts -�"'%` Site Address : Property Ow er: ' $ A ?; . Signature: ` ..%J I .� Street Address: .,-.�> � ©at ©: --- r �,,,,,.�.. r..7 Print name. / ,., ,�- � � r , " Pilo' o: ( ) - y Fax N: ( ...v. Address: . ev .., tate/Zip: Fax #: ( City /Sta , ZI). / ... Contact Person: . k r.. Projeh t Name/Tenant: / 7 f j, `7 ' /2? )f ' l'/\/ Cit State/Zip: Value of Mechanical Equipment: - Tax Parcel Number: a , Site Address : Property Ow er: Phone: ( ) Street Address: City State/Zip: Fax #: ( ) Contractor: Phone: ( ) Street Address: ev .., tate/Zip: Fax #: ( ) Contact Person: . k r.. (;946/Y i� Phone: SA ) ��� C X82. Street Add s: l City State/Zip: Fax #: ( ) CITY OF TUIt ./ILA Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 FOR FT USE ONLY Project Number: Permit Number: Mechanical Permit Application Application and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mail or facsimile. MECHANICALLPEiLMiT REVIEW AND APPROVAL R. UESTED: (TO REFILLED OUT BYAPPLICAN Description of work to be done (please be specific): t, Current copy of Washington State Department of Labor and Industries Valid Contractor's License. If not available at the time of application, a copy of this license will be required before the permit is issued OR submit Form W-4, "Affidavit In Lieu of Contractor Registration ". Building Owner /Authorized Agent: If the applicant is other than the owner, registered architect/engineer, or contractor licensed by the Stale of Washington, a notarized letter from the property owner authorizing the agent to submit this permit application anti obtain the permit will be required as part of this submittal. I HEREBY CERTIFY WW1 HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO DE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY B THE LA WS OF THE STATE OF WASHiNGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. Expiration of Plan Review - Applications for which no permit is issued within 100 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. The building official may extend the time for action by the applicant for a period not exceeding 1 80 days upon written request by the applicant as defined in Section 114.4 of the Uniform Mechanical Code (current edition), No application shall be extended more than once, Date application expires: 11/2/99 meth pens t.doc , ✓ • Submittal Requirements Floor plan and system layout Roof plan required to identify individual equipment and the location of each installation (Uniform �iechanicai Code 504 (e)) Iv' Details and elevations (for roof mounted equipment) and proposed screening Heat Loss Calculations or Washington State Energy Code Form #H -7 _t-i.V.A.C, over 2,000 CFM (approximately 5 ton and larger) must be provided with smoke detection shut- off and will be routed to the Fire Prevention division for additional comments (Uniform Mechanical Code 1009). . Specifications must be provided to show that replacement equipment complies with the efficiency, ratings and other a liable requirements of the Washin ton State Nonresidential Energy Code. Structural engineer's analysis is required for new and the replacement of existing roof equipment weighing 400 pounds and greater (Uniform Building Code 1632.1). Structural documentation shall be stamped by a Washington State licensed Structural Engineer. Mechanical Permits COMMERCIAL: Two complete sets of drawings and attachments required with application submittal NOTE: Water heaters and vents are included in the Uniform Mechanical Code — please include any water heaters or vents being installed or replaced. • RESIDENTIAL: Two complete sets of attachments required with application submittal ii/2/AA anbcpntOm Suhnrit t.rl Require:m.rrt s New Single Family Residence Heat loss calculations or Form 146. Equipment specifications. Chan e•out or re .!moment of existin mechanical e - ul. mont Narrative of work to be done Includin I modification to duct work. Installation of Gas Fire . lace Narrative with specification of equipment and chimney type. If using existing chimney, provide a letter by a certified chimney sweep stating that the chimney is In safe condition. NOTE: Water heaters and vents are Included in the Uniform Mechanical Code — please include any water. heaters or vents being installed or replaced. {{ •• ♦, i ., W M i L ' P V r- O 1• b i. 11 M rr ... AO*4410A**A ***4.1444,k4AA *4 435 4 *11 *A*AA#A * * *#l.{► 4 44.1.A4* ,w4Aksli F IY OF TUKWILA. WA 1'ROu9MIT * *i4 * *44*A4*4*** aC 114»4 k* 44***44.,A.A4**A *Ak* 4tA4!'3WI t Number: 81800 Amount: 1:1 .2 i 06:12/00 09 :31. Payment Fiethad : ' CHECK . Hotot i on: AUTO 1 P X M 4C9IUt1 1 ri i t l TLU • ..• •.a ., +. ,•. i ♦{r,r•{.w.Mr w.•{..ar . a•,r .•u.. .. :.»v•{.r �a .�.. .w •.. :.•• . •r.i rrwu.r •t .•.r •r .a .w .a {. .• Pcr *i It Mos M2000.099 Type: U -MECH • MECHANICAL PEAM11 Parc 1 Mot 252'304-9044 t, Addreztt 17000 WEST VALLEY HHY Total Foos: 51.'7''3 { r .1'h i+ Pxyn rnt; !iL. D Tc�tt�1 ALL Pint ti $1..V5 I1 N 1 finom: .00 A *44*A4*4 **AA*4114 * *44A #4J►**,1A1 **A * *4*A* r1 *44* %ANSA* * *4* ** * ***#4A4* Account Cutio oo+tt:r i Ot ian AMaun>: 000/345.630 PLAN CHECK - HUI1PEV 10.35 000/322000 Mi:CNIaflXuAi1 ,• Nt?NIMES 41.40 It .{ . as .1 { { w5 I • M R • r . { W 4 N .. 1, P • • M 1 { I M 1 , < N 5 5 ig ProjerP ll,Tc_ 01, i)e.cl t,L 1 ”stcleviti1 1 ( -TkAct, a. t A i dur t e co ss: 0 a t k ieko 11 Datp ___ co Special instructions: Date wante i : a,m. RespesteL 45 -.1 -c iao() oi INSPECtION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 Approved per applicable codes. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit j Corrections required p rior a. „. InspectorAIFAM Date EJ $47.00 REINSPECTION REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd. Suite 100. Call to schedule reins ertion. Receipt No: Date: • P oject: .. ---- -- ..., a `% {`'',-. `a - „ Type of Inspection: ; r i , s , ddr ff :: Dat tied :: , Special instructions: D wa e` .rt INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 Approved per applicable codes. COMMENTS' $47.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd. Suite 100. Call to schedule reins ection. Receipt No: Date; INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit Corrections required prior to approval. PERMIT NO. (206)431 =3670 Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Rood & Duct: Halon: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Authorized Signature FINALAFF . FRM City of TuI&'ila Fire Department TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT FINAL APPROVAL FORM Project Name At�tP l p, rM IJeS 160 Address f /a U LV ,1� l f' i 417 Retain current inspection schedule Needs shift inspection Approved without correction notice Approved with correction notice issued c r n Rev. 2/19/98 Steven M. Mullet, Mayor Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief Permit No. 1 Ci 00""C: Y Da e Suite ## T.F.D. Form F.F. 85 .Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206-575-4404 • Fax: 206.575.4439 Project: �,, Type of inspection: ddress: / / Date called: Special instructions: il 7 Date wanted: ! , m:� R. . nester: ! 2.r tle. Phone INSPECTION NO, CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 0 Approved per applicable codes. COMMENTS: Receipt No: INSPECTION RECORD Retain a ropy with permit PERMIT NO. (206)431 -3670 Corrections required prior to approval. 0 $47.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspe lion, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd, Suite 100. Call to schedule reins.ection. Date: To: Mitchell Engineering, Inc. 7821 - 168th Ave NE Redmond, WA 98052 (425) 747 -1500 • Fax (425) 747 -5403 Date: �► 2 �- kUe,i4k./4 Job #: on. co G(_/a4t Job Nome: /49¢3 /7F, 4 �• 5 � • Subject: � 2 4 is� 1 X11 '1� :Q4. F4.5e, /7eo agoscrvAi IL( Message: riza4 /ra,& 774. 4:3 c=i#A,x. /0 4446 61,6 i 4(; • -17/E. 6141 ,J� 47 /1 1 o't ob../ •� " Gib'► 7' me-44g. G', 444t1A4 77 W c,- 7 Ade ''Jwo cd 4JAIL4 fix. zkv.J 1•We hiezdJ : a4 �� '76• 7h. 0.40e$44.1r in= - TM. AP /4.0/ ,g4sr 4.9a/z a X 12: 40 th471-1 04-1= Dde. Akr 2 a 44c mRO��i u►�c�n JUN - 7 2000 FI1_F E1S1 rt10, 1 cikZew•P Diet Fax: Phone: PERMIT CHNTBR :r Sincerely, REVISION N XIIESIGN ( of KING COUNTY, INC. j 900 South Grady Way • Renton, WA 98055 (425) 277 -9000 • FAX: (425) 277 -4777 City of Tukwila, 6 /6 /00 The primary commodity that Auto Trim Design (AM) provides is the sales and installation of auto and truck accessories, window tinting, sunroofs, and trim. Other services available are signage for a business either in the building or on their trucks, plus commercial tinting and security glass film installation. Auto Trim Design does not do automotive repair or collision repair of any kind and does not paint cars. cnnrnnuu JUN - ? 2000 PBRMIT =KM Dz00 ig t iri S Allan's Mechanical Service et AUTO TRIM DESIGN INTERIOR SHOW ROOM 17000 W. VALLEY HIGHWAY TUKWILLA WA., 98055 CITY OF TUKWIL11A( T.I.) PROJECT No. D 2000.049 (512) PARCEL No. 252304 -9044 PROPOSED SCOPE OF MECHANICAL WORK NORTH ELEVATION LOOKING SOUTHERLY PARTS BOOTH / PREP - STATION PAINT MIXING ROOM neEwt° err( OF TUKWILA M A" 1 2 2000 PERMIT CENTER M woo--0 9 ? Og Allan's Mechanical Service INDEX SCOPE OF PROPOSED WORK THE INSTALLATION OF ONE PARTS SPRAY BOOTH I PRE- STATION AND PAINT MIXING ROOM. 1. CONTRACTORS INFORMATION VICINITY MAP 2. EXISTING CONDITIONS 3. PROPOSED CONDITIONS 4. COMPRESSOR SPECIFICATIONS a. PARTS BOOTH AND SPECIFICATIONS racellgso cm( MN( 2 "° ro aeries ALLAH REGISTRATION.TGA (# . r• I.. / :�►. 7 .�+ +xr-- ice► 1.AG� - - _ 1.I�Yw`+.: �vl •:■ • nmta+w. _ _ _ ._ n.01111MR.1.• Of 1r e,- - .n.l.11114111 , 111.~ 1 110•1.1.01.. - 4 - io. - : li li.. i- Mire . ice s / - .r DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AM) INDUSTRIES l o s- rmAsio M097) REGIST. 0001 ALLANMS031KK EFFECTIVE. DATE ALLAN'S MECHANICAL 3709 NE1.9THST RENTON WA 98056 tprwEq REGISTERED AS PROVIDED BY LAW AS CONS' CONT GENERAL EXP. DATE 05/12/2000 05/12/1997 SERVICES RAIL Of WASHINGTON ROOER L ALLAN ALLAN'S MECHANICAL SERVICE 3709 NE 19TH ST RENTON WA 90058 .�.,... _ 444_4. TAX REGISTRATION UNEMPLOYMENT INSURANCE REGISTERED TRADE NAMES: ROGER'S SUPPORT TOYS NNASTER LICENSE SERVICE REGISTRATIONS AND LICENSES ORGANIZATION TYPE SOLE PROPRIETORSHIP _._...._. Sam •s ........._._. .: INDUSTRIAL INSURANCE TM $bow �hte been issued to bus 4b Bono • Ibled o M NT of Lice*N MMUS t P.O. 11411 9034 a WA 9047.10 34 PIM $4.1400 k UNIFIED BUSINESS ID 0: 800 333 723 BUSINESS ID 0: 001 LOCATION: 0001 - .....a . F . . awn. AUTO TRIM DESIGN 17000 WEST VALLEY HIGHWAY TtJKWILLA WA., 98055 Streets98 Coptntphl 0 199 1997, Mown Co(poration and/or de *tipplers. Ad tiphta reserved. Please visit our web site at haplhnape.expedia com. Page 1 atii S Allan's Mechanical Service SOUTHEASTERLY CORNER LOOKING EAST MIDDLE OF SHOP FLOOR LOOKING SOUTHEASTERLY SOUTHEAST CORNER OF EXISTING SOUTHEASTERLY CORNER LOOKING WESTERLY SOUTH WALL OF SHOP AUTO TRIM DESIGN INTERIOR SHOW ROOM EXISTING CONDITIONS ,- • For SMALL PAINT MIXING ROOM (SMR) AFC spray booths are constructed of 18 OA galvanized steel with overlapping/interlocking flanges where the panels are joined. The spray booths are assembled to a self - leveling 14 GA galvanized base angle which is secured to the floor - no concrete curbs are necessary. FANS: Fans are equipped with non - sparking blades. The blade is driven by V -belts enclosed in a cylinder for protection from the air stream. The motor base is located outside the duct area. MOTORS: All motors are NEMA rated Class A or Class B insulated, Open Type Drip Proof supplied for use on 208/230/460 VAC, 60 Hz, 3 phase. LIGHTS: All lights are U.L. approved. Windows are 1/4" clear, tempered glass, sealed from the inside to insure u vapor -proof seal. Lights are mounted and serviced from the outside of the booth. Optional hinged window assemblies are available to enable servicing from inside the booth. Class 1 Division 2 fixtures are used where required by code and are also available for hazardous locations. LIMIT SWITCHES; Limit switches are Allen- Bradley 802X watertight or hazardous location switches, and are Class 1, Division 2, oil - tight, and U,L, listed. ,..A.LkyAmal, Air valves are NBMA type 1 with enclosed solenoid. JD -2 air valves by Antunes Controls have maximum operating temperature of 24" water column, maximum pressure surge of 3 PSIO, and ambient temperature range between -20 °F to +140 °F. Control panels by AFC are ETL listed and use U.L. listed components, DRAWN BY n DWG NO. .SMR1204 -C DAB .3/8/1999 I SHEET 1 IDE EW AIM I4..REBAR . 8 " TOP VIEW 8'8 " 11' 8" EDGE OR END VIEW 12' 8" I O C CONCRETE CURB FOR SMR -1204 CURBS OUTSIDE DIMENSIONS; WIDTH: 8' 8" LENGTH: 12' 8" HEIGHT: 4" CURBS INSIDE DIMENSIONS: WIDTH: 7' 8" DEPTH: 11' 8" HEIGHT: 4" CU OU 11 11. 1eC.ONCRET SLAB AIR FILTRATION CO., INC af •7 55x3 HAOOZ'Flr-MA&Y8VW ROAD OROVILLB, CA 95963 1400.331.7744 AIR FILTRATION CO., INC 5523 RACKIETT4AARYEIVILLE ROAD OROVILLU, CALIFORNIA 95965 1400331.7744 FAX: (530) 533 -0179 Drown by; JDD/YT Dwg No: Dot,; .3/5/1999 I Scaly SMRI204E I Sheet: • FAN WITH 1/2 HP 2253 RPM 1210 CFM ELE- MOTOR: 115/230 VOLTS 1 -PH 60HZ 1/2 HP CAPACITOR -START TEFC MOTORS MANUFACTURE NAME: DAYTON MODEL NUMBER: 6K122 12" DIA EXHAUST FAN MANUFACTURE NAME: DAYTON 12' BELT - DRIVEN TUBEAXW. WITH ALUMINUM SPARK - RESISTANT FAN BLADES. MODEL NUMBER: 7F927 NOTE: WIRING BY OTHERS CONDUIT BY OTHERS JUNCTION BOX BY OTHERS UGHT SWITCH BY OTHERS FUSES OR CIRCUIT BREAKERS BY OTHERS WIRE BY OTHERS POWER SUPPLY BOX BY OTHERS 1/2' CONDUIT LIGHT SWITCH 1 12 - 4 " UGHT FIXTURES: TYPE 4 -TUBE CLOSED END GENERAL PURPOSE 120V FLUORESCENT FIXTURE UL. USTED WITH 1/4' WIRE REINFORCED GLASS WITH GE MODEL: F4OCW TUBES, MED BP PRE -HEAT RAPID START FLOUR MANUFACTURE NAME: BIEBER LIGHTING CORPORATION. SIZE: 49" X 13 3/8" X 8 5/8 ", JUNCTION BOX BE IM ACCESS DOOR WIRING: 12/19 AWG STRANDED MTW/THHN/ THWN GASOUNE AND OIL RESISTANT II SUITABLE ALSO ALSO AWM 105C N.E.0 .015 INSULATION UL. LISTED, SMALL PAINT MIXING ROOM 3 FRONT MEN POWER SUPPLY 120V, 15A 2 - 15 AMPS EXHAUST FAN Ott I 1111m,, �•--- 8 --- 180' FUSED UNK LOUVER UL USTED MANUFACTURE NAME: AIR LOUVERS INC, MODEL: 1900 -A SIZE: 12" x 18' HEAT ACTUATED CLOSURE MECHANISM WITH FUSIBLE UNK. INTEGRAL BLADE STOP HOLDS BLADES IN OPEN POSITION, ADJUSTING TAB. ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING FLANGE FRAME. FIXED FACE FRAME, 18 GAUGE CRS FRAME AND LOUVER BLADES. AM FILTRATION CO., INC ar.1: 5323 BAOG T1-MAAYSV1LLE ROAD WRIMPOI OROVILLB, CA 95965 1400.331 -7744 DRAWN BY JDD SCALE 1' =5' DWG NO. SMR1204 -D DATE 3/51999 I SHEET 9. MOTOR RED ---� 2 BLACK --- 5 MOTOR CONNECTI ON DI AGRAMS CW ROTATION FACING SHAFT AS SHOW BLACK -% 5 CW ROTATION FACING SHAFT AS SHO11iN RED 2 BLACK -- fi 5 RED 2 LI O Q 4 1 LINE Q 0 4 SW OFF, ON ---Q O,- • , .... . FUSE CB AIR FILTRATION CO,1 NC DRAWING NUMBER' SMRWI RE DATE' 06 -07 -95 FUSE OR CIRCUIT BREAKER 1 2OV PO1CR SUPPLY ----' --' ' ••.......,,,.. S,......,.,..•••∎ ••..,....,......,.....•.._..,.. ...,.......•......,..... ..._. •....._.... ....... -,,-,.-P.-..- • - WI RING BY OTHERS AFC STANDARD LIGHT MODEL #AFC 205 120V, 1.8A, 80NZ ETL LISTED, UL STD 1570 •1/4 x 20 SCREW ISO VIEW 53 1/2" 50" WIRE HOLE 1 3/4 15/16" 4 9/16" --- 2 5/8" 6 15/16" siPE VIEW 4 -- 48" COLOR-CORRECTED FLUORESCENT LIGHT TUBES 16" I,D, ---- 2 5/8" r 19 1/2 AIR FILTRATION CO., INC 5523 OAGGE1T -- MARYSVILLE ROAD OROVILLE, CA 95965 1800- 331 -7744 DRAWN BY YT SCALE I! 1 DWG NO. .END LT.AFC- 205 -01 53 /2" am .3/16/1999 1 SHEET .1 OF 9 LPI Inc. 800 Wisconsin Street, Mail Box 10 • Eau Claire, WI 54703 -3607 • Phone 715 -839 -8280 • Fax 715- 839 -8647 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR OUTSIDE ACCESS PANEL FRAME KIT P/N 36- 016 -240 & P/N 36- 016 -227 1. Use template provided with installation kit to mark 12 1/2" x 50 1/4" hole on booth panel where fixture is to be located. 2. Cut hole in booth panel using suitable tools. 3. Install panel frames (Item #6 and Item #7) into hole in panel as shown in detail A -1. 4. Install corner brackets (Item #5) to each corner where panel frames meet. Drill 1/8" holes through corner brackets and panel frames and pop rivet in place using 1/8" pop rivets included with installation kit. 5. Install glass lens into panel frame. A: Install 1/2 x 3/4 open cell gasket (Item #1) around perimeter of panel frame as shown in detail A -1. B: Install tempered glass lens (Item #4) into panel frame and lock into place using glass clips (Item #3) and 1/4 - 20 capscrews and nuts as shown in detail A -1. 6. Install light fixture into panel frame and lock into place using (4) light clips (Item #2) and 1/4.20 capscrews and nuts. 7. Installation is now complete and fixture is ready to be wired into service. FOR ILPI IDPK LP1, INC. 715-839-I1280 '800 457 to CLAIRE, 703 TN15 *PRINT PROPERTY OP L.P.I. • LD.P.I. It Is loaned subject to return upon demand end upon the exprened condition Chet 11 will not be used dims* or indirectly In eny manner detrimental 10 our interest TITLE 390240 • 390227 FLUORESCENT UGNT FIXTURE OUTSIDE ACCESS KIT (PIN 34419.240) DRAWN MGR SCALE NONE St1EET 1 OF 1 DRAWING MASER 36 umo APP'D DATE 9.10.91 Note: See Installation Instructions on back Not included In kit WIRE PER DIAGRAM ON BALLAST 390240 - 390227 FLUORLSCENT LIGHT FIXTURE Not Included In Kit Inner Surface of Panel See Detail A -1 INSTALLATION KIT (P /N 38 -016) Item Description Qty. 1,,.. 1/2" x 3/4" Open Cell Gasket 12' 2.... Light Clip - 240 P/N 414.001 4 3.,.. Glass Clip 2 Clear Tempered Glass 3/16" x 15" x 63" 1 6..,, 1 1/2" x 1 1/2" Corner Bracket 4 6.... Frame (15 3/4" Long) 2 7.... Frame (63 1/2" Long) 2 8,... 1/8" Pop Rivet 8 9 1/4 - 20 Unc, x 3/4" Capecrew 8t Nut 10 Hole Template (12 1/2" x 601/4 ") 1 Installation Sketch 1 *Note: Item 4 (P/N 1700) Is optional. —Not Included in Kit DETAIL A -1 r - Panel Frame Form 107 0 LPN. Inc. 1994 Yr.. yr...W. ' SKID NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION 1 8 M6x4.4 COLUMN R &L 2 2 M6x4.4 BEAM 3 1 6x84 4 1 MAN ACC. OR. W /OBS WO. 5 1 42x84 6 1 42x84 LIGHT HEATER 7 7 42x120 7A 4 42x120 R &L 8 4 42x120 HEATER R &L 9 8 36x120 10 6 34x120 HEATER 11 1 36x120 FAN PANEL 12 1 42x120 LIGHT /HEATER 13 2 M6x4.4 BEAM 14 2 C4x5.4x112 HEADER 15 2 C4x5.4x144 DOOR JAMB R &L 16 2 C4x5.4x144 DOOR JAMB R &L 17 4 23 738x30 18 4 23 7/8x60 FILTER RACK 19 4 23 7/8x53 7/8 R &L 20 2 112 DOOR STOP 21T SOLID PRODUCT ENTRY DOORS 221 SOLID PRODUCT EXIT DOORS 23 4 19 7/8x55 15 /16 ASSEMBLY MIKRON INDUSTRIES 2 2 19536 201708 EXHAUST DISCHARGE POINT UP now CANOPY DAMPER CAP IVDIA.EXHAUST STACK leDIA.RAINGUARD 1111111111111111111111 ROOF FLASHING 24'DIA.EXHAUST STACK 24•DIA.RAINOUARD PIM' ------7°"--j rART'b FAINT DOOTH So - 11 i <=> • IA.EXHAUST STACK r(AMA* UAED M Tb SIiE ADESS ams Allans Mechanical Service Nation Wide Paint Booth Installation 4724 ROOSEVELT SEAr w N A E. 9814 PLAN 480 VOLT 3PH 4 1MRE 60 HZ 65.15 FLA 100 AMP MAIN BREAKER / DISCONNECT Iai I�1 IF�II 11 0 MED W1i 14 01.67 01.67 1 13 11 11 - - l.)C \ -- 01.67 LL3__iJ 11 --JC`— • HC -1 HC -2 11 1 —7 HC -3 1 I- ----�@ I I ---- 0 .,. ,........ 20NE 2 1 ) 3000 WATT HEATER Nl,} HC -5 COLS (rn �...1 Imo...,,,, r,..,. NON -FUSED DISCONNECT IF REOUIRED BY OTHERS • 10NE /1 AU` 1 4000 WATT HEATER) 12000 WAIT HEAIERI 13000 WATT HEATER 0 14000 WATI.HEA1LaI 12000 WATT HEATER! _ZONE /3 ri0e0 WATT N • R� 4000 WA H A ER HC -4 Fr:". Elm 4 TR1 TRANSFORMER 480/120 VOLT 500 VA 0 M -1 EXHAUST 1/2 HP 1.. z FLA ZONC /5 0 ,.,.....r,.,.,.C2 - 0Q0 wAYT HLATLR .......... ... 1;► 11C - 117:10A a . : . .. �a�l,'L11 L1 CM —I r., • •• r r.rr.,, r.e�(JN{N r1A11 ►ILA ' �l�T' ttM r1 f F—..71 L.utIR3r IJ ►LCURCSCENT UCH 15 2 TYPICAL 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1? 16 19 20 21 22 23 21 20 21 27 20 21 30 SW1 REMOVE JUMPER AND ADO N.C. CONTACT FOR FIRE PROTECTION INTERLOCK (TYPE 1) M1 -01..S A TDR2 -1 TOR3 -1 1 . 6 P61 11A 901.5 POLE (/)�� �N .... ........... . I,,..s,,.,,, :, .<,...r: `7 OZNOTCI TLRMWAL IN CONTROL PANEL OENOICI rICLD MARINO OCNOR:S FACTORY MARINO IN CONTROL PANT ECT IF REQUIRED BY OTHERS 1 HEATERI �EAI HEATER TEA " ^- tMliitifJJ 15 TR1 TRANSFORMER 480 /120 VOLT 500 VA M -1 EXHAUST 1/2 HP 1.2 ?LA HEATER .. ........ TEA ................ -�--o. RI 2 TYPICAL 1 2 3 4 5 6 r 8 2 10 11 12 13 14 15 14 1? 10 10 20 21 22 23 24 25 21 27 25 21 30 REMOVE JUMPER AND ADD N.C. CONTACT FOR FIRE PROTECTION INTERLOCK (TYPE 1) M1 -OlS O 5 /DR2 -1 Pal PS1 POLS POLS ()CHINES 75L0 MRMI0 OCNOTCS TERMWAL IN CONTROL PANG. AM 11A SW4 SRI 1548 • OtN01f5 FACTORY W1$W0 IN CONTROL PANEL PB2 1DRI -1 J I - <J e l s 10 12 OR WHITE / ` PL2 PLO PL7 • SW1 LIGHTS OFF /ON LC1 LIGHTING CONTACTOR PB1/P82 SYSTEM SLOP /START M1 EXHAUST UNIT MI 7 Pl1 MI EXHAUST UNIT ON APS AIR PROMO SNATCH 10111 PURGE tIMER TORT 9 mai CYCLE TIMER SW2 RAKE TIME CONTINOUS /11140 PLB CLOGGED FILTER PSI OIFFERENtIAL PRESSURE SWITCH 5W3 ZONE 1 HEATERS CFF /ON HCI ZONE 1 CONTACTOR MCI 14 PO ZONE I HEATERS ON 5w4 ZONE 2 HEATERS OFT' /ON H1;2 ZONE 2 CONTACTOR NO 17 PL3 ZONE 2 HEATERS ON s*5 ZONE 3 HEATERS OFT /ON HC3 ZONE 3 CONTACTOR HC3 20 P1.4 ZONE 3 HEATERS ON SW6 ZONE 4 HEATERS Orr/014 N1: ir e 4 CONTACTOR P1.5 ZONE 4 HEATERS OH SW7 ZONE 5 HEATERS OFT /O• H16 NNE 5 CONTACTOR PLR ZONE 5 HEATERS OH 8Ws ZONE 6 HEATERS OFT /011 NCO BONE 6 CONTACTOR P1.7 ZONE 6 HEATERS ON POLS PRODUCT DOOR WHY SIN TOILS 1043 DOOR INTERLOCK 154ER TOR3 10 MU MAN ACCCSS DOOR LIMIT $WITCH /47f41171414 R M � 1 • WAIN iN . MY0I au1.r VFM �A1 MIKRON INDUSTRIES 25 96 1 1I19536 Pee. 32 206- 763 -1950 AIR TEC CO. 149 P01 MAY 00 '00 13:418 #44 •r` VAX"' 77,.9 3 741 MODEL RGB ANSI 163,9 & A.G.A,14.94 CAN /C.O.A. 2.662.6 DESCRIPTION Rozner+Modet ROB Series packaged units are 7S% thormar effi- cient gravtlyvented, gas•fired forced air furnaces, designed for InetatWdon outdoors and used. with recirculating and/or makeup. air warm air duct systems, The ROB units use either natural or propane gas, as specified, In sizes from 75,000 through 400,000 BTUM gas input, Standard features Include intermittent spark pilot with electronic Ilamo supervision, a singte•stage 24•volf gas valve, and all the required lima and lately controls, including a reverse air flow limit switch. For automatic operation, each unit is wired for field con• notion to a remote 24V thermostat: The ROD Series models have aweatheriud, galvatume stool cab. root with Interlocking joint construction (U.S Patent No, 6,373,073) end a lull curb cap for mounting on a root curb or supports The standard packaged furnace has a horizontal discharge air open. tag. A bottom discharge air opening is available with the addition of a downturn plenum, The blower cabinethes a horizontal inlet but is engineered to allow for horizontal and /or bosom air inlets with various optional damper control systems, The air control systems for both return air heating and makeup air are comple• mented by a selection of gas control options. To obtain the desired CFM, a•wide selection of optional motor and Wive combinations are available to operate the centrifugal blower, To meet a variety of Installation requirements, these packaged units are available in selected combinations equipped with a downturn plenum, an evaporative cooling module, e cooling coil cabinet, and an outside air Inlet hood. Both the duct furnace and the packaged unit are design'certified by the American Gas A4aocia lion and approved by the Canadian Ges. Association, STANDARD FEATURES • Orifices for natural gas • Aluminized steel heat exchanger (When inlet air temperature is belaw•40•F or temperature nee ie 1esa 40 optional stainless steel heat exchanger is recommended) • 120•volt power supply • 24'volt control transformer • Redundant single•stage combination gas valve (see Note 1) • Intermittent spark pilot (set page/52) • Fan and limit safety controls • Reverse air flow limit control OUTDOOR, GRAVITY VENTED, GAS FIRED, • Adjustable belt drive • Motor contactor • Terminal block wiring • Insulated, weatherized cabinet with interlocking joint construe. lion (U.S. Patent No. 5,373,673) for outdoor mounting • Horizontal discharge air opening with duct flanges • Full curb cap base • Horizontal Inlet air opening with duct flanges • Vent cap • Left side access to turner and controls (facing airstream) OPTIONAL FEATURES - FACTORY. INSTALLED • Unit equipped for propane gas • a.3.(409) stainless steel heat.exchanger • 321 stainless steel heat exchanger • E.3 (409) stainless steel burners • E'3 (409) stainless steel drip pan • Intermittent spark pilot with flame supervision and limed tockout.(see page 52) • 1/4 HP through 3 HP open drip.prool, totally enclosed, energy efficient and 2•speed motors: 5 HP available In open drip•proof (see pages 42.47 for selection) • 20W1, 230/1, 208/3, 23013, 480/3, 575/3 alternate supply voltages • Motor starter ( optional with motors having Internal overload protection) • Burner air *hullers (required for units equipped for propane gas) • Two•stage gas control (unit mounted or remote temperature aoloolor) pages 52.53) • Electronic modulation (see pages 62.63) • Mechanical modulation (see pages 52.63) • Mechanical modulation with lull fire bypass (Doe pogo 53) • Makeup air controle/dampers (see pages 6455) • 1/2" 0 D DX cable (Chicago code) • Convenience outlet • Fireatat(s) • Proozoatat • FUter rack with filters (1" or 2" disposable, permanent or pleated) • Evaporative cooling modulo (see pages 156.57) • 30% 0/A inlet hood (Adjustable 0.30% dampers) (lie page 54) • Downturn Plenum Cabinet (Insulated) • (see page 55) • Discharge damper, 2•position, with downturn plenum (Dou page 55) • Cooling cot, cabinet (sea pages 58.56) ' Double wall cabinet construction • Manilold.auengement for Ulinois•School Code (see page 63) • High ambient burner Cutoff • gas pressure safety switches *Ale flow proving switch • Vertical flue extension • Right side controls (lacing austream) • OPTIONAL FEATURES-FIELD INSTALLED • Full roof curb (see page 60) • Disconnect switch -UL Listed • Sinple•eIage thermostat • 1Wo•stage thermostat • Electronic 7 =day programmable thermostat • Thermostat guard with locking cover • Remote control console (see pages 70•72) • Igo% Outside air, screened inlet air hood (see page 51) NOTE 1! Regulated combination redundant gas valve consists of combination pilot solenoid valve, electric gas valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shut•off, and manual shutoff, all in one body. Gas supply pressure must not exceed 0.6 PSI (8 oz.•14' wc.). Minimum inlet pressure for natural gas is 5" w.c. Minimum Inlet pressure for propane gas is 11" w.e. NQTE.2: Not certitled for residential utie: O. hart 1 ;• d matat ed on 024 ham: EJL i IN lEj 113111112 1W QI]Q1E3111101 IN r InlQ 2I col AOS RE ) ER -E/ 0 Ions Qal Cul 12E1 sh , • , lot d 011010 $rvd Mats a n: ., Ei Ei • 11EINIKal N� i 11/[A 1 J not clop euc uNt IA ?0'1. • d 1 za't. E 101 �� Pool 0400 • 1 t u w101 ' • wnnon twin Cab•rw1 344'/. En 900 Elm 121 alliffi rioes lob Gt1nD1 � �E1� ® ��01� 9tnovo $Or'joN111' lot *mot • 3911 x 8 P4f it oo C uro t t with !n rm and Coats Cos with Oownlu MOM. •IZ• N • O ____ "T I '8 and 100 17 �1 / t NIVIIIRVIIIIThli • ifil 1 I I M..' i C ti 1 201 Ira • 11EINIKal N� f EMI an En 1E11111 3 ?0'1. • E r , Wall za't. E W��� to 250 41'h 344'/. N1ia2 MIMI 40 wain 900 42h 45'h 760 634. EMS s0 ro11501111111111Illarall AU 00*n • . 10 / 0 400 hytlionlll Comm. Naltirn Au O. en ... WI B PIMum (Bottom) 0 oohs • a A.t Oo•M • - 19'h I 8 9tnovo $Or'joN111' lot *mot • 3911 x 8 Cute Cap • MMan1 with • peon*, Coohn Coll C8o041 nal lkeatta!W na •a era a 1 lM In "T I E VW' 0 0 of • 11001 � AUI 17 �1 / t UM *4h 000)v* el4AVA1 MOOR A431) ano Cooing Co* abe+N 0.1 AU) 1 I I M..' i C ti W't1nt4Mt 01 too cabu'al Owe • • WW1 a 4 11 es 42.47) BTUH In. T)larmal Output Ca • salty 78%3* • (H)4 8 Net We n1 (1b1.) * ** •ROB 8tup We (Lot, t * ** Ots CMN1ie110n - Nilutil * * * * Fear Slta (FAtall arb optunat ono Ava4iblo M t• of 2' dltpotabw, ppmanent.. puatad.) 75.000 50.100. d00.120 720•2850 1000.2860 tp0 100.000 79,000. 800.1440 1440.3400 121 20,23 125,000 >i7,S00.. A.0 A. CFM fTa • . - RGB A O A, CFM Aa • a - HAG!! ** C.G.A. CCM Aa • g., F100 C.O.A. CFM Fla • - MAGR *a 600.1060 8oa9eo 980.3400 10004200 12004800 1000.1805 18054800 (21 20125. 150. 150,000 117,000 82 1200.1440 1440.4700 1200.2106 2185.4700 (2) '8120 13) 1 0•226 175,000 106.500 82 1400.4665 2525.5000 12) 16220 42) 18426 200' 200,000 156,000 02 1600.1825 1025.5100 1800.2805 2885.5100 ,73,500 • 02 1805 +2185 2165.5150 1605.3250 3250.5150 (1) 16220 (1) 16220 11) 20120 1 20 (1) 16.44 I1 1822S (1) 20.26 (1) 20225 250 250,000 ' 195,000 82 2005.2405 300 900 000 234.000 2405 =2885 350 350 000 273,000 2805.3370 400 400.000 312,000 02 3205.3850 5055 3205.5714 5775•7100 111131111=1111111=111 510. S10. 520.. 111201111=111311111 CP 709 709 602 uriurtra wan (1) 20020 135 20225 (3) 20215 (2) 18a24 3,4 (21 20220 1 (11 16025 (2) 20225 (1) 20225 (1) 20220 13120.25' • �y,�rwaan'a•�N +�4 206- 763 -1950 A1R TEC CO. PACKAGED DUCT FURNAC / BLOWER UNIT FOR COMMERCIAL I INDUSTRIAL HEATING AND MAKEUP AIR TECHNICAL DATA (See Blower Chart, pa • AO A. raten9s ►a al.l.daa to 2000 Wt. Abov 2000 Met 0e•rma by 011 rte things, 4% lot Bath 1000 Het above an laver. 0044. talings io aN.sud s Io 2000tett M167711a1udeunitt (20011(0 4503 *IA ate do•ruted Oy 0% of ma *•mwu input * e 1 •/1' Ino'Calaa IMph CFM 1lttlq. * A A Wal0nli shown Ill 186012402d *nee and ISowot only. Add *also Of actaswntl Nletted t *64. Oat C606•4I** to af+r'e(+at 0r00ent 11.1/2 met, tot an tams 11 are lot pie COnMC1'on (0 • loo1 •etege gas valve. not gal supply Ino sIte. NOM I Nam devotee 001414.I 00I au Mid M 4000■131304 t00461 *%41413 .003001 to 4Muta aarplala loopy L &, taw 1104 W * NraN Ma• o• Nov ads (Ndn0 overaaAV 110004 " a'ta 1016.11 623141 *pew* 144 10111 and COMaIN I 110081 A064'1101 OPTIONAL PONNTWIN PLENUM 0P1 JAS 01t34031 ; Cycle SPURR rtt�o aojrG 3 I ► :tie 1O.I.Ct I ill •1 X 9 2 �---• 8: ' 9Z -- 95,6 LE" 5 :9t iTew i PONT VIEW OF OPTIONAL DOWNTURN PLENUM wipe Wits10S OF ACCU$ORIRS (lbs,) - Add to Ship Wet,ht of Unit 1 C FRONT r,t. 149 P02 MAY 08 '00 13:49 4 oven 414\ 11 M ■ rt %. *, • YEARS � !R ` 1 CLEANANC80 i$0N COMBU•T/LE• I 'Wrl * OOnem » 0'. (W non i444314 M I roll 12,.6 on A Ccoo044.404 Iw• IAN. M 1ee1 12.,0 sham sh 100204 2511 e* , /Nil OS annl' 44111.41110, I4!1 WAR a• tb►Iral 44•111 naA44n'I4/11004 n11I1 /4 With AM W' A' SW d 4611 50) 2 UM ao • 114+1 3 POO 11112E+2remool* = a' 4. COMA$ 444 um *fin Molt I high( Po" lop vl 6404/' to'CP 01 ;yet tap t fr I?,v. 001.140 CO ca0w'41 to bottom O1 c Moot woe 0 lions s I • . ed Instal ed on the fu nom: iiii 100 Ea 150 to 200 Ea 250 300 350 400 Downturn du das a Men onsi c l, induddMional crate w ro 18 13 188 229 ornacti 228 !ICI Mons sh • . s • sale! 100 111 • sue bi and Installat(o 'a,ll linnillinlillien immilialiilura wail Outside r Inlet Hood 70 70 70 78 76 79 79 gal 87 92 PI (S.Ito 10sch•rge Air 0.e ••- 19'/sx0 ( I . Roof Curb lor Basic Unit 20 112 ��jQ 90 EMI 90 112 117 95 K] 95 11Ima 123 101 � 101 129 ing, NM I I I ��E1 138 117 Era Iffigi 160 an Roof Cu.. far Uri, wan Downturn Plenum Cabnet pm Root Curb for Unit with Colin. Coil Cabinet CO an of Curb for oil ibl with Downturn Plenum anri Good Coil +Coil CabinAb ISIS 144 140 155 155 165 185 171 (� 0D8t, s$zE 111121111111110111111113111 D t llial maluivisi 11111111113701 lim MEM Unit with Cooling Cod Cabinet Option AU1 Ij and 100 112111116/31111571111110111 Sttut as C 6 I Iliwpr-ASINIEDRIIIIVIIIEltil 2'0 225 III 250 isarinanro 39'h 47 :w/1 ccri Esougym 15'/1 20 0 1111111111111altill 10 10 11 11'*/r . 300 t 36' /r 'a,ll linnillinlillien immilialiilura 350 1121111:62111r11 A 400 WI A 511 Horizontal Discharge Air Opening - 18 x 0 Return Air Opening -• 1 9'h x 9 PI (S.Ito 10sch•rge Air 0.e ••- 19'/sx0 Standard Ho /itontel Air Inlet - 19'1? x 8 r... Curb Cap 01011011001 wi Op 101161 Coolin • Coil Cabinet not 1Nueltated (Ins de Curb Ca • Len • th W dth Unit with Cooling Cod Cabinet Option AU1 , 0 � / t Sttut as C Unit with Downturn Plenum (Option AOS) and Cooling Cod Cab net Option AUI_) For Dimensions of duel opanin•, spe I 1 I Same as C coal cabinet pa 50 1\1 %.11141V1'f0 5 NOTES: t, Raynor Cosigned opeonol outside Or hood or woporaliw cooling modutq is requited lo gnaw• oompleie weather resistance, 2. Bow and ccnuol access 'mown 1811 side (facing airstream), Speedy right side (Option A.M2) for opposer; sae •Ccobs and connect ons. MODEL IIRD WITH OPTIONAL, DOWNTURN PLL'NUM t 32 } T 3 y 32 r :go WRING COWAN. v0L TACK OPTi0NAt WAN AIR 19- GAS r MO WIRIN 1.DHE VOLTAGE �••._ 3AQ ---• 85 16 LEFT SIDE VIER r IELO K111INO CO$TPOL V. TOE 111.0•(1 SECTION I NAHACE AIP rot! 3 1 19 � K1E1.0 I ill ING O v OLTAG E 191 B _ d L[rl SIOC VICr 3 wy tune CAP WEIGHTS OF ACCESSORIES (Igo.) - Add to Ship Weight of Unit, ..00.41 materlai w nal a wrs n 'h rains 01 Al least 5.0 ) ?. Unit top to QYlrhaN$ -• 36', a. Side amours commis - q. Contra Bids - un4 width plus 6'. FRONT VIEW OF OPTIONAL DOWNTURN PLENUM t Height from top 01 Sabinel to lop of curb * • height horn top ul cabinet to bo10m 01011600 s141 Page 33 • 8 N w W Op rating Instructions R Parts Manual 3(411/ thru 3C414A, 3(415C, 3(416( ind 4(659A thru 4(661 Please read and save these instructions. Read carefully before attempting to assemble, Install, operate or maintain the product described. Protect yourself and others by observing all safety information. Failure to comply with Instructions could result In personal injury and /or property damage? Retain instructions for future reference. Dayton® Tubeaxial Fans Description Dayton tubeaxial fans are designed and built for use as an exhauster in paint spray booths, cleaning tanks, and mixing rooms, Can also be used In industrial ventilation systems handling temperatures up to a maximum of 200 °F, Motor, drive belts, and self-aligning sealed ball bearings are Isolated from air stream so that contaminated air or vapors can be exhausted without damage to drive or motor. Use in atmospheres corrosive to aluminum is not recommended as damage to fan blade may result. CERTIFIED RATING FOR AIR AND SOUND Dayton Electric Manufacturing Co. certifies that the tubeaxial fans shown herein are licensed to bear the AMCA Seal, The air performance shown Is based on tests performed in accordance with AMCA Standard 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating" and rated In accordance with AMCA Publication 211, "Certified Rating Program - Air Performance." The sound performance shown is based on tests performed In accordance with AMCA Standard 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." The sound power level ratings shown are in decibels referred to 10 ^•12 watts. The A•weighted sound levels shown are for Installation Type B: Free Inlet, Ducted Outlet, Sound levels shown do not include the effects of end reflection. Drive Guard A OD 0eC t; ID Figure 2 Dimensions DOW Guard r F Max Air Paw A MODEL 3C411A Unpacking When unpacking, consider the following: 1. Double groove fan pulley with malleable spilttapor bushing is assembled on fan, 2. Motor, motor pulley, and belts packed separately when fan is ordered complete. 3, Remove jackscrews from plastic bag attached to motor mounting base fr use in assembly, Model A lS U l I Shall 3C411A 3C412A 3C413A 3C414A 3C415C 3C416C 4C659A 4C660A 4C661A Form 552410 27.00 - 33,75 37.75 39,75 45.75 51.75 14.69 18.75 21.13 25.75 32.25 36.25 38.25 44.25 50.25 13.50 17.50 19.88 24.38 30.50 34.50 36.50 42.50 48,50 12.19 16,06 18.04 18.00 24.00 29.00 29.00 32.00 36.00 12.00 16.50 16.50 23.81 29.84 31.88 32.91 35.65 38.79 12.42 19.06 20.48 24.00 29.00 31.00 32.00 37.00 42.00 17.00 19.00 20.50 1.000 1,188 1.188 1.188 1.438 1.438 0.625 0.625 0.625 Dayton Operating Instructions and Parts Manual Models 3C411A thru 3C414A, 3C415C, 3C416C, and 4C659A thru 4C661A Performance MAO, ( I I,r,rrr,(I r'r,VJrr I W(!1) Ovt ihrk It',tali( r'rrt•.urr `,hnvdn I rrr Art 1 A I' 1 4 , 1' 1) S (' { 4 1 1 f ,,n rAt,it„ P '. 1 ' , 1' 8 1 ' 111' 4C659A 12" 4C660A 16 3C412A 30" 3C413A 34" 1300 77.5 1520 81.7 1760 85.7 2250 92.3 2040 77.9 2750 85.8 3390 91.5 95 3 2850 81.3 3495 83,2 4040 86.9 4670 90,8 5300 94.2 10995 121 90 14040 • 98 16495 1170 76.1 1405 1660 85,2 2170 92,0 1780 78,6 2565 86.3 3245 91.8 9 6 . 74 6 1280 79.6 1560 84,1 91.5 1190 79,4 2350 86.6 3090 92.2 3630 96,2 2560 80.3 3260 82.7 3845 86.7 4505 91.1 5155 94.6 89 11710 94 13630 16 1 p 1 2195 83.9 9 3625 87,2 4320 90,6 5000 94.2 98 89 11194 13180 5785 2690 4130 91.6 4830 94,2 8395 93 9990 93 122 20 14995 2110 87.5 3115 91.4 3920 93,7 4660 95,1 NOTE: BHP does not include drive losses except where indicated by *. ( *) Does include drive losses. 1070 - 78.6 1440 1245 - 2010 1925 1825 1695 90.9 90.5 90.1 89.7 MEOW 1670 1946 2253 2877 - - - - 1336 1/3 0.304 2045 -- -- .. 1800 1/2 0.488 2910 2690 1337 - 2221 3/4 0.754 92.3 93.0 93,2 3490 3330 3140 2895 2547 1 1.032 96.0 96.0 96.4 96.8 2785 91.5 3690 94,9 96.7 1213 1487 1988 3435 95.6 4275 2255 98.1 1/4 1/3 1/2 3/4 1/3 3/4 1 1 6745 6370 5490 -- - - 1312 1 1,008* 89 88 87 2 -- - ....4"' 7915 7615 7285 65 5655 - - 1468 1V ) 1.31 9115 8860 8580 7985 7295 6490 - 1688 2 1.98 95 94 94 95 98 99 -- 10310 10090 9850 9335 8790 8155 7455 1910 3 2.87 99 98 97 97 99 101 102 0.254 0.341 0.457 0.772 0.325 0.525 0.708 1.008 1.340 -- - -- 1020 1 'h 1.40 8485 - 1466 2 1,90 95 -- -- 11100 9740 -- 1320 3 2.91 99 99 14145 13190 12125 1551 5 4.72 100 102 104 14430 13760 13020 11285 7155 -- -- 936 2 1.83 94 92 92 94 96 -`- -- 16560 15985 15350 13905 12305 7740 -- 1074 3 2.78 100 100 99 99 100 102 -- 19290 18800 18280 17150 15880 14445 12180 1251 5 4.36 101 102 101 100 100 102 103 • • , • • • - • . : - . - • • ■ • .1 • List of contents: To the user page 1 General Safety. instructions 2 Installation and preparation for use 2 , Operation 2 Maintenance 2 Safety and warning symbols . 3 Technical data 4 Scale,drt win , . „ siji ( 6 ' +f 5 • Is Opeiriting principles Main �;4 l 71 ,E mr ma� : ± . ,► S cre'Wt ` ;,� t %. !,;.'!.' Corn " .11Y)i1.... r i ?vt RQ RIU • ,Jfr l ip.1 ) �.,.., torit>g: ;r, i ; - ` :!; r;, Hoisting co + ~:i r y. Moving with a'fb , , x { , Installing ..„. Location , .. Bloc* connoctlon$,,,;, Connoctin , -p it, Ope `Instrumca tj Regulatin .b djit ,First 'start of compresso Normal starting and stopping cerpwn f 1t. r mpressor output 8 8 don ,: , ' r ► . 8 nn ing` i 8 9 1; J 11i4i00411!iil / is i0 13 ure 14 .).,,:s.t. 14 15 15 Maintenance Preparations for maintenance 17 Procedures after maintenance 17 Maintenance schedule 18 Oil change 19 Replacing oil separator element 20 Replacing oil filter element 21 1 11 11 11 ,12 16 R/S 10-OMP May, 1998 Adjusting V- belt 25 Change of V- belt 25 Replacing compressor unit pulley and shaft seal 26 Installing and removing pulley 27 Testing safety valve 28 Testing thermal relay 28 Troubleshooting 29 - 30 Removing from service 31 User adjustable settings 32 Factory settings 32 Oil recommendation 33 Part list 34 - 41 Compressor air end 34 Electric motor, pulley, belts, bushings & fan 35 Intake valve 36 Receiver 37 Discharge valve 38 Control system 39 Compressor oil circulation 40 Canopy 41 Electrical Schematics . 42 - 44 Main Circuit Diagram 42 Control Circuit Diagram • 43 Wiring Diagram 44 Component Layout 45 List of Components , .. ' ` •��.il e � %I 46 " 12 0 e p% ( 0 m /F 5 �h Zhc . 4 TO THE USER Curtis welcomes you to the wide circle of Curtis screw compressor users. This manual will help you learn how to handle, use and service your new screw compressor correctly . READ MIS MANUAL CAREFULLY BEFORE YOU START " TO USE ThIE COMPRESSOR AS IT CONTAINS IMPORTANT INFORMATION ON START-UP AND CORRECT USE. , The warranty given by Curds for this screw compressor is not valid if the compressor has not been serviced and used in a !dance with the instructions contained in this booklet. . Servicing is very simple but ii i #mportant to perform lire gui tidy..., �, Always keep this manual with the com user compressor or where its can find it said Make sure that the compressor is used and serviced eccor to the instructions contained in manual. Jbserve all the general safety rules and instructions fo "musing compressed air equipment as well as the specific safety instructions given in this book. These are marked with a AS, Curtis reserves the right to alter the operating instructions and the specifications of the equipment without prior notice. Do not open the side panels of the compressor before (� Lumina off the power at the main switch, Repairs to screw compressors should be left to trained personnel who have been authorized by Curtis or a Curtis representative to carry out repairs. After any maintenance or repair, always fill in the service log provided with the comp eissor. When making inquiries about compressors, always give Ml details on the typo of compressor and its serial numbcr.These can be found on the machine's name plate. R/S 10.OMP May 1996 1r Safety This chapter contains the general safety instructions concerning this compressor. Read also the safety instructions for transport, commissioning, use, and maintenance presented separately in each section of the manual. Always read the safety instructions before starting to work. In this manual, the instructions concerning safety are marked with the symbol: In addition to these instructions, the local regulations may impose additional requirements that must be observed. General safety instructions Installation and preparations for use The compressor's noise level, measured in an open space, may rise higher if the installing location is surrounded by walls that reflect sound. Consider this when choosing the best location for the compressor, Observe the local regulations on the Ole of hearing protectors. Make sure that the intake air for the compressor is clean and cool. Prevent the exhausted air from recirculating to the intake. Make sure that foreign objects cannot get into the compressor with the intake air. Make sure that the intake air does not contain any explosive gases, Do not exceed the,compressor's ratad maximum pressure, capacity, or rotation speed (See Technical Specifications)';' Uie'pncumatic hoses that are rated to withstand the working pressure. Pay special attention to the hose mountings, A whipping hose may cause unpredictable damage. Remove the pressure In the hoses before disconneitingo ;The pressure vessels in the pressurized air network must fblfill pressure vessel regulations. The `electrical connection shalt be made by authorizad, ,;qualitled persons There might be some oil in the water . condensate, Notice the regulations .eoncorn�i qil removal. r x� �° , Operation. Do not blow pressurized air against the skin, Do not use the compressor with its doors open, Use recommended oil types only, Do not mix different types of oil. Compressors with remote starting should be provided with a warning sign that indicates the method of starting„ Maintenance Maintenance work on the compressor should always be done with the compressor stopped and disconnected from the electrical supply. The shut off valve to the pressurized air network should also be closed. Make sure that the air /oil receiver is depressurized before you start maintenance, Do not repair the air receiver by welding. All alterations must conform to the regulations concerning pressure vessels. Starting of compressors with remote control and in multicompressor use must be prevented while maintenance wo}k is in progress. Do not neglect the regular check -ups and maintenance of the compressor. With the exception of the repairs described in this manual. all repair work should be carried out by authorized personnel. 2 R/S 10-0MP May, 1996 WARNING SYMBOLS Ptease Understand the meaning of these symbols Read manual before operating Hot or harmfull gas Hot surfaces Compressor will start without warning Hearing protection required electric current RIS 10-0MP May, 1996 • Technical data 4 CURT/S R/S 10-0MP I May, 1996 • Compressor • Normal working pressure psi 100 130 175 Capacity at normal working pressure cfm 40 32 26 Shaft output @ normal working pressur , hp 10 10 10 Maximum working pressure - psi 115 145 190 Capacity at maximum working pressure cfm 38.5 31 25 Minimum working pressure psi 44 44 44 Idling shaft power consumption hp 2 1.7 1.5 Screw rotor speed rpm 4940 4220 , 3520 Cooling ru Cooling medium air air air Maximum ambient temperature Deg, F 104 . , 104 ... 104 Compressed air temperature above cooling medium temperature '.Dog, p 59 , `59 69 Air cooled compressors Co air flow cfm 848 848 848 Dimensions of air outlet In ' 2.21 x 2,6 2-21 x 2.6 2.21 x2.5 Max. cooling air pressure drop pal 0.01 0.01 0.01 Cooling air immature rise Deg. F 66 66 85 ON cooler ?feat rejection r ' 3t a j9TU ` r 1 19,789 >,.. ;19,789 After cooler heat rejection �—. 4 . :4,094 4,094 , Electric 'sff, 1 ��, ' Main motor,claas F, IP 54" ' �" t i ,k:�, , p`. :`, f ��#. rr { ' 10 , ' 1` "� 1 0'" ; .` . d `10 Nominal speed of rotation rpm 3600 3600 3600 Fuse (max.) 230/460V " A 40/30 40/30 40/30 Max, current 230 /460V A 28/14 28/14 28/14 ► , •....; .., . . ;'e }• i: . : A . General technical data h 011 capacity Gal . ,,..r1.8 , .. 1,6. 1.6 Air connection R 3/4 OUT R 3/4 OUT R 3/4 OUT Noise level at 3 FT, 'dB(A) 75 75 75 Compressor weight Lb 309 309 309 Technical data 4 CURT/S R/S 10-0MP I May, 1996 • Scale drawing R/S 18-OMP May 1998 No. rili - ...1 , 1 ra in 6 is Ou II__ r V 0 MEN a 9 Component 11111101M 411111111=110 Function • no «. V. it S V t .s 1 d. ,.... s2 q / rj f t, I t.._ l _ , II '.1 55. . rti ...'.11.'11 ..-, 1 • b _ . - . " Receiver . A I } i!t'_' .' Ffi:r. L eas °� i t �.;.. + i ' ,i't: v;' ,r .x'41 .t �. • . ..' • '• 111.1" 1....1.—I1 • .. { a ...I. I .- . S$19sj.!t.4P otou from ai. !___ _... _ .. • v.,, ve • 1 V_ • «` 14 _ 1 ... 1. 11.1 ...' 1.,_ 1 • !1 - 41 1' .. — fl t•._. . .!.1 ._ 1. • _ ' :. 1.. • .t• 11 t _,__, _..1. 44. / 1 • ., a .. . , . , . NNIMOVIONIIMP Air • ' •r .. is d wr co, Ares e air ; _,__..,... . toMln$-- ,,i... . . 11 Fan 12 011 filter Filters oil , 13 _ . ermostat Maintains min. 01 ten. ruture 14 Instrument panel _ Water se • arator Contro and satin • of compressor 15 Removes condensed water from pre ssurized air 16 Control valves Control compressor air out u 17 Main switch Power sy ... Operating principles Main components The Curtis screw compressors are oil cooled, single -stage screw compressors. Pressurized air is produced in a screw unit driven by an electric motor. The oil in the compressed air is separated in an oil separating receiver. Coolers are used for cooling down pressurized air and oil. E 43 5 t4 6 R/S 10-OMP May, 1996 ig u§ Screw compressor unit The main parts of a screw unit are: 1 2 3 R/S i0 -OMP May, 1998 • i Body (I), two meshing rotors (2,3) that are running on bearings in the body (1) and in the pressure flange (4). and bearing cover (6). The driving shaft is staled with a sealing ring (5). Compression 1. Two intermeshed rotors enclosed by the housing(not shown) form the compression chamber of the screw compressor. Air is drawn into the space between the interlobes as they pass the inlet port. 2. As the rotors rotate, the point of contact of the interlobes moves so that the connection with the inlet ports is cut off and the air is trapped. 3. During rotation the space between the interlobes is reduced and compression takes place. 4. When the required compression has been achieved the air flows through the outlet port into the receiver. Regulating system of compressor output The purpose of the compressor's regulating system is to adjust the output according to the consumption of air, keeping power consumption as low as possible. Running loaded . • When the motor is started, both of the magnetic valves (1 and 2) become energized. The magnetic valve (2) closes receiver (6) blow -out, and the magnetic valve (1) releases the pressure below the in -take valve (8) piston (9), whereby the under pressure in the compressor's intake duct opens the intake valve, and the compressor runs loaded Start/stop operation When the output pressure reaches the upper set value ofthe pressure switch (3), both of the magnetic valves (I 'and 2) become do -ener i The magnetic valve (2) empties the receiver (6) } t t And he , . �... �fbi. "`'y'ti l:�.r {' !` r :'and the magnetic valve (1) lets network pressure'throug' i a� shu tle'valve to:the underside - of the intake valve piston and, thus, closes the intake 'ialve0The'compressor runs unloaded, . If pressurized air is'consumed, *and the output pressure lower set value of the pressure switch (3), the magnetic valves become live, and the compressor runs loaded. If pressurized air is not needed, the compressor is stopped by a timer relay, and it starts again when the network pressure has dropped to the lower sot value of the pressure switch. If the comprcesor is stepped with the Stop switch in tho`conirol panel, both ofthe mngnctie:valves become do energized: The magnetic valve (1) Closes the intake valve and the n,, ctia ye (2) starts cmp `'�� If the compressor is to' be restarted with the Stait switch, you have to (1,.,2 min). Continuous running The control panel has a selector switch for start/stop operation or continuous run, continuous run is selected, the compressor does net stop but runs °with hill output`ar unloads under the control of the pressure switch. , Note! Start/stop operation is normally the most economical running mode, and it is recommended. det In start/stop operation the compressor starts and stops automatically 8 r • r rcccwVer can R/S 1o.OMP May ^ 1986 Installing Moving with a forklift ® Observe special caution during lifting and transporting A forklift pallet should be used. The forklift forks should go under the compressor from the direction shown in the illustration, A N Electric connections should only be made by a qualified electrician. 11 A/S.1O OMP May, 1996 Location 1. The compressor must be installed on a laver" " rt!�tc e;` bearing in mind the weight of the compressor (see Technical' SpeciflcattOiii uraIna a should be provided for removal of separation Well or g,. `aa(econt , iner condensed water (oil sep I ep a ) Condensed water contains oil. 2. Observe the minimum distances from walls and other machines as shown in the dimensional drawing, 3, Make sure that the compressor room is adequately ventilated. 'The temperature of the cooling air must not exceed 104 degrees F or drop below 32 degrees F. Prevent recirculation of cooling air. Electric connections The electric connections must comply with the NEC standards. All local.regulations must also be followed, Make sure that the operating voltage is correct. The maximum variation from the rated value is 10 %. Connect the power supply cable to the compressor, Observe connected load (See electric diagrams and Technical Specifications). Connecting to pressurized air network Install the water separator. Connect the electric connector (on the outer wall) of the water separator's magnetic valve. Install a shut -off valve between the compressor and the network for maintenance use. Observe the minimum dimension of the network main pipe (see Technical Specifications), Connect the compressor to the network with a flexible hose, If piston compressor is connected to the same network, it should be separated from the screw compressor with a pressure vessel, unless the volume of the network between them is sufficiently large. Connect a hose (ram the compressor's water separator to an oil separating well or.a separate container: I) Compressor with built -in aftercoolor, 2) Water separator 3) : Outlet pipo 4) Water separator 5) Water remover 6) Shut -off valve 7) Safety valve A • Condensate removal: drain to oil separator well or into separate container, Planning must account for the following special requirements - compressed air is not used): - inclinations towards water separators (2) at least I:200 - outlets from top side of pipe (3) water separators (4) for outlets automatic water removal and shut -off valves for water separators (2) 12 . R/S 10-OMP May, 1996 If the pressurized air network includes treating equipment (such as drier) contact your Curtis dealer. ( (OPERATION 1. Hourmeter 2. Pressure gauge 3. "On" Light 4. Stop/Emergency Stop button 5. Electric motor alarm light 6. Pressurized air overheat alarm light 7. Selector switch for Start/stop operation / Continuous running The pressurized air alarm light goes on if the output air temperature rises to 212 degrees F. `'The compressor stops if the temperature reaches 239 degrees F. 13 R/S 1O-OMP May, 1996 Regulating the compressor's 'pressor Pressure svyitch Note! The minimum pressure difference is 9 E 14 m switch is used for setting the operating prasiure upper limit in unload, lower limit - full output. { Stop the compressor, t, ' °- Ove "the preiIum switch cover (1). ° *` F u e desired upper pr sure limit for the compressor w (2),1(Note that the pressure range remains the seine. =asaty; adjust =the lower pressure limit with thc'scrow till ihe' prssure switch cover back into place. ,'_. ` Y�`` t. ' 6.'81m the compressor and check the pressure limits in the pressure gauge. Step compressor and readjust, if necessary. The lower pressure limit has been set, at the factory, iS P,S.I, lower than the upper4,limit. Do not exceed the compressor's maximum pressure tSeeTechnic lS `Setting the unload and output pressure limits too close to one sum cause problems by making the compressor unload too frequently:I' recommended pressure difference is 15 P.S.L (See T cal Spedfrcations). "" S Ln�bu.`..s Setting unload time The unload time is set with the adjustment of a timer relay in the electric cabinet. • Unload time is the time when the compressor runs unloaded before stopping, if no need of pressurized air arises. Select the timer relay range: turn the screw 1. Adjust the desired time: ,turn the screw 2. Having stopped after running unloaded, the compressor restarts automatically. First start of compressor th If the compressor has been stored for a long period of time, check the drive belt. tightness (see page for. instructions). <. Fill the receiver with oil u to the Max, mark (See Oil Recommendation and instructions on oil cliaige'�;!n.. . ..Y .:r 2. ; Turn the main switch on. 3, Select the compressor operating` mode:. Start/stop operation / Continuous running Recommendation: Uso Startletop operation: 4. Start the compressor for a moment to check the unit's direction of rotation. (correct direction of rotation is indicated by arrow on compressor unit mounting beam). Do not let the compressor run for longer than 2 seconds. The compressor unit's direction of rotation must always be checked when the compressor is reconnected. Running the compressor unit in the wrong direction causes damage. 3. Close the compressor doors. 4. Start the compressor. tt Never open the compressor doors when the unit is running If necessary, adjust the output and unload pressures (see page 14). 15 RIS 1 o-OMP May 1998 • - Normal starting and stopping L.� The compressor stops and starts automatically. Keep the compressor doors closed when the unit is in operation. After stopping, make sure that the receiver pressure has fully vented. Wait approx. 1 minute before restarting. Starting • depress the Start button, Stopping depress the Stop / Emergency Stop button turi the main'switch off. Note! If possible, stop the compressor when it is running unloaded and the receiver Is almost pressureless, !`n!k eti ;. Stop he°comprossor Is stopped by pressing the . , ,. • .� 16 Note! Before restarting the compressor, the Stop button.must be turned clockwise °to release it. After this, the compressor can be started normally. Maintenance: . ,•.: ..,.„,:,...,,:.,,..,..„,e...•i, Preparation&for.maintenance • : mare of hot surfaces. rocedures .,Yemptiet Off make sure that the compressor cannot be stifled; • the receiver is pressureleSs;'"AftetaapPingi blow down ; aPpioxi 2 minutes. Itli " s -,t. 4,,y,.„.;,;., - ‘.:,..:,,, , 1,... prei 4- --c- ': '2, • .4:', % ',... , '... • e,' ,=, -4.. ,,,-.„. ofrvalve between the c nillor and the network.' ',.i.•.:1 on the, ti..,%" .. „Al ; - '•-• •,'''. • t 4i):"'' ''''-',..'?,...,,, . , '''!:.4,,,;- .....:,if...; •:,..? . - ' • . - ' !' , . • • .....• : ' •,„ ' -.:. • ' , • ' , , . . .. . . , ,, ... ,,,,,,,„.,,, . ■ .., • . . , , - - . • • - • ,• • ' ' • "•'" , a *pd.* • • • •‘. • it „ • remote control, compressors and compressors in sets r • ' • • sign' should be attae& chto, tht starting devic 14 • e • • d e network the.comprps . ..,.; 4 . • • , R/S 10-OMP May, 1996 ;. .„. „ • ,„ Procedure Daily Weekly After first 100h Every 2000 h IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII Every 3000h At least once a year III. 1111111111 As required 1 Check operation of waters • arator 2, Check oil level 3. Check V- belt tension * IIM. 1111111111111111111111111111111111111111 O 4. Chan_e oil 5. Re•lace oil filter * 6. Replace oil separator . ele ent �` * = YY' 'bi' ` ;; Y r � ,. °. xf 1.. ! a . ter 111111111111111111111111111 8. Replace V- !.- t; ' . * eiuf trcreen filter . • I . . . .”. I . „• ,., 1, +,......:...-.. - IP r �.} i a * ° ` * i , * f ,," r Y ' � ' °f M� * Y a . 1 F a .+ 2LQ Clean cooier extemaiIL ' 11. Clean oil mturm line orifice plate 12. Replace output valve 113. Replace intakevalve eck and tighten con- ,, .,,Check operation of .. , ' jiuttl(valve ,`'. ^. - 16. Tighten hoses and con- nectors aintenance schedule Always fill in maintenance log. MI repair work should be carried out by authorized personnel. Check oil level when the compressor Is Wait until air and oil arc separated, s v ery severe conditions, the main - anccintervals should be halved. 18 A/S 10-OMP May, 1996 raining ,ijtt -qyt, ' -'xi .s:rtt, r ..i ):_... - :. a. e r " � .., ♦ �• li�Y» { + .4=.r: : �. Rine compressor to warm up the oil (to 104 -122 degrees F) f t, w Cary out the procedures instructed on page 17. 3° 0` pen the oil filling plug* the top of the air /oil receiver. the oil drain valve under the cooler, and let the oil run into a suitable container, fi lose oil drain valve, rr on th .�„ � D �r;•i.` •. r¢�;,'3 Y ' ~ �r�v ,r. ' { i 7r lp * i' typ up to the Max. merit elide e o n � doll mei change se recommended oil types only; do not mix different oil types. ilis hot immediately after the compressor has been running o a en',the oil fiilin .valve if the receiver has pressure.,,..;:, the used oil according to the regulations on waste oil ..; i a pro cedures instructed on page 1 7� f ,• w s;�,"" ##! ai1',a• #ft!'.iG..° -�, . a�' {r »�`..�4 r } e o 'filing plug* on the to oftho air /oii recelvcr, w RF', i rroryr #�. -. ,-S t . 1. °: .• ,`a: 'y.. op ol'f with the same oil type up to Max: mark on the side of the air /oii receiver. Cps() the filling plug. T o lu`8 has a,; "safety groove that tats out th pressure possibly left in the receiver as soon as the plug is slightly opened. RIS 10-OMP May 1996 ("§ 8 ga • 20 • R/S 10 -OMP May, 1996 Replacing on separator element ® Dispose of the used separator element according to the regulations on toxic waste. Allow the compressor to cool down before starting to work. I. Refer to page 17 for preparations before the replacement work, 2. Remove the mounting nuts from the discharge and turn aside. 3. Remove the separator element. 4. Make sure that the 0 -ring of the seprator element is not left in the receiver. Installing : . Clean the receiver and valve flanges. If necessary, clean the receiver, The new separator element comes with a new 0- ring. Lubricate it with clean oil and install it into the receiver as shown ( I ). Push 'ill now element into position (II), 5. Check that the 0- ring of the receiver cover is in place and in good condition 6. Install the discharge valve. Replacing oil filter Allow the compressor to cool down. Dispose of the used filter according to the regulations on toxic waste. Before starting the work, carry out the precautions described on page 17 Installing 1. Lubricate the 0- ring of the new filter with clean oil. Install the filter by turning it clockwise by hand. R/s 10-OMP May, 1996 2. The oil filter is mounted to the side of the compressor unit. Place a piece of protective cloth under the filter, as some oil will run out when the filter is removed: 3. Remove the oil filter by turning it counterclockwise with a special key or a . screw driver (the end of the filter has a slot for this purpose) ••• y�Ska,:.aI.....4a5;aYr: >.1ws.4� vrotiNe�i2am .wan< z Replacing , air filter d Allow the compressor to cool down. The filter is not reusable; in cannot be cleaned 1. Before starting to work, carry out the precautions described on page 17. R/S 10-OMP May, 1996 • 'leaning screen filter and orifice plate Allow the compressor to cool down .1. The oil separated from the output air by the oil separator in the air/oil receiver is fed throughi narrow steel pipe from The receiver fa the pressure side bearing housing of the CoMpreSSOr unit. t ' Thii pipe is provided with an orifice plate (.039 hole) to prevent unnecessary recirculation of air, and a screen filter that prevents the orifice from becoming blocked. 1. See page 17 for preparations before starting the work. ' - • , • 1. 1 . Turn the nut fr the adapt (t in aitintercloc . :agyiewed towards the unit.(5 Ainti the nut is removed el.."' the • te b "` • I e • ' • ou e orifiee pfili(2 is Oc tr ont two ; Clean the orifice Ci plate; - 2 "'' • ; 4' • • • .„,**;•_ ;„ *•***;', Cleaning V If 3. Push the orifice plate ) back iiit‘pittedfaiidliiiihi nut.' The screen Alter is cleaned either by removing the adapter+screen (3) from the separator receiver (4) or by blowing the Screen clean with pressurized air without removing the • adapter. , - • ! • • t. - •4 . • „: . • . ,.. , 23 • • R/S 10-OMP May 1996 , • , • O,cican the coolcr extcmall b tha`�comprcuor ,qa 24 RIS 10.OMP May, 1996 Cleaning of cooler A clogged cooler raises the compressor's output temperature and may cause the compressor to stop. ugh the ccI13 tavt tho Data t . � .' r '� • ' Adjusting V-belt tightness Do not overtighten the belts as this may shorten the life of the motor's bearings. The tightnesi of the V.:belts is adjusted by raising or lowering the compressor unit. 1. See page 17 for preparations maintenance. 2. Looseti!the foiiibolts,between the unit's intake flange and,the mounting brackets. 3. The adjusting screw is located under the intake flange. Loosen its locking nut and adjust the , A a 4. Tightet‘lhe lo ldng,nut of the adjusting Ow inid the ball' be eenthctintake flange and the,; correct belt tension the screw. When the belt is pressed with 5 Lbs force between the pulleys' It; should 'yield 3/16":' )!, , • , . '-, ,...' wiit ., „,..,..,„ ii,i.4 p • , • • / y . ..., . , , 4 : .'(::,,, : i tt. 11 4 : • 0,4, t ::' ‘inou'ntfli . if • sI !t. ,,, . • . t.: . e MI tt • 4'44" - V • 4'. ,4 0 **: ' I . • - L. . . . 1 7 ''''" ri°4 o ,-• .,, , • / 4..... .. , 5 %.‘•.. 1 , p " 25 ,..., 44. • - , 10-OMP May, 1996 Replacing V-belt 1. See page 17 for preparations for maintenance. 2. Loosen thb V-belts as described above, 3. Loosen the M12 screw on the electric motor shaft counterclockwise (right- hand thread) to remove the fan. 4: Replace the belts. 5. Mount the fan back in place. Tighten the belts as described above, • Installing ,: 26 R/S 10.OMP . May, 1998 Replacing compresso, tinit pulley an shaft seal ® Be careful not to damage the shaft seal and the outer surface of the bushing! 1. See page 17 for preparations for maintenance. 2. Remove the end cover plate of electric box. 3. The pulley fastening bolt (I) has left hand threads. To loosen the bolt, tap the handle of the hex socket key §harply with a hammer. Unscrew the bolt approx. 3/16 ". ' 5. Remove the pulley (2) from the rotor shaft using a puller. 6. The bushing (3) comes offtogether with the pulley. 7. Always replace both the bushing and the shaft seal. The bushing is removed by tapping off with a drift through the three, holes in the pulley. 8. If the shaft seal is worn or damaged, remove it by using a puller. • ,'j "' Clean carefully the shaft'end and`the'sh4 seal housing surfaces: '2, °.j -Apply a coat of Loctite 542 to the outer surface Fit the shaft seal in the housing using an installing drift. 3, Push the bushing on the rotor shaft using an installing drift, Apply a thin layer of Loctite 601 on'the outer surfhce of the pulley hub. ''Press the bushing • into place and install tho;pulloy' i rith' te�o'�nting bolt ; fghten thq '1)61116'19 . R. Imp }N • r x . Bushing Tightening torque 1610 2Q12 15 Ft, Lbs. 23 Ft. Lbs. Removing and installing motor pulley 444%**144\4\4\ 27 . The pulley's mounting screws are also used for removing it Remove the screws from the holes install into the removing hole. D Pending on the bushing type, the number`of removing holes is one or two (these holes have the thread in the bushing). lighten the screw(s) evenly until the bushing comes out of the pulley's hub and becomes loose.. • When the bushing is loose, the pulley and the bushirigcan be pulled off the shaft.' 'its ='e:b * ,j • . . gWtilhescrewsevenly in turns, until theylcilighleAfter a few operating u hrcilghtan tha screws. R/S 10.OMP May, 1996 conical ekevetinto the "pulley hole an screw the tl gh w►d lig$tlx Into the` tightening e,iave the thread in the pulley).: Nish the "pulley and the bushing onto the shaft and align it with the compressor pullaw . Testing safety valve ® All adjusting and repair work on the safety valve must be left to a qualified mechanic (observe the local regulations). The opening pressure of the safety valve must be tested using a separate air line. The operation of the valve can be tested by turning the safety valve cap (1) counter- clockwise 1 - 2 turns. Testing thermal relay The protective thermal relay is tested by partly blockin whereby the compressor's output temperature rises, 28 RIS 10-0MP May, 1996 air intake or exit open a The temperature alarm light should go on at 212 Degrees F and the compressor should stop when the temperature reaches 239 Degrees F, 18 g$ ig roubleshooting 29 R/S 10-OMP May, 1996 r COMPRESSOR WILL NOT START 'J Motor overloaded -. p . -oil separator clogged —reset overcurrent protector of motor and check its setting —check compressor's output pressure — replace —check supply_ voltage ' , �, - � , � .� : � Fuses blown' .,,�,.:. re lace fuses —replace —check fuse sizes 1 ,. , rr.. ;, - ,.• . Aut. e re . ' . —reset and de t cause , . :. } t" t 3 C�r s * 3 '� a y !1 { 3 y i . i ;� : $ f � . � {,;► p r . !. a - r`. . . • Sto by air tem switch tt . ;t,1 f4 +� - + s fi .'!."' . ' + �I Fi.: 77 + ! ' i� ; a wl ! t r � z • . t � x Detect cause of overheating: — insufficient amount of oil — insufficient cooling air flow ` -w wrong compressor oil type I U rect *tloi pg. 33) — ambient temperature too • high (max. 105 °F) — cooler dirty —check thermostat —check that compressor d— r latches pre MU L.0 - check points . — re i lace Fauns In electric devks } contactor : '' , ;' • cto. coil _ INSUFFICIENT AIR OUT- PUT • • • Clo ed intake air filter 88 —rc P lace C gggeddd pl1 se for -re • lace lntuke valve not opening properly - magnetic valve faulty or dirty working - repair or replace - replace or clean —chock adjustment of pressure switch — repair or replace pressure switch I - Receiver blow down or condensate removal valve open —dirt in magnetic valve -clean magnetic valve _ High air consumption —check network for leaks and air- driven devices V belts slipping . - tighten or replace — ensure sufficient air flow Compressor room ventilation roubleshooting 29 R/S 10-OMP May, 1996 Symptom Fault Remedy T, :. ' = .�:. COMPRESSOR OVER- HEATING Indufficient amount of oil —add oil Clo :: ed oil filter --re lace Cooler d —clean Ambient temperature too high —check . HIGH OIL CONSUMPTION Oil return line or Its orifice blocked -open and clean Oil separator or its sealing danta : ed or loosened —check and repair • Oil separator clogged -- replace oil separator element Wrong compressor oil type — change oil, see Oil ommendat ons _. 3 • , ut..� . • m t.. is —c l- kand .ai NETWORK PRESSURE . °/ RISING OVER SET LIMIT ' { Hit 4' «. •} %. ^.' t :=' 1„S }! : e L a, i -x ' Pressure switch not working - _ . -check pressure switch setting r Magnetic valve not working — a ( I II, 4 I.• 1 t . Iralgan Shaft seal of compressor : — replace OVERPRESSURE STOPS COMPRESSOR .. ° ♦ < • � Unloading limit of pressure switch set too high ( see max. pressure in y Tcchnical — �.. — adjust �• .F� �.Y ` i �a t . , fir } Limrimmintram.. .. ast e t ,: a ; a < 30 R/S 10-OMP May 1996 annoying from service When a compressor is removed from service, the compressor oil, the oil filter, and the oil separator elements should be disposed of according to the current local mgulations. k • 4 • • a b e . 4 ) 1111 ) • : 31 • R/S 10-OMP May, 1996 • • A ildV l * .. . ' F Max. pressure (See Techni- cal S • 'fixations Unload time Stop temp. (therm. relay) 239 F ,, . 4' t: AlaI9 Max,vrcasuro 44 - 220 PSIG I , . ,.., 210 PSIG -... ' "' #' _ • i ;,- ,..- - Safety valve Fixed• not adivatablo Adjustment Range Factory setting Unload pressure 44 PSIG max. pressure Max. pressure (See Techni- cal S • 'fixations Unload time .05s - 300h tau , 1 ' - ure 29 PSIG max.. sure Settings Settings Changeable By User (1) 4-difference between unload and output pressures Factory aetdng (unchangeable by'user): R/S 10-OMP May, 1996 CIIRTI3 PART NUMBER: o l c IC DES CRIPTION: O ED OIL CHANGE: CURTI3 PART NUMBER BASIC DESCRIPTION: RECOMMENDED OIL CAGE as rah' part number: Petroleum ISO 32 or 46 OIL CHANGE INTERVAL: PO: WARRAN'T'Y ON COMPONENT: • R/S20 R/S2S R/S30 Synthetic ISO 46 �A�1 YE INTERVAL; WARRANTY r,TY ON a AIR MPO ' COMPONENT: Oil Recommendation for Curtis screw compressors in industrial use Models: l {models furnishedwith Petroleum 011' For extended life Available for all models WARRANTY: 2000 hour 2 years 1 year 8000 hour 2 years • 1 year R/S40 R/SSo R/S60 VO413 Petroleum ISO 32 or 46 2000 hours gallon container 13 . VO414 Synthetic ISO 46 8000 hours t o gallon container, VO414 CAUTION: Different oils must never be mixed. • • Fi/S 10.OMp May, 1996 R1S75 R/SI SO • R/S100 R/S125 PARTS LIS R/S SERIES MODEL N R/S1O VGAS$7 � n (2) CS648 . A lr Puler Blamer' . c S � �p fYf.:ei3t. (1); CS649 Separtto .BI 2) CS650.. MI Filter Jnlpt r „Velvo S :.3 �' °, •'� :. =. °�t e_��1 Viz:: ��.r.� (1) CS656 e a 4 thi Og • 1• 2 3 4 5 7 44611040 0 1 ; 485645699 ' • t „ 11 80220059 — 12 03748298 • 13 85644309 444'11,14 ;1- . 03388708 is 03633748,', •:, (4'.• ; ' : -' $LLCTRIC MOTORS R/S10 100 PSI. 230/460V 60Hz 18 85644969 1 Electric motor 460V 18 85644969 1 Electric motor 230V 19 85443119 1 Pulley (motor) 20 03383888 1 Pulley (compressor) 21 85443529 2 Belt 22 " 80655019 1 Conical bushing 23 85860879 1 Fan 85644969 F 85644969 19 85443099 20 03383888 R/8IO 130 PSI - 230/460V 601az Electric motor 460V T . Electric motor 230V Pulley (motor) Pulley (comprcuor) 21 - ° 85443409 2 Belt 854432449. 1 buskin 856¢0875 ,. 1 Fan 18 85644969 . 1 Electric motor 460V 18 '85644969 1 Electric motor 230V 19 87916319 1 Pulley (motor) 20 03383888 1 Pulley (compreuor) viz + . 21 85443379 2 Belt ' , '22 85443249 1 Conical bushing 23 85860879 1 Fret 35 R/S 10-OMP May, 1996 i; • ‘ • ), # 966t. ',ten • Sup nuoi 1 nocri Uitimq flume " Supds elvld Sup !tummy Oupuog 1 award JUq uoisfd '0 Out' -0 lonsuD Sup -0 loiseD (5 - I MAIO asp IV3S IAIVA 9C • • • - ,!' • !7:7 • ; - • ,,i7.0X2i172 1 SOCL6CEr 1 1 0106SEE0 SWAM • OZ 61 7 , , 9, R/S 10-OMP May, 1996 1 2 3 4 5 04(X)9408 03603078 85387979 87932059 81262269 6 80683649 7 03382228 8 03401448 9 80664859 9 85541089 10 80034799 11 '.::, 03381178 1 12 28307440 n3 80468059 14 81744279 13 85200299 85588619 81744559 °03398578 .10098799 85514699 1 1 1 6 6 1 Themlostat element 1 Oil separator element 1 Orifice plate 1 Safety valve 8.10bar 1 Safety valve 13bar 1 Gasket 2 1 3 2 37 RECEIVER Receiver Discharge valve assy 0- ring Screw Nut Plug Connector Plug L- nipple Plastic hose Filt4r Nlppio Connector Gasket < Temperature watch RIS 10-0MP May, 1996 1 r I II ......4 4..44 144.. 6 - 9 10 • ' 1 2 3 4 5 .• • 036 030 78 033 892 70 1 Ring 1 Piston gasket Gasket 1 0- ring Frame 1 1 I Screw 1 Nut 1 Connector 1 ' ... . ,-. Pinsk .,..., ,.. , 1 ' ,' ' . ' Spring 38 DISCHARGE YEXYE . •. Seal kit assy (Parts 1- 4) Piston Plate Lock ring Plato Bearing • RIS IO. Mayi io00 „.. ,„. • * ' „ • .;- • , ' • ••• • •• -• • . , ' • • • Ref: Gedee 81335509 81744279 81744309 85838209 81780409 11 ``. 80631699 : '12 85647329 13 89512689 14 89507989 15 89507859 2 4 2 1 3 6 81744429 2 Connector 7 62336080 1 Elbow 8 . 81756889 1 Red.nipple 9 81744689 1 Plastic hose 10 03343058 1 Orifice 2 Rubber 1 Connector 1 Pressure gaucye 1 Cover 1 Pressure switch 39 CONTROL SYSTEM Solenoid valve Elbow . Connector Valve T. nipple R/S 10.OMP May, 1996 R/S 10-OMP May, 1996 2 4 5 6 7 10 13 14 15 16 17 18 X 19 20 . 21 24 25 27 28 85645979 85205779 81746039 80130079 80130109 80091729 89512689 81746169 85531059 85531189 85531209 85530609 ( 85530739 80331129 03746704 03588434 03962611 03783384 85531599 103746554 608449 "03746681 03747021 ,,,03752541 '103746302 :.43746422 4 2 6 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 Cover 1 Side plate 1 Side plate 1 Plato 1 Plato '03746688 1 Cover 03747028 1 Side plate 9 03752548 1 Side plate 22 : ' 4 03746303 1 Plate 23 03746423 1 Plate 41 CANOPY Rubber foot Hinge Lock Bushing seal Nut Nut Pressure gauge Key Light button Push button Lamp Lock Shad Hour meter - 60Hz Bottom plate Balk Electrical box Plato Switch Plato Letup iii cr ative 1 (brown/beige) Alternative 2 (blue/white) R/S 10-OMP May 1998 1121 113 1 114 115 I 111 11 1111's 119 NOTICE IF THE DOCUMENT IN THIS FRAME IS LESS CLEAR THAN THIS NOTICE IT IS DUE TO THE QUALITY OF THE DOCUMENT. I,Np1MM �rr�wl� r� +nwl�rn. �'��C�'!'J�C"�;Tgl MI1; ;; ;iii: ;lid M '" 3.305461 29.12.19% u ram 30.12.19% • U t i s 111 1 • Li it • fi`�„ — • 11 IR 230V /11SV trourhj 11 1M '6oV/115v K/S10 230V/460V/ 60Hz Wiring dagr'am A A [ 111 B M , • 0 N 4 flo F11 (' F12 r1s # I/ 4 1/ � 1♦ � IA /A 1 jj I II I � i0S 4MM INN N S IMMO a .1111111=1.1 aselownitor L 111 ININS111111•10•11111 N m u I 1111(11,11111 MORK CURTIS -r < Hi H2 H3 4 ROTARY.SC 1 I .i • 1! INNIS ' INNEN :111!: I 1 I I 1 4•=11• MIMI RISIO 237(4601( MKS= 111111E14.11111111LW11111111111J11" I 1111111V:1M liNEE121111 • „1' 1 . • " tr • .11,' • " " • , - ' ■■•• : 1 ' $ • , ,4f • • ." • , '„ • • 74.7 ' ; f • '‘'' " cinil 3-305461 amp "t.... 4/5 INN 0 S K N N S S N S S a A $ p S a S N T F 10 F 11 FF 12 13 . Ks , a .1111111=1.1 aselownitor L 111 ININS111111•10•11111 N m u I 1111(11,11111 MORK CURTIS -r < Hi H2 H3 4 ROTARY.SC 1 I .i • 1! INNIS ' INNEN :111!: I 1 I I 1 4•=11• MIMI RISIO 237(4601( MKS= 111111E14.11111111LW11111111111J11" I 1111111V:1M liNEE121111 • „1' 1 . • " tr • .11,' • " " • , - ' ■■•• : 1 ' $ • , ,4f • • ." • , '„ • • 74.7 ' ; f • '‘'' " cinil 3-305461 amp "t.... 4/5 INN 0 S K N N S S N S S a A $ p S a S N T Symbol Apparatus Qty Code 1 41 Main switch 1 86526669 , 01 Handle 1 85530609 K1 .' Contactor 1 89518489 K1 Auxiliary contact 1 89506159 K4 .Auxiliar contactor • 1 89519109 K8 Auxiliar contactor 1 89518509 Si 3-position selector swif 11 1 89519649. lips 51• .,- s Si' nil lam �. 1 > . :{ 8 0y H2, H3 _` Si•nal lam • 2 2 89501369j 89516879 F10, F11 F12, F13 Automatic fuse 4 80875409 F3 (230V) F'3 460V Overload rela 1 1. 87470669 87470409 K5 Start atop relay 3. 89500639•`: P1 (60 Hz) Hour meter 1 87997349 Y1,, Y2 Solenoid valve 2 87997509 1 , S3 Pressure switch cover 1 1 89507859 89507989 T1 Transformer 1 89511139 X1 Terminal block 27 81623739 P2 1150C Temperature switch 1 85645159 WSW 230/460V/60Hz CURTIS . List of 5/5 components Allan's Mechanical Service BOOTH INDEX 1. BOOT DESCRIPTION 2, BOOTH ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTION 3. OPERATIONS SEQUENCE 4. MAINTENANCE 5. PARTS LIST 8. MAN & PRODUCT ACCESS DOORS T. DOOR ACCESSORIES 8. ELECTRICAL S. LIGHTING 10. EXHAUST FAN 11. FANS DATA 12. FILTERS 13. PRESSURE SWITCH 14. HEATER '; '' tl ' ' a INR UCK SPR AY:13DOTHS ' ' - 42 , 4 � V , •_• - :44.x. YI . et < _ '' . •'t :t `:In side . ; ". * y '- - ,tAutsfde "•- ' ' Might r1)q:(,); Wi J• � - od n Moor F� Die ; ?, tatgr ,, P.. x ;,. ' CR :s i > , ) , YAM ; H.aght Witt wrdt)r ,1($190; r�Ty► AT30SB 30'6' 14' 12' 30'1Q' 15' 12'6" 14 (1)Filter 9'4'x9'11• 34' US :n us in In 16,800 7,800 AT3ODT 30'6' 14' 12' 30'10' 15' 12'8' 14 (1)S (1)F 9'4'X9'11' 34' 16,800 8,600 loss AT30RF 30'6' 14' 12' 30'10' 15' 12'8' 14 (1)Solid 9'4'X9'11' 34' 16,800 7,800 AT3QPSB 32' 14' 12' 32'4' 15' 12'8' 14 (1)Solid 9'4'X9'1 t• 34" 16,800 9,200 AT3OPDT 32' 14' 12' 32'4' 15' 12'8" 14 (2)Solid 9'4'X9'1 t' 34' 16,800 9,200 DDAT30S8 30' 14' 12' 30'4' 15' 15'6' 15 (1)Solid 9'4'X9'1 t' 4 2' 71/2 18,200 10,500 8 DDAT30DT 30' 14' 12' 30'4' 15' 15'6" 15 (2)Solid 9'4•X9'11' 4 2" 71/2 18,200 10,500 AUTO / TRUCK AIRFLOW AVAILABILITY: CROSSORAFT o OWN DRAFT REVERSE FLOW 1 /- y vl l0!.1 • • ifl[11iI1 • •�• r :Y 'qv( s �. '1::ij;jiT'5sr; ;;00, ••• ..1- •(. \'(177,,,z:r1Ir ;J- I,1l,' • I • ' , •11i:. ‘'r.tif 1.)411Lt•ilr.1.: !1, • I •I, 1 so) I Ult. -, 1 011:1 , I • • „ ;; 1-1 Iii: (1\ 0. I, �•1 '116 { (.�.11_11yl- 1.1 I l•illl'.�1�('��1:1�,'r!l (•;i.l ,. 1111.1 II, 1_(t! 1 (�1�1�'1uC�,�' !HIT Ill, I. , - , •Ill'{ 1., t. . 4y2 • QUALITY STANDARDS Designed, engineered and built to meet the highest standards of quality and safety to con- form with OSHA and NFPA regulations. • LIGHTING INCLUDED All light fixtures are 48" fluorescent four -tube, 40 watt, 110 volt, ETL approved with clear, tem- pered safety glass. Light tubes are not fur- nished. AUTO / TRUCK BOOTHS 'The Downdraft Booths listed are Pressurized Models. JBI SPRAY BOOTHS COMPLY WITH ALL FEDERAL, OSHA AND NFPA REGULATIONS • ■ HEAVY -DUTY CONSTRUCTION Auto/ Truck Crossdraft Booths are constructed of 18 gauge galvanized sheet steel, Panels are pro - punched, companion flanged and bolted on six inch centers for easy fit and fast assembly. Panels have exterior flanges to provide a smooth Interior surface, Tho booth Is rigidly reinforced with "I" beam construction. • COMPLETE PACKAGE All booths are shipped complete with heavy - duty exhaust and totally enclosed fan cooled motor, one personnel access door, product doors, manometer (draft gauge), fluorescent light fixtures, Intake and exhaust filters with grids, all necessary assembly hardware and installation drawings. • OPTIONAL FEATURES Optional related equipment; air make-up, elec- trical control panels, motor starters, atart/atop stations and safety control features are also available. Please reference the Spray Booth Accessories section. 3? ,' s` iiii> G.? a q 'tf'S�f,*'6YA31J?.•;,-m. v"4ti r. v.. • e•. >. .3• Y':. JBI LIMITED WARRANTY JBI, Inc. (the Seller) warrants to the original end-user buyer (the Buyer) that the equipment manufactured by and purchased from, the Seller (the Equipment), it property installed in accordance with the Seller's Service Manual, operated, and maintained, and used under normal conditions, shall be free from defects In workmanship and materials for a period of one (1) year from the date the Equipment is shipped from the facilities of the Seller. The obligation of the Seller, and the Buyer's SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY hereunder, shall be limited to one of the following, at the Seller's option: (01) The repair or replacement of defective parts or components (collectively, the Pads) of the Equipment; provided, however, the Buyer shall be responsible for the payment of all labor costs associated with any such repair or replacement. (02) In the event the Seller is unable to repair or replace the defective Parts, the Buyer shall be entitled to a refund of the cost of the Parts. The Seller shall have no obligation under this Limited Warranty for ordinary wear and tear of the Equipment; if installation of the Equipment does not comply with local, stale, and federal requirements or laws: or if the Equipment is modified by any other person or organization. The Seller makes no warranty of any kind whatsoever with respect to Parts which are manufactured or supplied by other persons or organizations (an OEM); provided, however, the Seller shall reasonably assist the Buyer in connection with warranties, if any, provided by an OEM. WARRANTY PERFORMANCE PROCEDURE In the event the Buyer believes the Seller may be responsible for the performance of any warranty obligation, the Buyer must immediately send written notice of a claimed defect, and must immediately refrain from any further use of the affected Equipment. No attempted repair of the claimed defect may be made without the poor written consent of the Seller. Before any Parts can be returned to the Seller, the Buyer must contact the Seller and request a Return Authorization. Upon the Buyer's receipt of the Return Authorization form, the Parts may be shipped, freight prepaid, to the facility designated on the Return Authorization. All Parts returned for repair, replacement, or refund (which refund may be made in the form of a credit to the Buyer's account), must be accompanied by the Return Authorization, All returned Parts are subject to a twenty percent (20 %) handling charge. Parts manufactured or supplied by an OEM are subject to the warranties, if any, provided by such OEMs: and repair or replacement of such Parts are subject to the approval of the OEM. Tho Buyer shall be responsible for the payment of any handling or restocking charges associated with OEM Parts. DISCLAIMERS OF WARRANTIES THE WARRANTIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER EXPRESSED OR IMPUED WARRANT. TIES, OR ANY OTHER OBUGATION ON THE PART OF THE SELLER, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPUED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. ANY MODELS, DRAWINGS, PLAN, SPECIFICATIONS, AFFIRMATIONS OF FACT, PROMISES, OR OTHER COMMUNICATIONS BY THE SELLER WITH REFER. ENCE TO THE EQUIPMENT OR THE PERFORMANCE OF THE EQUIPMENT ARE SOLELY FOR THE CONVENIENCE OF THE BUYER AND SHAD. NOT IN ANY WAY MODIFY THE EXPRESSED WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS SET FORTH HEREIN. THE BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES IT IS PURCHASING THE EQUIPMENT SOLELY ON THE BASIS OF THE COMMIT. MENTS FO THE SELLER AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH HEREIN. NO AGENTS OR OTHER PARTIES ARE AUTHORIZEDTO MAKE ANY WARRANTIES ON BEHALF OF THE COMPANY OR TO ASSUME FOR THE COMPANY ANY OTHER UABIUTY QR OBLIQATION IN CONNECTION WITH THE EQUIPMENT. CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES The Seller shall not be liable for any incidental or consequential damages arising from the use of the Equipment by the Buyer, the breach of any warranties, the failure to deliver, delay in delivery, delay on nonconforming condition, or for any other breach 01 contract or duty between the Seller and the Buyer, mice LIMITATION OF ACTIONS Any action resulting from the breach of any warranty contained herein by the Seller must be commenced within one (1) year after the cause of action accrues. In no event shall the Seller's total liability for any or all breaches of any warranty exceed the actual purchase price paid by the Buyer for the Equipment, SPRAY BOOTHS & SYSTEMS P.O. Box 38.801 Norway Road Osseo, Wisconsin 54758 Rhona 715. 597.3168 Toll Free 1- 800. 848.8738 Fax 715.597.2193 ASSEMBLY 1. After detennining the size and type of paint spray booth to be employed, ensure that an assembly site Is available that meets the following qualifications: A. A minimum of three feet at sides of the booth must be clear and free from storage or combustible construction or other operations. A minimum of three feet clearance Is required in front ofthe booth opening, with six feet or more from the nearest wall preferred from the standpoint providing smoother air flows through the booth. B. The floor surface of the booth and the operator's working area must be non - combustible material of such character as facilitate the safe cleaning and removal of residues. it must also be able to support the weight of the booth, the operator, and on the water wash booths, the filled water tank. C. The floor surface of the booth must be flat and level to avoid erection problems In alignment of panels, etc. it Is Important that the water tank be absolutely level on water wash booths. Shims should be used if necessary. Z. Using chak, mark the dmensional outline of the booth on the floor. Check ceiling height for ample clearance. Check exhaust outlet location with the roof or well to avoid obstructions In the line of the run of pipe. 3. Unpack all spray booth components and stack all parts of the some size together. Each component is identifiable by a size description listed on exploded view. NOTE: For complete assembly drawings for the particular model being Installed, see blueprints sent with each Individual booth. 4. Using the size description on drawings ensure that all spray booth components are at hand. 5, Study all drawing and instructions thoroughly before beginning assembly. Each component is shown by part letter on the assembly drawings. This will aid In determining where the various components are to be installed during assembly. 0. Assemble the booth using the assembly drawing. (Always start assembly with exhaust chamber section.) 7. Mount exhaust unit and motor (see Fig. on booth). The blade side or intake side of exhaust unit Is to face dnoctly into booth. The opposite end or exhaust outlet side of unit is straight and smooth which allows for exhaust piping to be slipped over outside of the fan band and to be fastened in position with sheet metal screws. 8. Install exhaust piping (see Fig. 6 S 7). Where more than 25 feet of piping is required, the static pressure (resistance) is increased in that air flow may be hindered when using the standard exhaust unit recommended for use with the booth. Where a piping arrangement of an unusual nature Is employed or where tow or more elbows are used, a similar condition may exist. Therefore, if either of these situations arises, contact the booth manufacturer's engineering department for correct recommendations. •I 9. Install lighting fixtures "'desired. 10. Wire adequate electrical supply to lighting fixtures, to electric motor of exhaust unit. On water wash booths only, do the following: A Make provision for supplying water to booth via a line of pipe or hose, etc. directly from the water supply. B. Fit tar* with water. The standard tank Is 23" high Inside and is designed to have an 13" water level. This will be slightly below the overflow outlet To maintain this water level, actual ball on lever by running forward or backward on threaded section. It usually Is necessary to bend this lever to get water to rise to proper level. Bend by holding each end ofthe lever in such a position That to lever will vend behind the threaded section on either end until valve will shut off at desired water level. CAUTION: Do not attempt to bend this lever by holding or pulling on the ball float This may damage the connection fitting between the lever and float so that the float may leak, thus rendering It useless. C. After ensuring that all valves (when used) are In coITecx position, start pump and run for an Instant to be sure that there are no obstructions In pump that would damage It or that electrical connections have not been property made. Check pump and motor for shaft alignment. If the pump is out of alignment It will vibrate and make excessive noise. These pumps are mounted on a malleable iron base and oven though they are aligned at the factory, they will usually be drawn out of alignment when mounted securely to the floor. Check pump for proper rotation. D. Aden performing pump checks and with pump running, check the water chamber for leaks. The packing gland on the pump must be loose enough to permit some water seepage past the packing grand nut. Varner leaks am evident at any booth seam exposed to water, turn the pump off end recaulk the panel Junctions at the point. Caulking should always be date on the inner edge of the wash chamber panels, The best way is to apply caulking with a gun on the panel Just before assembling. After chamber is erected, re -caulk all inside seams. (Dry arrestor booths need only be caulked on the inside seams after assembled.) OPERATION SEQUENCE & PROCEDURES 1, Make sure all doors are shut. System will not operate if any door is open. 2 Turn main circuit breaker in JBl's control panel to the on position. 3. System may now be started. There is a pneumatic start/stop station inside the booth and start/stop station on the front of the control panel. Either start button may be pushed to de- energize the system. 4. Once the booth or system is energized, an automatic timed starting sequence Is started. 5. Booth is now ready for use. 6. Booth lights are controlled by a switch located on the control panel. NOTE: 1. Compressed air solenoid valve Is Interlocked with all exhaust fans and air make-up units. If any exhaust fan or air make -up unit shuts down, the air solenoid will close. This prevents spray with an inadequate amount of exhaust or make -up air. 2. All doors are interlocked with micro switches to shut down the complete system if any door is opened. This is for safe operation, and to keep from getting dirt on the painted equipment. 3. Paint booths man access doors have (15) second time delays built into them to allow personnel to enter or exit without shutting the system down. EMERGENCY PROCEDURE For emergency shut down, push OPERATION stop button on front of the control panel or shut off main disconnect located on control panel. SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE To de- energize the system, push PB 1 electrical stop button on front of control panel. I . OPERATION SEQUENCE & PROCEDURE START-UP 1. Turn SW1 light switch to the "on "position, this will energize the lighting contactor, allowing lights to come on. 2. Select summer or winter position on SW2. When S W2 is In the summer position the heat cycle is locked out. When in the winter position the heat cycle is allowed to energize. 3. Push PB2 electrical start to energize the system. When system Is energized the following sequences will take place: A. The air make -up intake damper will open. B. When damper is completely open a normally open auxiliary contact will close, allowing TDR1 & TDR2 to energize. C. TDR1 is an interval timer, it's contacts will close when energized, allowing exhaust to start. D. TDR2 is an on -delay timer, which after a (2) second delay, will allow the air make -up blower to energize. **. The air flow system is now complete. 4. The paint booth is equipped with door limit switches that will allow entrance to the paint booth without shutting down the painting operation, but if doors are left open for more than (15) seconds, the system will shut down. 5. When exhaust has proven and the doors have been proven closed and filters are clean, the air solenoid valve will energize allowing painting operation. 6. When (CEPS) dirty filter pressure clogged filters, it will de- de- energize the air solenoid valve. 7. To de- energize the system, push PB 1 electrical stop button, 8. P1.3 will indicate blower on. 9. P1.2 will indicate heat on in the air make -up units. 10. The heat on the air make -up unit is controlled through a thermostat located on the control panel. 3 ON A DAILY BASIS: Check oil level in draft gauge (manometer) and adjust as required. Add oil when necessary. Also clean gauge with a soft cloth using water or naphtha. Check arrestor pads (use non - combustible pads) on a daily basis or when Indicated by draft gauge. Immediately remove all discarded arrestor pads to a,safe, will detached location or place in a water - filled metal container to prevent fire. Dispose of all discarded arrestor pads at end of day's operation. After Initial start -up, service should be performed on the exhaust and air make -up units every six months. Periodically check the following: , (HAUST UNI t Loose Belts Bad or Loose Bearings Pulley or Sheave Alignment Adequate Lubrication Clean Fan Blade MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Any standard bearing grease lubricant can be used on grease fittings. TROt,UBLESHOOTI ©: "" If there is a lack of air flow check belts for proper tightness. " Noisy bearings - lubricate or replace if necessary. I EXHAUST UNITS MECHANICAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION / PURPOSE Used to spray booths where positive elimination of hazardous fumes and vapors is required. They must create a proper air velocity through the booth to expel excessive amounts of dirt and dust in the booth. MANOM TER$ IDRA_ FT G _. UGEI Provides a visual indication of when the arrestor pads need changing. .1. PAIL •; Provides for automatic shut-off of air supply to spray gun(s) when arrestor pads need changing. JWXON LOCK To mechanically hold door closed In painting operation. SUPPLIER TO STOCK All replacement parts and supplier needed parts on the Paint Spray and Body Shop Booths are stocked at JBI INC. For replacement parts or supplier needed parts contact JBl's Small Parts Department 1- 800 - 878 -8738. LUBRICATION SCHEDULE After initial start -up, service should be performed on the exhaust and air make -up units every six months. WIAUST UNITI should be chocked for the following: 1. Loose belts 2. Bad or loose bearings 3. Pulley or sheave alignment 4. Adequate lubrication 5. Clean fan blade ** Any standard bearing grease lubricant can be used on grease fittings. AIR MAKE -UP UNITS should be checked for the following: 1. Blower shaft movement 2. Loose lockrings on blower shaft bearings 3. Pulley or sheave alignment 4. Bad or loose bearings 5. Loose belts 6. Clean burner assembly 7. Adequate lubrication ** Any standard bearing grease lubricant can be used on grease fittings. MAINTENANCE The frequency of many of the following maintenance checks depends upon the amount and kind of material being sprayed. Under all circumstance, however, these checks should be made at regular intervals to reduce fire hazards, to maintain the efficiency of the booth, to prevent freshly painted objects from becoming blemished, and to hinder rust of the booth. 1. On dry type paint spray booths with arrestor exhaust: A. Daily - Check oil level in draft gauge (manometer) and adjust as required. Add oil when necessary. B. Daily - Clean draft gauge with a soft cloth using water, naptha, or gasoline only. C. Daily Or When Indicated By Draft Gauge - Replace arrestor pads (use noncombustible ones). immediately remove all discarded arrestor pads to a safe, well - detached location or place in a water Riled metal container to prevent fire. D. Daily - Dispose of ail discarded arrestor pads at end of day's operation. E. Daily Or When Overspray Accumulates - Remove overspray and coating from booth interior, operator's floor area, baffles, fan, and exhaust piping. Use a non - ferrous, non - sparking scraper to eliminate any possibilities of igniting combustible material. Do not allow overspray to accumulate, presenting a fire hazard. Do not leave piles of paint sweepings In booth. Discard to well detached location. F. Daily Or When Overspray Accumulates - Remove exhaust unit blade and clean. Do not hammer or step on fan blade as it is an aluminum casting. G. Daily - Check belt tension on exhaust unit, Bearings in fan and motor may wear unnecessarily when belts are too tight, NOTE: Exhaust unit is equipped with sealed - for -life ball bearings, They require no grease as the grease is sealed within the bearings. * VENDOR * SUPPLIER TO STOCK All standard and custom booths as designed and built by JBI. All parts are retained on file for immediate reference, replacement, and availability when required. * PRICING ON ALL ITEMS * AVAILABILITY / SERVICE ITEMIZED PART LIST JBI price sheets provides pricing on all standard parts: Call Small Parts Department for immediate service, Toll Free 1- 800 - 848 -8738. (Minimum $50.00 Billing) Critical operational parts for productions and customer safety will be shipped overnight when possible by contacting JBI Customer Service. Standard overnight parts allow 30 days for delivery. Contact Small Parts Department. All components are supplied by JBI. * OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS JBI includes Operation & Maintenance Manuals with each job when requested. A total of up to six manuals may be requested. Additional manuals are available upon request. IF MORE THAN A TOTAL OF (6) MANUALS ARE REQUESTED FOR THE JOB AS A WHOLE A $50.00 CHARGE FOR EACH ADDITIONAL MANUAL WILL BE APPLIED. All replacement part and supplier needed parts on the paint spray and body shop booths are stocked at the JBI factory. For replacement parts or supplier contact the Small Parts Department at 1- 800 -848- 8738. r.,�> l > 1 : ,r }1 F /yrff +� F+'if /l, Y i ' .+:y'' ` '.• "f f '4' £ ' jf`.F''; r�„'�6YS`.'�.`• ' J�F::+r�."f/ yf ff''. .j j€;ff y r:: '�i,S'' r is. ' ,firi t ��'� �' �{ r f % �� /%� Y ���� �. ' . Y.'. {�� `�` j`� f - Y $ ` 1. i f • Aey 4`f. ;/;7;./ // ': r l %�:,(�, ,- ,- ,4i,''' i FAN BLADE 18" DIA CROWLEY 30 DEGREES TOP MOUNT 040 -002 SHEAVE AS 34 x 3/4 213421 SHEAVE 1 VL 44 x 6/8 213 -062 V -BELT 4L440 211 -004 BEARING HUB ASSY 18- 24-27" 3/4" DIA STRAIGHT SHAFT 212400 TEFC MOTOR .6HP 3PH 230/400V 1800 RPM 60T FRAME 234 -002 BELT GUARD 1248- 24-27" DIA 409 -001 INTAKE TACKY FILTER PANEL - STD 20 x 20 x 1 217 -012 DOOR LATCH BRIXON ZN - MODEL 3P 208 -037 CAULK LATEX WHITE - STD 230 -020 SEAL TAPE (1/2,_ OPEN CELL ADHESIVE ON 3/4 248 -002 248.082 SEAL TAPE - P SEAL • EPDM 1 1/4 x 1/2 ADH ON 1 1/4 TUBE KIT #A -602 242 -003 PRESSURE SWITCH #1910 -0 - 242-004 PROXIMITY SWITCH #1141110 -00 242 -014 RUBBER STRIP 1/8 x 3 #70 DURO 248 -011 LIGHT BALLAST #T12 (_V) 230 -032 - ,,____ S JBI ** MAINTENANCE PARTS LIST *** :; .: .. �.; ODU POO - ` " —' ;:.: Ps ; .' PMAD ' ' 4rY i k ..�. PMAD•0 i.:i __. r.a.L ot . AFD.98 Filter 0'4' 85' 500 AFD•98•B Filter BI•Foid 9'4' 8'3• 580 ASD•98 Solid 9'4' 8'5' 600 4 ASD•98•B Solid BI•rad 9'4' 8'5' 650 A80.98•T Trl•0oor•1wIn 9'4' 8'5' 700 D. • • 0 TrI.Door•3wIn 9'4' :'. • •.• • : or 9' 11' '• -• 6 ATFO.0843 Filter 8I•Foid 9'4' 0 660 ATSD•08 1 Solid 9'4' 9 700 ATBD• = •B Solid BI•Fold 9'4' ' • 7• • TFD•1113•13 Filler Bl•Fold 11 13'11' 850 T8D•1113 Solid 11'4' 13'11• 900 T8D•1113•B Solid BI•Fold 11'4" 13'11' 950 TWFD•1113 Filter 13'4' 13'11 850 TWFD•1113.13 Filter BI•Fold 13'4' 13'11' 000 TWSO.1113 Solid 13'4" 13'11' 050 TWSD. 1113.8 Solid BI•Fold 13 13'11' 1000 -v :, ,.PERSONNEL DOORS . ,, . Mlq t . Style •• Width Hght. Ps ; .' PMAD Solid Door 2'8' 7'0' 120 PMAD•0 Solid Door w/ 2'8" TO' 120 Obe, Window •,,> PRODUCT AND PERSONNEL DOORS • t Solid Ell-Fold Doors w "NO SAG" PRODUCT DOORS JBI No Sag" product doors are constructed with 2" x 2" x 14" gauge tubular frames. Solid doors are covered with 18 gauge Paintlok sheet steel. Filter doors have 18 gauge filter frames for filters. Door channels are structural steel with butt hinges welded in place. included are filters, door handles, brixon latches and foam tape. • TRI -DOOR The Trl- Door is a 3 section system that is dust tight with long life pliable rubber door seals and brixon door latchs. One section functions as a personnel door with observation window. The other two sections open and close as a bi•foid system to save space. Windows are optional. • PERSONNEL DOORS I Personnel Door with Observation Window ■ OBSERVATION WINDOWS Designed for applications with booth panels and for use with solid product doors. An attrac- tive option for personnel safety. Clear lami- nated glass for safe and unobstructed viewing of painting operations. Filter Doors 4 Filter BI .Fold Doors Includes door iambs, header and door stops. 2'6" X 6'9" Personnel Access Doors are con- structed of 18 gauge galvanized sheet steel. The door can be located on either side of booth to meet user requirements. Observation win- dows are available. i t I Tri- Doors w/ personnel door Trl. Doors w/ personnel door and 3 observation windows Observation Window 18 "Wx24 "L Part # 230-001 The #3 latch, available in aluminum or iron with stainless parts options, is the most widely-used explosion venting latch in the United States: The aluminum models are ideal for exterior doors, or whenever weight is a factor #3 Adf tutoble Strike • #3 Adjustable Strike #3 Tall Strike •• 03 Wide Strike Specifications on back. RELEASE FORCE HANDLE OPTIONS WEIGHT DIMENSIONS HOUSING MATERIALS INTERNAL PARTS INTERNAL OPTIONS STRIKE OPTIONS OFFSET MOUNTING RELEASE FORCE HANDLE OPTIONS WEIGHT DIMENSIONS HOUSING MATERIALS INTERNAL PARTS INTERNAL OPTIONS STRIKE OPTIONS OFFSET MOUNTING #3 IRON Adjustable: 43-I30 lbs. (19.5-81.6 kg) For handle assisted opening of doors with only one latch order model #3H iron. For multiple #3 ironiatches on a door with no connecting linkage use our model 410 handle with two or more #3P iron latches. If connect- ing several latches is desirable or cost effective. special #3P -L iron latches may be linked to a single #3H -L iron Inch. #3 P iron 3.31 lb. (1.73 kg). #3 H iron 4.63 lb. (2.11 kg's. Body only 3.01 lb. (1.37 kg). Body and handle only 3..13 lb. (1.73 kg). Length: (w /o handle): 7" (17,78 ctn1. Strike only: 1%0' 0.97 cm). Latch only: 3t? (13.02 .3H Combined wt=itlt handle: Use':" (10 nun) bolts for mounting. 9" ( 22.$6 cm), Grey iron. Strikes and handle are ductile iron, Zinc plated mild steel. Roller. cam and adjusting screw are case - hardened. Spring is chrome silicon. Any or all internal parts may be ordered in stainless steel at extra cost. Tall strike and adjustable tall strike available for large offsets (see offset mounting). Wide strike available for flush mounting ofdoors.wkh a large amount of play in the hinges (such as cant -lift hinges). Ride strike is not compatible with model #3H latch. 0- .150 use Reg. strike .681" -.838" use Reg. strike + .Y4" shim .151 " -,3U5" use Ad. strike (bottom) .839 use Ad strike top .306 " -.684" use Adj, strike (middle) l.051 "- 1.425" use Tall strike #3 ALUMINUM Adjustable: 43-180 lbs. (19.3 -81.6 kg) For handle assisted opening of doors with only one latch order model #311 aluminum. For multiple #3 latches on a door with no connecting linkage, use our model 410 handle with two or more #3P aluminum latches. If connecting several latches is desirable or cost effective, special #3P-L aluminum latches may be linked to a single #3H1 aluminum latch. #3 P Aluminum. 1.95 lb. (.89 kg). #3 H Aluminum. 2,28 lb. (1.03 kg). Body only 1.561b. (.71 kg). Body and handle only 1.89 lb. (.86 kg), Length: (w /o handle): 7" (17.78 cm). Strike only: ! " /,'," (197 cm). Latch only: 5W (13,02 cm), 3H combined with handle: Use IV (10 mm) bolts for mounting. 9 cm), 319 Aluminum, Handle is 713 Aluminum. Zinc plated mild steel. Roller, cam and adjusting screw are case-hardened. Spring is chrome silicon. Any or all internal parts may be ordered in stainless steel at extra cost. Tall strike and adjustable tall strike available for large offsets (see offset mounting). Wide strike available for flush mounting of doors with a large amount of play in the hinges (such as cam -lift hinges). Wide strike is not compatible with model #3H latch. 0-Ayr use Reg. strike .681 " use Reg. strike + ` 'shim .15I" -.305" use Adj. strike (bottom) .839"- I.05" use Adj. strike top .306"- .680" use Adj. strike (middle) I.05" -1.43" use Till strike Dixon PRODUCT INFORMATION PACKAGE NOTICE TO ALL BRIXON CUSTOMERS USING BRIXON LATCHES IN EXTERIOR OR INTERIOR CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENTS As is mentioned in Brixon literature, Brixon latches are not recommerfded for exterior or corrosive applications. Regular Brixon steel latches (which are designed for interior use) will rust and could subsequently freeze up so that the latch could become a lock and would possibly not open if there were an explosion. Since many Brixon latches are being used for the above applications despite our warnings, we wish to offer the following maintenance instructions which are particularly critical to avoid possible accidents or injuries. Those latches in exterior or corrosive environments should be inspected and lubricated at frequent and regular intervals. The lubricating should be as follows: Apply heavy grease to the spring and laminated cam inside the latch upon original installation and regrease as necessary every 6 -12 months. The crucial pivot point, which is the bearing pin about which the laminated cam pivots, should be oiled with an SAE 30 to SAE 50 oil every two months, or more in the case of an extremely corrosive atmosphere. Inspection shall be done at least every 2 months: 1. Check to see that the latch is adequately lubricated. 2. Open the door to make sure all parts are free to move. If you need any additional information on maintenance of Brixon latches or if you wish to replace your latches with corrosive resistant stainless steel or brass, please contact: "Reprinted by Permission" BRIXON MANUFACTURING COMPANY 2242 UNIVERSITY AVENUE • ST. PAUL, MINNESOTA 55114 612.646.2150 IMPORTANT READ BEFORE USING THE BRIXON LATCH, ITS PURPOSE, SELECTION, AND USE: The purpose of the Brixon latch is to provide venting in the event of an internal explosion, and to maintain a positive seal in order to prevent loss of heat and/or escape of gasses under normal conditions. Brixon latches are Factory Mutual approved as explosion - venting door latches (page 181, 1983 Factory Mutual Approval Guide). Brixon latches are designed to operate under a wide range of conditions with a variety of options available to suit particular purposes. The user must insure that the latches used are appropriate for the particular application. Any questions regarding model selections should be directed to the factory. LATCH RELEASE PRESSURE: Installation It is recommended that the latch release pressure be adjusted prior to mounting. The pressure setting used should allow the latch to open at an internal pressure slightly higher than that encountered under normal operating circumstances. Caution: Factory Mutual requires that latches open at a maximum internal pressure of 50 lbs/ft (224,1 kg/m while NFPA (National Fire Protection Association) recommends a maximum of 30 lbs/ft in general, the lowest practical setting should be used. The appropriate release setting is obtained by the following calculations (assuming that the latches are opposite the hinges): Joo area x max. internal pressure = Force on latches at release. 2 Force on latches + number of latches = latch release setting for each latch, EXAMPLE: 2 ft. by 4 ft. door, internal release pressure of 15 psf, 2 latches L21.41 x (15) = 60 lbs. 60 + 2 = 30 lbs, adjustment setting. 2 ADJUSTMENT: Each Brixon latch model is adjustable within a wide range by turning the adjusting screw at the rear of the latch. (2) Latch Release Pres. (lbs.) Pressure Change (lbs.) Full Turns Model Min. Max. Per Turn Per 1/2 Turn Available •-+ N en Nir 3.9 17 1.46 .73 9 . 10 37 1.86 .93 14.5 43 180 5.96 2.98 23 58 285 9.87 4.94 23 Vole, I.A SU.pt. s::..(• . ."!... • . I11.4d...l. V:u "44 044 . ! h -1 .. P . . . *out u.A.Atifd Can. (3) 011.4 O• C... I 1.U1116166s.. /WO 0I AO.ws1m4 Slim . 4.1411. i $.1 S.•f.. f Note: Precise pressure adjustment is not possible due to the location of the strike, the amount of gasket compression, spring differences in a given lot, friction, etc. The listed values are a guide only, and if the release pressure is critical, the pressure must be measured directly for more accuracy. The estimated variance is plus or minus 2 full turns. To adjust, have the latch in the door closed position wherein one rivet which holds the laminated cam together is exposed. Turn the adjusting screw counter - clockwise to its loosest position, making sure that the square nut does not come off the ball pin. Using the table above as a guide, tighten the adjusting screw a half turn at a time until the desired pressure setting is reached. It should be possible to feel the adjusting screw slipping into the relaxed position with the slot or mark vertical (perpendicular to the mounting surface) at each half turn, For example, if you wanted 93 lbs. pressure setting on a No. 4 latch, you would tighten the adjusting screw 10 half turns (45 + (10 x 4.78) 93. If the latch is mounted, adjustment can be made by turning the adjustment screw to its tightest position and backing off to the desired setting. Latches can be factory adjusted upon request at additional cost. • MOUNTING: The latch and strike assembly must be securely mounted so that the latch is centered on the strike and the assembly is perpendicular to the door -frame line. The distance between the latch and strike housings should be 1/8" + 1/16" for No, 3 and No. 4 models, and 1/16" + 1/32" for No 1 models. Latches should be tested for proper operation after adjustment and/or installation. Ensure that the roller forces the cam of the latch into the fully open position when the door is opened and that the opened cam will contact the roller and be forced into the closed position as the door is closed. Failure to do so may cause an unanticipated rebound, since the latch and strike will not engage upon closing. Misalignment of the latch and strike will also cause this rebound. Hinges must be strong and securely fastened to avoid misalignment due to "play" in the door, Additionally, the strike mounting must be sufficiently rigid so that the strike does not bend or twist upon closing. If the strike does bend back upon closing, or the body moves toward the hinges, it is possible for the latch to close in the wrong position as shown below. This is most likely to happen when the door is slammed (excessively) and/or the latch mechanism is dirty or corroded. In this event, the door may be more difficult to open, either by hand or in the event of an explosion. It is also a warning that maintenance is required and that a hazardous situation exists. Because of the rather large tolerances involved in castings, each latch-strike combination must be individually aligned, and alignment must be rechecked whenever latches are replaced to avoid possible malfunctions as listed below. In mounting the 3H or 4H latches with Dalbert handles, it may be found that the handles stops interfere with the mounting bolts, when studs are used, If you intend to use studs, consult the manufacturer for information on modifications that may be necessary. (4) OPERATION: Operation The Erixon latch operates in a manner similar to a toggle switch. When the door and latch are in the closed position, the latch will hold the door closed unless enough pressure is applied to compress the spring sufficiently to cause tripping of the cam into the open position. When the cam is in the open position, the door is free to open. Closing is essentially the reverse of the above, with the force being supplied by the closing door. The forces required for operation depend upon the setting of the latch (see "Adjustment" under INSTALLATION) - the higher the setting and the larger the latch, the greater the required force. The recommended procedure for closing a door equipped with the No. 31I or No 411 latches is to fold the handle back immediately prior to closing or, better, to first open and then close the handles. When folding the handle back, the cam should remain in the "open" position. If for any reason the cam is in the "closed" position while the door is open, the latch and/or its mounting is defective and the door would bounce open instead of latching. In the event of an explosion, the latch will begin to open when the internal pressure equals the setting of the latch. However, due to Inertia in the latch -door system, there will be a slight delay between application of pressure and the opening of the door (See NFPA No. 68). This might allow a considerable pressure build -up, depending upon the oven size, type, and amount of material exploding, and the time lag involved. In the event of a maximum violence explosion, the effectiveness of the latches is reduced. However, most explosions are not of maximum violence (FM Approval Guide, 1983, p. 181; NFPA 1983 No. 68, p. 32), SUMMARY AND CAUTIONS TOR OPERATORS: 1. Violent slamming is potentially hazardous and must be avoided. 2. For reasons listed above, the door may not latch when closed; Beware of rebound. 3. Keep clear of the arc of the door. 4. Keep clear of the operating parts of the latch and handle, particularly the laminated cam, roller of the strike, the resistance area of Dalbert handles, and the stops for standard No. 3 and No. 4 handles. For more information concerning possible dangers and safety precautions, it is imperative to read the next section entitled "WARNINGS AND LIMITATIONS ". (5) Maintenance Latches must have the explosion- venting feature tested periodically to insure that corrosion and/or build- up of foreign materials has not affected the mechanism. Under normal operation conditions, Iubricate the bearing pin within the laminated cam with a light (SAE 10-30) oil every six months. Model No. 3H and 4H latches should have the set screws in the handle tightened as needed. As is mentioned in Brixon literature, Brixon latches are not recommended for exterior or corrosive applications. Regular Brixon steel latches (which' are designed for interior use) will rust and could consequently freeze up so that the latch could become a lock and would possibly not open even if there were an explosion. If you have any Brixon latches in an exterior or corrosive environment in your plant or in the'fleld that arc not brass or stainless steel, they should be replaced or modified immediately. Stainless steel or brass parts are available for latches mounted in corrosive environments. Warnings and Limitations WARNINGS, ALL LATCHES: (7) 1. If the door is closed with insufficient force to trip the cam, the door will rebound. 2. If, for some reason, the cam is in the "closed" position while the door is open, the door will rebound rather than latching when closed. This could be caused by a misalignment strike (all latches) and/or a loose handle (No. 3 and 4H latches only) or by the cam being struck and rotated accidentally while in the open position. 3. If excessive force is used in closing (slamming) the door, the tendency of the door to rebound may be sufficient to cause the latch (and door) to re -open. A rebounding door would not normally cause a dangerous situation unless some aggravating condition is present, such as violent slamming and/or immobility of the person closing the door, but it is essential that operators are aware of the possibility ofrebound, and are warned against violent slamming. It is also recommended that the operator should keep his hand between his body and the door while closing it. The forces involved, and therefore the hazards increase with the size and setting of the latch. 4. The door may open unexpectedly if material (such as a large casting) should fall and strike the interior of the door. 5. I I . I • ;1 - . • • et , li , . , , 10 .� i r • . III I! It is therefore recommended that the area in the arc of the door be marked as a danger area, perhaps by "red striping ". 6. Brixon recommends that close attention be paid to the selection of hinges. If t e hinges are not strong enough ,to withstand the maximum internal pressure, allowing for build -up due to time lag, the door may become a projectile. 7. The latches should be set at the lowest practicable setting. NFPA recommends a maximum of 30 lbs./ ft Factory Mutual requires a maximum of 50 lbs. /ft however, lower settings should be used where practical, 8. Due to the inherent brittle nature of cast iron, high impact loads may fracture the castings, possibly resulting in a flying fragment. This is not expected to occur under normal conditions, but is possible under unusually severe conditions of use. 18 3 'h FL AND 4H Keep hands and fingers away from indicated areas, Old Style Handles: Keep hands away from this area also. SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS POR 3H AND 4H LATCHES No. 1 and No. 2 latches have pull type handles which do not affect the operation of the latch. The No. 3 and No. 4 latches have handles which open the cam when used, but also allow the cam to open without use of the handle. The following pertains to No. 3 and No. 4 handle -type latches: When the handle is in the "closed" (down) position, the cam operates independently of the handle. 1. When the handle is moved from the "closed" (down) to "open" (up) position, the Cam is forced into 1 g the open position. The cam cannot be in the closed position with the handle up unless: (a) the handle is very loose, (b) the internal spring pin is broken, or (c) the handle has been removed and reinstalled improperly. If any of these occur, a hazardous condition exists and must be corrected. ' t 2. If the handle is up while the door is being closed, the handle will snap back into the down position. In latches manufactured prior to 1979, especially chrome plated latches, the handle may contact the door itself with considerable force, which would create a hazard to hands placed in the same area (see diagram). For latches with the Dalbert 43 handle (similar to the old handle except with larger rectangular stops), the handle comes to a positive stop well above the surface of the door iiihraithdluha ve not been alter. 3. Closing, and especially slamming, of the door with the handle up increases the possibility of shearing li the internal spring pin. 4. If the spring pin breaks, the handle becomes inoperative. Replacement of the spring pin with one not !I identical to the original, may cause a hazardous condition by destroying the of cam and handle. Additionally, the bearing pin, handle, and cam must not be altered or used in any other latch. Each handle is individually fitted, S. Keep hands away from cams, rollers, handle stops, and away from area between body and handle closing. (8) ti 6. Brixon Manufacturing Company makes no claims for corrosion resistance beyond the properties of the materials used (See "Materials" in the ADDITIONAL INFORMATION section). 7. Modifications of the Brixon latches should not be made without prior approval of Brixon Manufacturing Company. 8. Field repairs of Brixon latches are not recommended, but if they are attempted, replacementparts must be obtained from the factory to insure uniformity and proper operation. 9. The following warnings pertain to Dalbert models 4D111 and 410: (a) Be sure return springs are operative to avoid crushing and denting danger at points "A" on closing. (b) Keep hands and other objects away from interior of resistance arm (points "B "). LIMITATIONS: 1. The No. 1 latch is made of die -cast zinc and is not suitablp for high temperature use; a special cast iron model is available. 1 The No. 2 Brass latch is recommended for sparkproof applications. No other latch is sparkproof. 3, The No. 3H and 4H handles are not designed for multiple latch applications since all handles must be opened simultaneously to avoid undue strain on the latches, doors, and/or hinges. The No, 4DH and the No. 410 Dalbert handles are recommended for such applications. 4. Brixon latches, like all other latches, will eventually wear out or need replacement due to inherent properties of the materials used. The expected life depends strongly upon the conditions of use. If the latch is properly maintained, and in a non - corrosive and dry area, probable failure points are: (a) Cracking of the casting near the bearing pin or base holes because of impact loads. This may result in a hazard in the case of a flying fragment. This is not common, but abuse of the latches makes it more likely, (9) (b)* The spring may lose temper because of prolonged heating or fatigue. This is not expected to be hazardous, but the door will open and/or rebound more easily than normal. 5. If the latch is operated in an exterior or otherwise corrosive atmosphere, failure is more likely t� be due to rusting of internal parts and/or the castings. Corrosion of internal parts results in the probability of the latch mechanism "freezing" and is a major hazard in the event of an explosion. Corrosion of the casting will render it more prone to cracking or breaking under impact. (See "Maintenance "). REPLACEMENT PARTS The following replacement parts are available from the factory: Bodies Only Strikes Only Handles Only, Models No. 1 and No. 2 only. Internal parts for bodies -- See the standard and optional parts available on the preceding chart under "Internal Parts ". No. 3 and No. 4 Handles are not available as they must be attached at the factory. FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND ORDERING, CALL OR WRITE: BRIXON MANUFACTURING COMPANY 2242 University Avenue St. Paul, Minnesota 55114 Phones (612) 646 -2180 Hours: 8;00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m. CST (10) • •• r c SWITCH Standard Models Specifications: Size: 1W (38.1mm) square x 4 (108mnm; overall, (Figure 3), Add' /:' (12.7mm) for bottom conduit outlet. Sensing Distance: Approx. 3b" (9,53mm) side sensing. (NOTE: Sensing distance may be affected by surrounding ferrous materials. See mounting Instructions on page 112,) Differential: Approx. Ms' (7.92mm). Response Times 8 milliseconds. Temperature Rating: •40' F, (•40• C) to 221' F. (105' C). High temperature option available to 445° F. (229' C). Contacts: Single Pole, Double Throw, Form C. Silver cadmium oxide, gold flashed. Rating: 1260 watts t@ 120, 240, 480 or 800 VAC. Maximum cycle rate of 10 cycles per minute resistive load at 10 amps, Housings Environmentally sealed brass or stainless steel. Conduit Outlet; ' -14 NPT, Five locations, (Figure 4), Repeatability: 0.002' (0,05mm) typical, Approvals: UL, CSA, FM, MSHA and Australian. (NOTE: Approvals may vary, depending on configuration and options, See general approval information on page 19 and specific ordering information on page 35 for details.) Options; a High temperature" 445' F (229' C) a Brass or stainless steel housing a Epoxy coating for added corrosion resistance a Potted•in lead wires a Cable a Quick disconnect N Five conduit hvb locations Model 11.11110.00 J VOL ti oo0i fanirn0, s011, l0uwimwno1, St NOT aa0lw 0W /10000M1a itnw+q S1NSINO MLA 1. 25' .204 5 -2mm . MTG. ; we 3 i $0' Model 11.11320.00 SPOT, ii' fl 13ovol wit ions . stoMMisi Moot ioolimwnil. W NPT conduit **I $0 Opt 01 fin$M1Q N01, 3.4 5' 93mm " m SO, NUT 'x'...14 NPT 4$' CONOUIT OUTLET 1 ?mm iu series ■ Single Pole, Double Throw a Side Sensing I, Onid,a f*$c►1 00/10c1 lofting aril. 4 on sim4 iW4 is seni0 4't4. Flue, 4 Model 11.11510.00 SPOT. It' , Ode iM/M+q, Won, Msu lommol. W NPT aandull 1100410/10011001 0/ ina+ofunr. S!NUNO AREA $SNSINO MU I 2, To *II al Nu irq roil, 5114040 AREA 5ENSNO AREA 5. on 1> tan 01 4n410$V(O. 3, To 000101 fen; q orris. &Er 'wire" Whine Inf•nnoe•n Confect NtenoorneM vides teewdkq le the type •1 mho!). Rollo le Ihs .•ell• i. M emit ewheh owed• 1w elelaled Wwmwlen. If alai 1hs1 the **Meal Iced will nst •raw! CI lien espehy if the twitch, Fed sw••aketAl awllt .a, a•M.ala must be awed need a the a ma fNaihy M onto I• mambo IM p•albeny •t a Iln••IaMne chart i0' 1whdws we 'fur•• eawmi ewhsMe, MOWS* Mel they have no vMIM• SIN when deud, no d• Hwy have any lukage tou•n1 when Non. Fw n1.4114 11 Ma1el•1100.awtldws may be caked In w p Halal, m down b•• km, Sallee Whine My number sf 00•1w11shes may N wised M mkt, whhwe v.fi.ee dt•►. Sy eenUeel, s.IW dais swhihee has about Iwo vshs dap awaa IM awhthwhen toweled. With a eyaten•f 11 vine and low ewI(sMs M ettlee, I velte le *owe mode its owhstwy. Orly 3Vle WI is foetal the leol. When unkq 00e OwI1tMs, I IV le ate evilaM, is ague;. the Ned, Nagle, Whine Whin alai• awltsews w• NmsdMpatehal, h is is IOW 100 miwcamps leakads ltr•ush sash ewltah. If len ewhshee woe w In pNulld, the laid helloes swots wiW be 1000 mleosmfs w caw ml0snf • wlNstis s wisC4 1e InNule an 'ON' swadlllen Is a 'HP 'tunable feels esewelw IPLCI, AnynulMv D'SwlliAeentsybe wk.ditp•oltl, with • tr •anihel eps•tdwilhwtdowlnfepm,. IN swot., Mdnea ► 1.00 wonaf 110, 140, 410, is 500 VAC. Moaintun► cycle tale sl 10 eyelet pet t►tkane ►deatfvs Peed e1 10 imps. Pam C 1 L SPOT DMNI I Fenn f4o, 4 KOii O. OM Gt. Switch engineers ars happy to provide technloal . .thence on 00 Switch product.. However, It I. the customer's responsibility to determine the safety and suitability of the product in their application. it 1. also the customer'. responsibility to install the switch suing the currant electrical codas In their region. IMPORTANT OPERATION and INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS DC RATING CHART Tystael DC tatkme see shown below, Cwtsnt mA. 1100 1000 100 S00 400 100 0 mimmiornasil 0 10 100 100 100 100 300 Who 00 Seele. WWOtp Pit Ohl Wkkq 00s Switch startup Dlaelwns /eon 'C' Typ, Duel teed Hookup N/0 VOLTAQESOURCE Fwm'I' Non OWy Cloud Typ. Owoltevel of lkMte, HHh-uf r ush AND N/0 font 'A' Nwmoly Olen Tye, Alum as Who Wutdn. Hoek -up Cush ONO fwm '1' Nwmaly Cloud Namely Open OeuWe Make Double Meek Woe soma psluhy only Evvnple el hem '1' Oats PNailty + Power I—•- -� losrse �t0 N AC N DC SI Power Sowc. e2 COM Nro Tgtallit0 Also AC as CO .•....•a ACaDO 3 POLE 1 .• COM • Often •. WC • Sled 1 „ N /0 ' WWhite '1U AI■U 4.1 SWITCH WIRING COLOR CODE MODEL LEADS OASIS S.tlee 10/20 N/C - fled 11a/flwd Nro - Slus Is • YAW COM .Sleek ONO - Own Oulee 10/20 N/C - Red Slumlord N ro - Skw 13 • W COM - Sleek Owlet 10/20 N/0 - RedlAed white slip. Tws ChttAl Nro •. Sk•e/Slw while altlpo 4 POLE 1 - COM • Sleek 1'• N/0 • While 3 •• NbC . Rio a •• OHO • Chun Rom P,nl INC Add Nro - While COM - Sleek ONO - Olean N/C - Sleek Nro •• While COM - Clean DUICK DISCONNECTS Standard wiring ohuwn. Custom wj/Ing available upon request MANUFACTURE1I'1 WARRANTY tonal EquINreni and Maiwfsslwing Cwnpeny, ins„ wut onte ISM 4101 111M et now equipment mawloslwed by 11 will be hue hem dilute M molttlal en4 wstkmrnsNp sari,, nwmsi use end soviet/ IN •bllsetl•n untie No Wal /only, being limited le mating peed, at Its fe.pty, and pail sl pails Almost, whisk shut be tstwned to it with hunts. +t utors 'ideas piped, within one yett elm the dais st 1l noshes. of such squ•Pmsnt by IM *Newel pwihaae►, wad which ha 'gemination then dbdose to Its •mitt •silen to hive twin thin Meetly.. Oenad tqudpnonl and Msnutesiwing Ce mpsny,lne„ hiweve,. •semmit ne title Of debility lot st1Wlt of the too ♦f the Pteducte Pw lhatad atom TICS WARRANTY Ii IN ULU OF AIL OTHER WARRANTIES, WNETHE71 OF MITI. CHAHTAOIUTY FITNEis, OR OTIIU W11S IllPRE$S OR IMPLIEO, AND Ail OTHIN 004/ACTIONS OR UA01UTIE$ AND 'UNCIAL EAWPMENT ANO MANUPACTUIUNA COM. PANY, INC„ NOTHI71 ASi4M4ES , NOR AUTHORIZES ANY PINION TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY 0T11ER tlASIUTY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE OP THIS EOUIP•ENT, No china for lobos In twplscing d•loctivo polo and eq'+IPmtnl •M cm dom.pss will be allowed by the Company. TNe Wis•nty shell net •Pply to equipment which has boon subjected I. misuse, negl.genoo e, widen*. This Wolin!) 001 npt apply to any .quipmont which shell have been ,spsbod of •homed, outside the Company's Actouy so or 19 Blest such equipment's stobility of solitbility In rho judgement of the Company, 18 w g a eten4 •eel • IawUnq E10end94 61n.fnp TwoC1r9i4 SENSING RESET SENSINQ RESET StNS ntstr IA1 15 1 IA1 101 IAi 101 Ire' 6 /10' •r10" 6/10' ve' cal II' 1.6Jmm 7 14.Jmm 7 al,wn 9.G 7nun I zir SWITCH IMPORTANT OPERATION and INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS HOW THE 10 & 20 SERIES STANDARD GO' SWITCHES WORK HOW THE 10 & 20 SERIES LATCHING GO' SWITCHES WORK TM oo• ►reiMsliy PrinciJ . in lit Ind er400• /*lithe, iw• mlg,wl. ere Ine4, OM /00401116,94791110104 demM 1• s Immo Mmalre, ?Ni, mosnMI It nag My 10/010101, et' , 4I P,IIIM Clats4 tN/C) stoniest pNhl•n, lfiou►1 IJ When a Imam 140/110 VOW the iMl tore d IM twkeh thews Oa, It iheru s Ilto 0/,w• Iron the MrnNUr• and toe, ytwt oaths NMmMV Coon lN/O ) elda toffee's.. 41000/1004, The amfl .a then ,n4i, to NI 4140111 p•511114 Ielbto IM NIO deal!, Wlwn IM 0410110N f.meved, the omits' ►auene Ii h, NIC plltbn, Mew0d0g • 011401104 the Stilted epofa , point. • testis owlish endlw •nutter IS owe ;hot eolvIts i•mes within awllsh'e Iona• eras, • the a lerinn 111u11W el 1 1411111$ Oft, 'Avoid 4.01141 between owlish end 'slue tor, which now Swags owlish, alemel m enet.,'vole* item the Navy, N'Mtend the oenolno dlslMwos • Sv Imes bemeuMedInMypedti1 • InoM5ldivitul5y N;idolroeWe on a non !ties Necker, • When mSanIIn owlish.; ,Nrby';i le, .,name WC.8 ►held use the isme Skier non, W00101441011 switchee with soneln 51' .IC 1•4•19 nch other, I.I4I.d than a 1101 3' IPNt, for bolt snit,, mount twitch on own' n wools metered,. Mod placed NA, the ewilih's dUNterr iII ,tes rill net 511581 11/0111011 00. Um*Med /tetra I, •onoeM Nat Imam ' /er11Mto Al., �, /r, eT u �� • i � ,141ti,I 0 / n /� ., ,4 )'% / 1 e . 6 ............` uje% / CNtell Como! ' Haiti t0111 be cottoned on lortoue,mourt• 1tq b,Uk,t es the; effects on the megrim we vnllom. lee iiuotr,,tiow oboes. ' Chem Me 00 Switch with tlpellilitls8 that m•tsh year requirements ler 4pe swum, typo el Ned, envl;Wnanl, V101411911. 100/74/91011. etC. GENERAL EQUIPMENT AN. ANUFACTURING COMPANY, INC. 3300 FERN VALLEY ROAD LOUISVILLE, KENTUCKY, U.S.A. 40213 (502)969.2386 FAX (502)969.5911 ' /wltcMs may b mewled on lento mot' V; when nwsislety thevgh this Is NI 110 Mnmwnded, glinting difRose will be re• turd, Orw1(N flours I. iniWiii1 ' fe hooey et inductive Node, ere 041pw4e' Glen devises Gush 58 rle4leo .nd copeck Iwo we fesenmeded In elder le extend sent,,; lt.. Comet; I/ctery lot wpocl 4,105.. The 00 P,•aenlfy P,indpll In IaeNnq 101001l00d 104011 00 /w11ab1, the With ho 1Indrq silo on •p•011e aide., with Iwo moult, Mgt4d1111M hem Ws Nmllur4,on/ tautly d00111M, C011011 le m1404 00011n the loot 'toweled pnitlan !804.31 ImI$ M 11141151 emote ibs confine w1, •1 IM Ant/ ieMlil, TM */poets• might then biome; dominant IfioM• 41 UI 1)04 amount Inept (M iO4111 tdi1N an the 114a fw.y Item 11M 141411151• Orly wI40 .11(11151 0001I14 comity me 01 the now eln.d tomtit le IM psetits teemed, 1.4 WIph A Ippkd I,leNrq 00o Switch fppdnila waft be one Involving law Genteel el 1 rnlpt•s,4lne i,W.le/• The latddnq owlishly Intl oiled Ifliur. CI o • IMa, when the owlish I,We ii powered le mere Is the sight, When • eS10aM M •4511 the eerwird wee el the owlish on o14e A, law 0/0110/0101101 1e 11w 104011 serial' /ellen, ••,n4 g IM conies, en eNS A owl i/stktp it on 041e 0, TNo pewee IM I/We le move M 11w peals dbeellsn I, the loll, When 001810 00 ,Mel the oentlnp Fee el the ,wilchen elde 0, the stele IS levelled. iwl leh Se n,ln o ' NOTE: A4w/ut oleo elNCif owning die' trace, R.lstive oMt1q end reset tonllnq dhllnc.t prev1d04 09 bleed an 01u,I5f mellow ,hewn In tflqux, 01, Acmu11y le meting dl. ,ettly Into 5r d ,W sy hem IN, 0019109 QImsn,len A ;opium ih1 0en0np di,' 1115 fwd 0, 109 $4891 01114010. Chul ..empl., 01900 09 for 1 l9/lout 904,00, f o;twy,lond,d 94199151 0;9 1, I'ui /I's41 /3 ". Extended 19n0ng M1104114 410/9ts, 14 i909 did i once, compS'I419 Woo! ,etuetwf. They 9199 Induce .9019 l99• NMinp 9•► 11 Ing , 0•4911, Ump0/ and flouts flouts S 10 ANt 0 SERIES 044# 0114 new. 4 Flow, 0 Ferrous Aotu4tor Sensing Chart ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The electrical components are enclosed In a Noma „ . cabinet which is q 11, b x g deep. It is a single door enclosure made from II. gauge steel and has a strong and rigid construction. All seams are continuously welded and there are no holes or knockouts. A rolled lip is provided around three sides of the door and all around all sides of the enclosure opening; this increases strength and keeps dirt and liquids from dropping into the enclosure when the door is opened. The oil - resistent door gasket is attached with oil - resistant adhesive, and is also held in place with steel retaining strips. The door clamps are quick and easy to operate and have no loose parts. The door can be removed by pulling the hinge pin. Each enclosure has a removable and reversible print pocket. OPERATION Make sure all doors are shut. System will not operate if any door is open. Turn main circuit breaker on control panel to the "ON" position. System may now be started. There is pneumatic start/stop station inside the booth and start/stop station on the front of the control panel. Either stop button may be pushed to deengerize the system. Once the booth or system is energized, an automatic time starting sequence is started. Booth is now ready for use. Booth lights are controlled by a switch located on the control panel, switch to "ON" position. MAINTENANCE Refer to electrical schematics- ladder wiring diagrams. For manufacturer's assistance phone: 1- 800448 4738. Replace lamps every 20,000 hours of operation. It Application Designed to house elecvical and electronic controls, instruments, and components. Provide protection from dust, dirt, oil, and water. 258 Single -Door Type 12 and 13 Enclosures Construction • 16 gauge steel bodies and 14 gauge doors on all sties through 24,00 x 24,00; remaining (larger) situ are 14 gauge • Seams continuously welded and ground smooth, no holes or knockouts • External mounting feet • Door and body stiffeners in larger enclosures • Rolled lip around three sides of door and all sides of enclosure opening excludes liquids and conuminanu • Door clamps are quick and easy to operate • Door removed by pulling heavy gauge continuous hinge pin • Hasp and staple for padlocking • Data pocket is high•impact thermoplastic • Oil.resistant gasket attached with oil.resistant adhesive and held in place with steel retaining strips • Collar studs provided for mounting optional panels Finish White inside with ANSI 61 gray outside finish over phosphatized surfaces. Optional panels are white. industry Standards Ul. 508 Type 12 and Type 13 NEMNEEMAC Type 12 and Type 13 JIC standard EGP.I.1967 CSA Type 12 IEC 529, 1P65 Price List Pogo 4.04 Accessories See GeneralActurMu indu pege 40L Blower Package Corrosion Inhibitors Door Stop Kit Drip Shield Kit Electric Heater Electrical Interlocks Enclosure Stabilizers Fan Cooling Products Fast Operating Clamp Assembly Floor Stand Kit Folding Shelf Keyboard Kit Latch Kit 4 Lock Kit Lighting Kit Panel Support Kit Panels (See table) Rack Mounting Angle Kit Swing.Out Panel Kit Terminal Kit Assembly Touch.Up Paint Window Kit Wiring Duct �•�! GC Ali condkoners and he exchangers for Ott enclosure can be found in Hoffman 's Spec /er s Guide for Gimate Control Produce. Cross Reference CONCEPT"" Single.Door Wali.Mounc Enclosures (page 250) Bulletin A Standard Sizes Single-Door Type 12 and 13 Enclosures . Enclosure Catalog Number A.1012004" MEN 1041 4 1 2 mai 11•3020001,1 .94024002P 1 A.12240111P Itt:4 i01112PTL. NEMA Enclosure Size AxtlxC Inch (millimeter) . I • 1 we * • _ i I I 1 • ciflatftUtti "-r".- • --n" A.10200aP 10.00820.004.00 (408406152) • :Mot A•20100611 20.0044.1Xts(1.00 .1 , Vtir I f A.2416000 _ /44000N..• rt• eis14 ai 24.00115.08.00 • . • • 4 P-wo s'af$4-trt 'Lir/ ' /1 4411101U 11100811 C(1811 00 76Y eicalk, " 7 0" , tuts -triet,041-14,- 4 A40120091 2040812 (X1811.00 rbf Ce24111C A402001111 10.00*20.1Xtd 00 ilo20140111. , A441 /DIV 24.00811004.00 ArIA 1 ONIU' 11, rim A442001111 24-0040.0018-00 ,•••.- " ••••■■■•X •• - Sloks. 1/44441.04 A.24300IKP 24,00831004 00 • .f• St, 50•0044.0114 ."91•1•0108Weet xn0C4Itit' wow:SW • , • • . 4,4 0.01,4* A.3030010 319012040811 p trs. 100 .,isuttt 1=1 ori i 4.44' • f4111104 e4144.64 A.303000LP 30-00410014:74 5472401U 42.90114 000 • 00 - t . .11c • .1 se,„ • 11 A•4113648ti A-4036081? Continued on nest page IEC _,• 1 6.00x12.0303.00 (406405.052) 20.00AS:0015.00 (508.140511 52) 1995 Hoffman Engineering Company 150515101152) 20.00120.012400 (762t508t1S4 7 36.00424.11018.00 101411110$157) I 2.00824.004.03 130010101203) • • Panel Catalog Number A-16P12 (010140081921 At 094 t 24.00824.00409 01041021m A-2010 11321221°131111111111111":441120P12,o11.•.: (01987028203) A.30,24 A.20,10 1/.00813.00 (4321330 100 (161 A-24P20 21.00217.00 (S331434 100 (16) 2 =EtEMIEE4,17, Igasz2 A•241 • 21.00813.00 (93•12330) 3.00 (16) 2 0 0 AV.°, •CKWI ;4" '•-• 01-240 21.01241.00 0334331 3.00 Pt) 2 0 0 1 ! . i2iLt 4•30P20 21.00a17.00 (04044322 100 (16) 2 0 0 /1" ''' ' ' ' riti E a f ,•- • .• i9.311/24 23.00221.00 1031111131 100 (711 11.12,24 0.034100 122013331 100 (10) 2 2 • $ (40$84011203) .411,111 CMgaiririSaga.C (90140482031 r4.10P12 (9011490118203) AMMO • ArVIPIA 11110405i203) A•1tP24 AL~•••ZighWargaligEtt (010850418203) 41.24,20 A242400 KP te,o...444m.acr/"" (I 097;51 NM) 11.42114 , (4457474b2037r4A 411 "A' : • t," (747341 0103) 11.301 o insimino•A4,..mw - 0028114820N 11 Panel She 0 x E Inch (mm) 110019.00 11.00i1 00 tif yr-tx 14.11 ..17.011813110 r• (330x229) 11.0117.00 ($32s437 F inch (mm) 1.23 (32) 11.00x13.00 (432430) 3.00 (16) :t• Industrial Enclosures Number of Clamps 2 WIRRIAMINWR, I 1 * • *•■■•■•a*s • a 0 a Off.J. r , • . 13.00813.00 (33083301 3.00 (11) 2 0 0 Wall-Mount Stiffener Door / 1104 ,•■• • A. e•eett • :et "e*Lekrire • =• tAttr-stft. ott -A.. I '‘• ( I! f ;;It '; * 14324 129 (32) 291 2 0 0 : e t* /hi* .7 F VI' • 3 00 (IN 2 0 0 t • s it .11 *I se re** s • • **vt• r ••• • • *H.* • •■•■•••■■ 4 = • y. • . mot t d 109 (fig Data subject to change without notice. o oo (1191533) 1.21 on 2 0 0 is It. ....+ ..• Sas I . 4,<IV.41. 4 St + 11,...ta . . : • • s. • 21,03413.00E"($33430t .300 PE • 0 0 210081740 (93384221 300 (74) 2 0 0 = • • t t sax,. t• 1.410 ‘!.. " ' 21,004140; '. • - 100 (70 2 • ; O. • • • - • * • f • • . 2740421.00 (41111533) - eeffilf,,f Sapre txrx-e • 01' PII •eirt .44.111 tor 11411 3.00 1711 2 0 . r6 II I C' ft 1Vrt 3Q(76) 0 - 0 27.0041.00 (0108533) • 3.00 RC 0 „" ,,,,.."*.. .r....possyr r • ..,•41.1,4 • 'L. :sr .. a e x ,I V • $ . 2 • , 184; ", • • .00 • • 2• , • 0- • - 1 • 33104740 111341644/ 3.00 170 2 0 I 1= Se • ....NV= •20irriwygurrionv - • , • ..; 441, A .-w19.30P14 _ (123010333,;';' 100 001 ..•• • • • . ......4efweetrfflnerrwmv•■■••••••:- .. .s I 1, I , (9144762/2031 A.31030 33 00127 00 (11341684/ 300 (761 2 0 1 .r ..,T. -..,,..;,. , T.47.400g.03•0 4 (k7 A•4239001.P 42 9430 0010 CO (100789148203) A•421•30 39 00/33 00 (91 1 ;530 3 00 170 2 1 1 o:40i400ti 1 4.i&i4i0000 ,:- 45-0 ..,, (1143433Y- ' - 3 0 48.00130 004.00 1121917624031 11 . /8 0046-0010.00 11219414403) : 5- 60 COs36.0018•00 (15241114x203) A-60736 15 00127 00 (1143163Q 45,00x33.00 (11431$38) 57.0(433 QQ (14481838) 100 (74)- • 3 00 (76) 100 (76) 3 00 (76/ ' 1,•fr, •„„, 3 3 3 .. 612 421 2240 FAX 612 422 2178 V t 11D ft* WV, .111tVl 1..• :0 I • al • • A . • AIR v virws.vimr • rylp Ix • •-• , ••••etl•44444='• •*". = MON. =" ••••-• • • 34 - • 7 : - . 19„., 7491449 • . • 33.01243.00 (11344301 • - •-• 100 (70)- • • 2 • • . • _ . , •• .-4_. 7. " •••• 1401,4* • ■••• 39 00121 00 1991/5331 3.00 (76) 0 0 33.027. •(/61 • • - 1 f • 259 Enclosure Enclosure Size A x 0 x C • Panel Catalog Panel Size D x E F Number Stiffener Catalog Number ktch (millimeter) Number Inch (mm) Inch (mm) of Clamps Door I Body 011 MBENKtext, i&t<so em... 84as; '� i aciti "i ifaa� :oo` %;(s3oS3 - A- 201M OLP 20.00216.00210.00 00e2406454) A -20P10 11.00213.00 (4322330) 3.00 2 0 0 !+M► !►?It~ 11VlGV - t .h. " . "r /((18)) ( 4331.4 . p , r-•„,c _ -' -`- • . _--- s =. w ti t0 tzr ..1-:-. ; t'. *^l°i 'K . y A'20001G �QbQ a.. y 1 . O r s ::6ia:i�it .rrka. A- 241210LP 24.001120000.00 (8iOz3OS22S4) A4 2P24 9.00121.00 1229431) 1.25 p'4 2 0 0 - 744220t�t � Ot (333Y43ii a . 4.1. ' j2 � f_ z -: p T+�' .: - e.B+►tii, ,tw_•r r - •- ,"�f � _._ ',' iA.4. •Lrrscnri. a+r A4424101.1. 24.0044.00x10.03 (61041022S4) A-24P24 21.00121.00 (S331S33) 3.00 M 2 0 0 k '''' ' J. t-:. -. ' , .. i + A11• r. = d� r•.,•... . -_r 'r +�, 's'( '-.- Y' S AIf' r t. .�'�.."13 .n #' ' • ar..r•..�tfiiii•arsaw.+.� 21 141 - • A•3024100 30.00124.00110.00 (76229102254) A•301 27.00e21.00 (0882533) 100 M 2 0 0 -3.d2410LP:41-. ':' . 00124.03x1QO0�7•.' (91416101454) _ ~ -' C►; l ' `-' f :' } '' . ,...:.:.. ( > . ..:..t `z:'... pe!' art • _ ei'. 0 :. n A- 3030101P 36.0040.00110.00 (91417822254) AY38P30 33.00221.00 (6381688) 3.00 (461 2 0 I - .+ -rt, -. .. «a+,,.,,f...�..«. M� r t• - &# .«- -- _�a. .,.»rrt'.+tr:..,e;. A- r1 114 00x30.00it10.00 r (108>'1�6d5t) ) � is, bOx2l.00 (9912886) , - 3.00; (16) : .1 •, -• a 1 : 1 .. ae.T Yt• e_a,.Y.YM:.0 • x43- CiLLf.YM1 Ji • :V.s .t -..nom, r +.+., a-.. . • A- 4234101.1 42.00238.00110.00 (10672914454) A42P71 39.0043.00 (9912138) 100 (76) 2 1 I A4130 _ 10 10- OO ( �2S41 4 a. -• �' � �..+�;.4OQd�00 (1141 61 330 ' 3 ,:.t.t. i.. I .. .....Y- . .. , • A413110LP 41.00x36.00110.00 (12194141254) 4-411P311 45.0021300 (11432838) 3_03 tie ) 3 I I 10004�rlogr. : (16241r4QSt) }}• g s70 11;31 . 0 (1441434/' s=1,'t�pp. +p ; 1 +�': i A42011120 20.00118.00212.00 (4100e405) A•20■11 17.00113.00 (4321330) 2.00 00 2 0 0 ' • Al ro.Mr.i ^a >r r++�ria+ issrs r ,N r +•�� M /M.+►+.t :. • _ .. ••"• °_ Y..►�r +.'f , Ar21i012fJr 400 ft)24. 200 . :17/ri ellii) 2ME 2100x17.00 (63114121 , 100 � 2. ",' 0 0t ' ih!f.'1 �Iir•8s: lrM.f.,lM,i�� +.r.r MY Y ��ix�'•4ra •f .s• -- .,i1Si n lirrrD tr{r� •i•..Y:. „ •a a A•242412LP 240044.0021200 0102410x305) _ A44P24 2100121.00 153345331 300 (71) � 2 0 0 Mu•sNV. •.i•!wtr�+�. 4..M .w,.. .• r r: <.•'.t Y � ry . ►r •! f . f • ":"" z A- i00Al2 3 .004 f L. (�2e 1 , .w. • ' , 27.004103 r (6114613) ; 3.00 ��`(tq''.` 2 • 0 0 .,ia•,! YF.yI .. - .r►Yw,.�sro• . „ Issas... Ma. s.M.. 4 • + .i.4ar r m.fr•u. 300430:00212.00 (71 42 112x341 A•30►30 2[:00427.00 04041140 2.00 (7q 2 0 Y r 1 A40301211 0. ♦:...: v vY ..•..H +44.8.3.. �, .. 1, +. i n.IV� r,S,iNx�F�r ! i M . yM.a.Y # i.•.. •:r+..W ri•,t .- : /�� A�>�t41 , : .� 90001Ct4A `t1a 0 . ft i D •37.004100 03.43z . 3.00 7 (1el i i „2_ '`t' 0 0. . + ` A4130110 34.00430.00412.40 014002130) AY34P30 33,00411:00 (1)114/0 300 (70 0 1 .- +4► : tN• .. pf :< o- �, . A�3*f1i2tJ' ` °12F30AQ43e A0n12o00 ^s 0144142X11) - Y :.1 ►� .� tt � 34AO133.00 (434 • • 1n03 -.,k+ i�+.'7,1i7.-27:4-!',1. . I . 1 A.43301211 41.00430.00x (101717 47405) A•42120 35.00421:00 0111 IMO 0 . 00 • (1q 2 I I A.42 /t.00d000rt12t10 '(IOe7d14x30� r� Y! ; ��' t� _ -', 3000 (70114. 100 (313- t I . 1 r ,r.,a A•483112tP 4 00434 0042,00 (12194141305) 12•4113e 46,00433.00 (1143431) 3.00 (76) 3 1 1 • A•)031121P -• # 00,004i6A0ritA0 (1624414405) Ti 1 'i . .4)'00x3 (I 441438) 340• (!p* 3 I I A.72341211 724013440412,00 (14294144305) A•72P36 85- 00233:00 (1761434) 300 (78) 3 1 0 A•242010LP - C:24.00220,00211),00 0104008404► • .' ' - , - - 21,004II" (533443 3:00 (114 ` 2 0 0 • • A.2424120 24.00244.04116.00 (01040104400) A•24114 4 21,00221,00 (5334633) 3.00 (75 2 0 0 ro r:,w , y . 7%Y'.rY'+r: •r ,•:A ms N TIF (✓.�$4ef ., Y »- ' , A P ' 304O+d1.40xi640 pr410z/Oti1 it ) 21,00421 (0004633) 3:00 (71 . • 2 0 f 0 - 4re + r �ss f•- • s • �rr ,rr a lr v< 42 - 14 �iMiii/!' . LJ :•f.. .. � e,r :wr r+r- *r.••r.. -r ' , 0.31301011' 34.004300041440 014r70L4400) 4•36110 33. 0047,00 1134440) 300 (70) 2 0 1 . Y . 7, �, tI• .'.�u,•v ay- '01746'14;400)- .,,/> j t r ..+, ... _..... a„#• I ., Ad2J61 4U"�•' ' Z•0Qr70.00rIfi.00 •() _' t:•�'. 0914138) 0914138) - 3,00,(10), ` - : 2.'c:.::' - °' ... _ • A ... r, h.. t .,.....y •. .. e r - ... .. � y•._r • Mr . A'4134161P 40- 0040,00416.00 112194144400 A•41P30 460043.00 (1143431) 340 pp 3 1 1 A•403I1eKP 7'."`+ OO.OQ+AQ,OO216.00:p524x914x400 ..f,�... • ..: .. . A�4OP31i +;•, . 51,001400 (144430 304 (TQ ° . 3 . 1 1 4 3000444040.00 (74246104504) A•30P24 27.00421.00 10004333) 3 -00 05 2 0 0 A•303020t? ; - 34A040.0940A0 (9141102400) • A• P30, - 33.00zZT•00 (834440) 3.00 «b 2 0 1 A-436201,1 44.0040.00420.04 (1219 :9144540) A30P34 45.49133.00 (1143403x) 3 00 (70) 3 1 1 1 A00}6Z0LF . 00.00 - 52449444540) - 7"1 67.4045.44 (14i4.330) 3.00 (10) . _ . . 3 _ 1 I 0•UOrAO.004 1 46 - 7 . 42 - ii - 4260 - A4024241" 30_00424 _00424.00 17624144614) A A30P24 27.00421 09 0004533) 3 00 470) '�faascrrac' Standard Sixes Single -Door Type 12 and 13 Enclosures (Cont) Wilt* Cif 41ma1301$ t i are tOr rataraKe onh: 4o AV carrel mom C1ma to iron• Panda must 4t o'C0e4 saparataty, 00004 iIumirxrm 3322!: are aradatas 113 most sitee• See Gsn t 4 *coot:i n 260 Single -Door Type lz and 13 Enclosures Bulletin 62' 16 29 NEMA e IEC tC7 � �w H 1 A -1.84• 47 irtl II II n u u II 11 11 11 II 1 _1. It It tt IS 11 11 DATA POck 1 tt (SEE NOTE I) li to II II II It f -- 1 it II s II 1 1 11 It 1 I & sirs,. ii CI It It A-I X 81' r' • • r x 1.16• C Inch Millimeter 5 g 1 2.00' 1995 Hoffman Engineering Company S.44' 3 DOOR CLAMP t $fir" 11 PO HASP STAPLE NEOPRENE GASKET DOOR STIFFENER 1.31' 3T810gA� sl 1.25' ! r J' .94' • .d•. ••••••1i..r MI N.. 1..1 ..I ���i 6..� 11,E r 1,25' CONTINUOU5 HINGE 14 GAUGE 3/0 -16 COLLAR STUO ,94' I 24 r 12 GAUGE . , i_ - i_ - � apps STIFFENER 14 GAUGE SECTION X -X 1 38 , .88' 22 X 2 2 1. NOTE: I. Large data pocket 12.00 x 12.00 (305 x 305); small data pocket 6.00 x 6.00 (I 52 x 152). 2. Panels have Ranges along sides which ire more than 21.00 Inches (508 millimeters) long, except A•24P20 and M24P24 have Hinges on two sides. 3. Panels are 12 getup suet. 30 1.38' .75' 19 23 ` MOUNTING FEET PANEL (CFOER SEPARATELY) SECTION Y -Y Industrial Enclosures OM IT TWO MIDDLE STIRS IF 8 ■LESS THAN 31.00' SECTION Z -Z Wall -Mount ...PANEL (ORDER • SEPARATELY) STIFFENER (SEE TABLE) OMIT TWO MIDDLE STUDS IF A•LESS THAN 3i.0 Y Y Y t350• .8/2-1.15.4 3 766 MM PANEL C2402 Data subject to change without notice. tr 612 421 2240 FAX 612 422 2178 261 n- O 11 11 n 11 11 I I M- - � " """` N u II • 11 u II ,1 Z ' II I It 1 11 II If II II II s tl 11 n II ti II II If E ‘.. It 11 11 11 11 lei 62' 16 29 NEMA e IEC tC7 � �w H 1 A -1.84• 47 irtl II II n u u II 11 11 11 II 1 _1. It It tt IS 11 11 DATA POck 1 tt (SEE NOTE I) li to II II II It f -- 1 it II s II 1 1 11 It 1 I & sirs,. ii CI It It A-I X 81' r' • • r x 1.16• C Inch Millimeter 5 g 1 2.00' 1995 Hoffman Engineering Company S.44' 3 DOOR CLAMP t $fir" 11 PO HASP STAPLE NEOPRENE GASKET DOOR STIFFENER 1.31' 3T810gA� sl 1.25' ! r J' .94' • .d•. ••••••1i..r MI N.. 1..1 ..I ���i 6..� 11,E r 1,25' CONTINUOU5 HINGE 14 GAUGE 3/0 -16 COLLAR STUO ,94' I 24 r 12 GAUGE . , i_ - i_ - � apps STIFFENER 14 GAUGE SECTION X -X 1 38 , .88' 22 X 2 2 1. NOTE: I. Large data pocket 12.00 x 12.00 (305 x 305); small data pocket 6.00 x 6.00 (I 52 x 152). 2. Panels have Ranges along sides which ire more than 21.00 Inches (508 millimeters) long, except A•24P20 and M24P24 have Hinges on two sides. 3. Panels are 12 getup suet. 30 1.38' .75' 19 23 ` MOUNTING FEET PANEL (CFOER SEPARATELY) SECTION Y -Y Industrial Enclosures OM IT TWO MIDDLE STIRS IF 8 ■LESS THAN 31.00' SECTION Z -Z Wall -Mount ...PANEL (ORDER • SEPARATELY) STIFFENER (SEE TABLE) OMIT TWO MIDDLE STUDS IF A•LESS THAN 3i.0 Y Y Y t350• .8/2-1.15.4 3 766 MM PANEL C2402 Data subject to change without notice. tr 612 421 2240 FAX 612 422 2178 261 To Order SPecily7 W Catalog Number W • Class Number • *Sipe Number 4 Voltage Code C14$$ Typo Vca4;• Cm R L 9079 I I 00 I I 01 j 3,34 3,34 341 411 2,11 4.44 4,31 544 1.54 4.50 4.42 4.14 1.11 9A4 1 31 341 L74 4,40 4.10 4.30 440 4.40 414 5.21 7.44 7.04 100 1 C0 L1t 141 3.211 3.7$ 3.75 3.75 3.11 311 444 4.34 444 4.54 9.50 9.50 1.�/ L31 141 2,20 1,14 L44 3-00 344 3.44 4.31 4.13 4.t4 443 4 54 7 7P. W DiM141001t4 - MIX 1 W Price A 8 Q R P 111.0T �MMO011 K7i01 K10001 KI1001 K20001 1(11001 1(30001 K35001 KI0001 1(74001 K140001 K150401 K240001 K300001 K500001 $:s FIR 3,34 3,34 341 411 2,11 4.44 4,31 544 1.54 4.50 4.42 4.14 1.11 9A4 1 31 341 L74 4,40 4.10 4.30 440 4.40 414 5.21 7.44 7.04 100 1 C0 L1t 141 3.211 3.7$ 3.75 3.75 3.11 311 444 4.34 444 4.54 9.50 9.50 1.�/ L31 141 2,20 1,14 L44 3-00 344 3.44 4.31 4.13 4.t4 443 4 54 L + 2.11 313 3,71 3,71 3.72 3,71 3,75 4. 34 4.34 341 4.11 7. 43 7.43 ,m 4 .34 ,24 :,41 10 i ,41 ,10 4.34 .10 4 .34 ,20 4.34 14 4 .31 .10 4.31 .24 4 .41 .21 4.41 .24 4.34 .214.54 .4e4 4 .49 .44 4 .41 �L1 3,0 1 1$ 11 10 10.0 111 1L4 701 30-0 31-0 42.0 14.0 + Control Power Transformer---, Type K Class 9070 Square D manufactures two lines of Control Transformers. Both lines are specifically designed to handle high inrush associated with contactors and relays. AU control transformers are copper wound, vacuum impregnated with solid polyester varnish and 100% tested in strict compliance with ANSI, CSA and UL codes. Both are UL listed and CSA certified. TYPE K Our most popular end complete line of control transformers includes rnuttltap and top-mounted fuse block versions, has a 10 year warranty and uses our most advanced materials and manufacturing processes. type K is the best choice if size and cost are of concern. 'Type K 0 Codes: Simplifies selection and ordering of Typo K and E Transformers. Voltage Codes VeM.11ge 01 02 04 as Oil 010 PMw•See.ridiy Velts4e 2444/4120 140M4044 277.1N1 1241 24 244 X 241120 Omit alarm Numbev See Pege 47 rer CAM HAM! 0149141. TYPE K The Type K transformer wee the molt advanced insulating materials. This allows us to offer the advantage of different temperature classes, 50.211OVA SVC rite,10VC temperature claw. 300.3SOVA 00•C rise, 130•C temperature class. 500.5000VA I UPC lino, 180•C temperature class. Typo K Is 50160 Hz rated, UL listed under File E81239 and CSA Approved under File LA37058. TYPE K GROUP( 01 .240/440V • I1OV 2300440V • 11IIV 2401440V • 110V 13463 floe in4b4414444m$ n rm4Yy sleck44. How To Order: ,w,o hi MrreNt 2 2 / TYPE E Our high efficient line of control transformers use traditional materials and manufacturing processes and have exceptional regulation characteristics. lope E is the best choice if exceptional regulation and very low temperature is an absolute necessity. Also Included In this Section: • Type 0 - Lbw Profile Control Transformers • Fusing lOts and Options • Loaded Transformers • NEMA 1 Enclosures • Transformer disconnect Vellsge Collo 010 0 0 17 O 010 033 P Mwy l4aend4My Vamp 10424 204/277/40044/1 I I 704740777/1•0/440•74 120/2�4�4 134141C4711•41/1111 3110/4030414111/230 C r0A Otegrrrn Pluelter t N 1 a if s See Digest (latest version) for pricing. FILE. astrbt.uon Ptock.cts Catalog 4't FA Molded Case Circuit Breakers CONTENTS DeacrIption Section Pages Application Data 650 „ . , 24 Selection, 650 , „ . 4 Dimensions 050 .. . . 5 Characteristic Tripping Curves NO .... 643 SQUARE]] COMPANY AVAILABLE LUGS FOR FA CiRCUIT BREAKERS H mnGo' of iC_Ind"d°` and Vii. Ram s nrukst mom = WO t rpe c 3 Mumble Sta' r° 0044rw AYCu 1610 MidMMcil &SOCA s 14144 X 08,100 MedWitIll ALUOOFA s 1414140 _ X CU1OOFA 0 v 1414.1 X V M* CAntp VCtOOFA 0 _ 14a'bO X CVC IOOM 0 1441/0 X 18,100 Perellf C4rw _ c MOM 0 44144 X PoC3FA2 0 3414.2 _ 1 x 650 Description: 100 ampere frame, 600V. ac 50/60 Hz, 250V. dc one two and three pole, thermal- magnetic trip circuit breakers. Application: PA thermal- magnetic circuit breakers are used for overcurrent protection and switching on ac or de systems. High interrupting capacity circuit breakers are available for overcurrent protection and switching on ac or dc systems where high fault currents are available. All PA breakers may be unit mounted or installed in industrial enclosures, panelboards, switchboards, busway plugs, combination starters, or motor control centers. Construction Standards: FA circuit breakers are built in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard 489 and NEMA Standard A13-1 -1975 (1981). Circuit breakers are listed under UL Pile £10027, CSA File LR7551 and are IEC 157 -1 rated. They also meet Federal Specification W C- 375B/Ol?N as Class 11a, 11b; 12a, 12b; and 13a, 13b. Molded case switches comply with UL 1087 and are listed under UL Pile E33117 and CSA Pile LR 32390. MAO -GARD instantaneous trip circuit breakers are UL component recognized under UL file 33117 and CSA cer- tified under CM file LR32390. Operating Mechanisms PA circuit breakers have an over - center, trip-free, toggle -type operating mechanism. They have a quick -make, quiclabreak action with positive handle indication. A heavy crowbar provides common tripping of all poles. 'nipping Operations FA circuit breakers have a permanent trip unit containing individual thermal and magnetic trip elements In each pole. The thermal trip elements are call - brated for 40°C ambient temperature per UL 489, other ambient calibrations are also available. The magnetic trip elements afro not adjustable in the field, but are factory set to provide Instantaneous trip protection on high fault levels. Push=lb- 'lVip: An easily identified yellow push-to-trip button provides a means to mechanically trip the circuit breaker. This action exorcises the tripping portion of the mechanism and allows maintenance chocks on the breaker, control cir- cuits, alarm devices, and other associated equipment. M,♦ Copyright '0 Square 0 Company 1987 FAL 1. 2.3 POLE FA MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS THERMAL - MAGNETIC APPLICATION DATA 2 SP f COMPRNY 'IYip Indication: The operating handle assumes a center posi- tion when the circuit breaker is tripped. The breaker can be reset by moving the handle to the extreme OFF position and then to ON. ' • . ON /OFF Indication: International I/O (on/off) markings appear on the face of each PA breaker along with standard ON /OFF markings. 'lrrninations: FA circuit breakers, instantaneous trip circuit breakers, and molded case switches are provided with UL listed mechanical lugs for copper or aluminum conductors. Optional lugs available for field installation/replacement are shown below. CU IOOM FA i, 2.3 POLE PC 3FA2 APRIL, 19117 UL LISTED ACCESSORIES resenpon. V* Fit Id C • F eaoryr s ' Oround FAA Wails Ural-1.4010 (ir1.110) 111111 111111 111111 111111 111111 HAW GFMIOOFA 04+3 Studs 2 t FA020 .`..,.._.-.......r. 404 irdtaa Ong y FE2 P M t'O i�+mmt WAN Hands to rKHt $IxrM T^P 2411 ea 1042 glace 1021 �,} MW w�. o 1027 2a, 5 . 4vda do 1 MN tel 0 OP a tx�demv -Nags T�i+�Op I e1R a 1 in , it i a 111 emanN • O IV utI sill Mon WW1 1103 ° PHASE DESIGNATIONS Common 1.Pc i 2 Paie 3'd! 'A ., X11; A ►► F ++ A ►+ 1 wa 111111 111111 111111 111111 111111 APRIL, 1987 atanda,d AN einglo ptusa pem11k oa de Reverse Connection: PA frame circuit breakers have been fully tested and are UL listed and IEC rated for reverse connection without restrictive "LINE" or "LOAD" markings. Mounting: PA circuit breakers may be mounted and operated in any position. They operate in the upside -down position (with handle facing down) and are not limited to vertical or horizontal mounting. I -LINE Construction: PA circuit breakers, instantaneous trip circuit breakers, and molded case switches are available in I -LINE plug -on construction for mounting in I-LINE pan - efboards and switchboards. They are manufactured in I, 2, and 3 -pole modules. I -LINE one and two pole breaker catalog number are corn- plated by adding the required phase connection letters as a suffix to the circuit breaker listed in the tables on page 4. Sample catalog numbers for 30A., 480V. ac breakers am found in the table below: Molded Case Switches: PA automatic and high InterruptIn automatic molded cue switches are available In 100 ampere maximum current rating at 600V. ac. They are available In unit mount or I•LINE construction. Molded cue switches provide no overcurrent protection and are intended for switching use only. Refer to Catalog Class 685 for additional information. MAG -GARD: FA MAQ•OARD instantaneous trip circuit breakers are available in unit mount or I -LINE construe- don. They are used In combination with motor starters to provide motor circuit protection in compliance with National Electrical Coda requirements. Interrupting ratings are established in combination with motor starters. Refer to Catalog Class 680 for additional information. MAG.OARP is a Regiucred Trademark of Swig. t) Company a Registered Trademark of Square U Company D FA MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS THERMAL - MAGNETIC • APPLICATION DATA SQUARE D COMPANY Accessories: All PA /PAL and P14 /PHL circuit breakers, • instantaneous trip circuit breakers, and molded case switches are available with UL listed accessories as shown below: • Add sulk 10 Omaha, catalog number. s g, FAUSI001100 Electrical Operators: Electrical operators (catalog number FA-M01) provide remote "ON,' "OFF" and "RESET" control of molded cue circuit breakers, Operators arc field installable and operate on 120V. ac 50 /60 Hz. For complete information on all electrical accessories, modifications and auxiliary devices for PA and PH circuit breakers, refer to Catalog Clan 690 "Melded Case Circuit Breaker Accessorlea" or the latest version of the Square D Digest. Chat, One Pole WV AC 125V DC UT WS Symmetrical Rang Fading WC,3 5e/OEN ! LANE AC Voltage OC Vbea00 Uill I.UNE 120 FNL 16015 FHL 16020 FHL 16026 FHL 16030 FHL 16035 FN. 16040 FHL 16045 FH4 16050 FHL 16060 FHL 16070 FHL 16080 FHL 16090 FHL 16100 $11111$$ 4AO A0O 125 250 P.M IMINAMMAIIAIORMINI.MANT FH 361X15 FH 36010 FH 36025 FH 36030 FH 36035 FH 36040 FH 38045 FH 36050 FH 33060 FH 36070 FH 36080 FH 36090 FH 36100 4151240 FAL 240V. FA 240V. 1 2 3 1$100 15.100 15.100 10K 10K 10K 5K 5K SK 114 M. 121/ 11b,12b . .. FAL 4110V. FA • 480V 1 2 15.100 15.100 15100 18K 18K 18K 14K 14K 14K 10K 10K 10K . 11k 124. 13a 13b 13b 14K 14K 14X 14K 14K 14K FAL 15100 15.100 18K 111K IM 10K 10K 1$i Ida 1 K 14K 14K II FHL rm 1 1 1510 WOO 15100 MX 85K 25K �5K tOK 10K 10K 10K 13,4 131 22a 30K 3t* 30K FA 100 AM AMPERES MAXIMUM 240V. A< PEIOAANENT VISI p. Or* M • 120V. AC 125V 2 5 0 V 24IN Three Pole • 240V. AC 2SOV. DC UNIT BREAKER !LINE UNIT BREAKER 14,04E' UNIT BAEAKEA IUHC TRRRAW882888 igagaggvga 1111/11111 , *„1tA4Y ,. iggigigliiiii FAIN :t ': ! µ +, FA 100 AMPtaa FRAuI = 100 AMPUtS MAXIMUM, 4tT0Y AC PERMANENT TRN e j � CM Pole • PTV. AC 177 OC Toe pole . 480V. AC 260W. OC i= Throe • NOV. AC MN DC UNIT ORLAK[R 1414' UNIT ULA$*A SUNI' __ UNIT WKAK[A IL$NL i 4 1 104113111011 aignifite FA , 4je FA tt + • FA . ! gA . . F A" $ "A Pt ;4 PA . �f FA ;' FA N M t" 1 ♦ , a *r t l n :t FA It' ' A; / t FA tr'. • FA 100 FA 100 AMPtAS FRAIL • 140 AMPERES MAXIMUM, 00011 AC. PERMANENT TRIP e OM P o l e T w o P t 1 1 e KW AC tf4V OC Throe Pole • S O N 210V OC UNIT BREAKER !LINE UNIT BREAKER ! LINE' UNIT BREAKER lLWL °2283=222888 , , , w w • w _Jul _2, FA + 15 FA •'• FA • • FA l' t F 's� FA : t, 4 ;4 FA i0 FA }+,i • 4 FA 1. F _____________ ] i it .....51:: -1J-II-11J -J1 FA ,.11.i. 1 FA • F t .T FA '' FA • eg FA r • *, FA FA t FA 100 Ampere Rt1Mnp One Pole WV AC 125V DC Two Pole • 600V. AC 250V DC Three PoM • 600V. AC 250V DC UNIT BREAKER ! LANE UNIT BREAKER lLWE' UNIT BREAKER l i m e 13 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 70 60 90 100 FNL 16015 FHL 16020 FHL 16026 FHL 16030 FHL 16035 FN. 16040 FHL 16045 FH4 16050 FHL 16060 FHL 16070 FHL 16080 FHL 16090 FHL 16100 $11111$$ FHL 16015 FHL 26020 FHL 26025 FHL 26430 FHL 26035 FHL 26040 FH4 26045 FHL 26050 FH4 26060 FHL 26070 F L 26080 FHL 26090 FHL 26100 Fit 24016 FH 260 .l FH 2602 FH • r r FH .603 FH :' ' FH 2604 • FH 260 ' FH 2 . , • FH 2607. FH • • : • FH 26090 FH 26100 3 6 0 1 5 FHL 36020 FHL 3b025 FHL 36030 FHL 36035 FHL 36040 FHL 36045 FHL 36050 FHL 36 060 FHL 36070 FHL 36060 FH. 36090 FHL 36100 P.M IMINAMMAIIAIORMINI.MANT FH 361X15 FH 36010 FH 36025 FH 36030 FH 36035 FH 36040 FH 38045 FH 36050 FH 33060 FH 36070 FH 36080 FH 36090 FH 36100 650 M( DED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKE 3 THERMAL - MAGNETIC • SELEC11ON DATA Application: al enclosures, panelboards, switchboards, starters, etc., applications at 240V. ac, 480V. ac, and 600V. ac or 250V. dc. For switching or protection of branch or feeder circuits. CI INTERRUPTING CAPACITY H 100 AMPERE FRAMI = 100 AMPERES MAXIMUM. 000V AC. PERMANENT TRIP 4 SQ URRE COMPANY APRIL, 1997 NOTE UNIT BREAKER denotes circuit breakers for it v+duai mounting in enc1csutes. C:.mbnaDon starters. etc. I•LINe denotes plug on cscu4 weakens for mounang in D UNE panetboards and and t w po One ano pole breakers and MAG GARS are Registered Trademarks or Square 0 Company d two loe Breakers require phase designations. See page 3. �' For MAR-GARO astantaneous tip circuit breaker and molded case swatch setec iron data. refer to Catalog Classes 680 and 685. APRIL, 1987 IJ .83 I. .41 10 011011)410011010110; IIMES 141 tors FA MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS DIMENSIONS .44 11 112 1.30 4.41' le 114 allaur.offirsei .44 .44 Ii ri 5 II ;' SQUFIRED COMPRNY 5 - .-..- ft • do to woe • I A A A 1 A 12111 um NI um 4:4A 44.40400•44 444.4 mew= Milmimm a 444 mil• ore mew 44.100 ma ^n rrill a a • • 41 - MO ,„,, ,,, Am Jill . 0 0 ft of im .g. NAM is um Nil .... 1 NV NMI MINIM MINI IIIIIIII mill wise PIMP ROM 1444 111111141011% or.1.0•49. cm irannw•J.84-4/2.4.4.1u.. isserammitallonnatuommoniasnmun Pill proommi wpm Rs rr p•••=•■• •• ccommiiiliner . ' 8 ,7, .. •••7733:0•0141 INOtilieL 41 MAI am 101 ' 11.1 644.44EMitr" . Ns 0440 MIMI IMMO UMW 1131 MIIIIII NI RI plum moionionnav ,',' IIMIntlialiiiiiiiiirelniPtINI EriiiiiiMiiiiiiiiEllii..."i t% mull anonv111111111111111111.111111/NOINIII PPIN IMO 111111•R011 NRIBMINIMININIIIIMINFIRWIMIIIIIWWW1 INN 011111110111111100141111100111001111101414010/1111101111111Will MIN wiiimuir vi MAMA 1.11111111111111111111111111111MNIIIIIIIIIIMIIIIIIIIIIIIFJOINIFIN MN wI 1• UN OM OMNI. • 111111M1111INIIIIINNINIONIIN m was ••••••••••••■• PR PIIIIIVIVIIIIMMINI IRIP411 IHNIIIMINP/M OMNI 111 II 01414441.4441001111/001110401014 WWI All MI WM 001411111101111114011011111X01144111140140411111 IX is scutiviiiiiimuinicwincummis 1111111111 1111111111141M1t .111 f-4-f- I- ' VI 11 1111111111111111111111NIN•RINIM WI I 1121111111111111111111111111111111111UHU ._... . .L-l- MIMI PI 111111111•11111111111111111114111 - " - maimmilifilii MN MINN 0151111111111111111111 MON Om um WNW 1.1111111111111•1111111115111111 WHIN 40011.0114 ini NO IN111 401 moil in Ej = 1 • fa. OMR mg iiiimeRIMIMMINIIIIIRIslumlimmeminlimmS11111esull WM 1;11111111111111111WW1111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111P1111111 ratannumumnuatinummununws ..... .7.... MEM! 1,141W111/1111 0111411111111 M4 +Nis OWIMIIIINIMMIIIII UV 417.1 WIIIIIMinai MOM i -: ..L. * ' ' t--1 04 ...... 0 -1-I •- o . 1/048 ow ktiut4044tos 'nil PA own III 11 a • -44-1 -Li. alp 4004.01404 mo • .. • WM 1.$ 1 ■ 1441441011 0 ie ISM . • * ... I. ,--- ,a4........ 1 : 1 1:1i=== . I oili is 4i . k ,.......... PM Ul _ q 414111140014±110 SI CLUIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIISE111111111 ;II """'"=r47:=11: el 4 '4 0. a AEI _ so . MN nu NA •11111111111111~111ssuommonv In* Ifilumlintintaimietiiiinsi . ... ........ . *Ps „, . 411 ..... 0 ,.., 0 I 41 '11* PHI I IS IMMO ................. A 10 4 itIML40 410 PIE loorawarial 41M'll .. PM 04111140101144,02 0 11111 . 11 . I - • _ IIMIkansSIMMIsmiumssamemnimassiimm ,- NWINNINNINNINNOWN_ innoplisiumnrismilionini 1:1 1 a - ill - ' 1 ' .-- III WWI ' ;4 :4 le4 1111111111111 • .... , .• , .._,..._ .III 1 C: :::1=== ow '" ' X I • 5 r-*".'"' - 1711 •4= t= sr•-• r -- 1-..-« • Jib. as i- • i = 111Aussininiumt • .•••- 1 ••.• .-- • - sr.-. - = • lilla dk* _ . ... . 1 , oil-lin-9n: .... , v .. . _ _ , __ ..... ... : I. 4 - i 1 1 1•9f4 1" 11 ; dill!. ii ....r•-4.4F,_ ccr_m*•■•59 1 II g _--, - ., . ...._.' I , 1 i I .. - a . . _ , - 1 Ilan Ira - .___ - . ill - _ i I i s .--e•-•oe--sear - -4- 1 - - ill. - NIII ageit 444-, Ejj t • a lool 4 . I le saszol 4r...a •,..,:„. I: I . e• # .1..*ALSWN.INC-* Nit= • , ... - -= -... .. I r 11 tr IM1 Dui 44 " 4 . : . I' r .-• • 1 , • .., ...- s • Ir r i ■ • :-• '• 4- 4_ _; i 1 4 I ••••---s- -1- • - • • i •-• . r r--1-- - IC KIM - - - '-_ - : - *4 -`, ',--; ; -- -.- as - r. • ■ , e- •• 7 - ..4 _,_, • L1 VT & I . ---"-- . • 11 I S =mei igi 1 1. 1 1 ii i nL II it Igallint c r j ! • I ' I • ' • T I r , r - 4 "-- 1 , i - ' • t r ' - ' 4 11111111111111211181111111111111114 - *" r - • .., I tr : gli iellio obsiebeimi * ewitommeemi a 11444 I M S 1011100001 014 140 -- - 0 -- I ilni illi! .01 4.44 it0 id . . t " - - T 1 . • f.....r --1-..-,- • , a ._ 4-.---,,, _ ...., m4r14-,,,-4-.- i--; -; ti r• - 1: : F: ;---: : -- • 0 * =. . 1- - • i•-• • I- 1 h -ii 1- --i--4.--;*4 • N -----re's I --• -r---, -rtrof-vii '4 , 0 1 erne • I . ' M1 ' • ,. -- 4 ' 1 • f t • - ci 1 , s Oft--t-e i-e- -- I r•I 1- • IIII 1 , ,--1-• :- 1: • " .1 • • I • , f ' t t! r rt -ef 1-1 1 • t • - 1 , te t 14 i • illi ili PI I - • li 0. •.4 NI I I ll UM 04 1 ili , IAA la INN IlliilikkUL i 0.104 illai IMIIIIIIII_IIIIIIIII Mllifill1111 10 ! b it% AIM lia 1,1 IL hvizoist„....7 llill 4.- ... , . i • • - - • I • -.••-_-* r _ 1 1■;4 . CYCLE' 7 .0 49 Mil . t , • - LT . MisiAl MILE MISHISS 11011111111211111111111111 - - ` - r 4 44 r 1 kill --es-e•-•4-.-0-e ..-......-■-e4-. ---•--- I = MS 11111511111111 I v i -:-• • .,-.- I I • . • • • •••• • A • • • •••14 I 0 A I A 1111.1 all NUM ..e.4 inriescometIMI PI NI 1141111411=1111111• 11111441111111111111111111110 111111111111111111 nrriinin a • 4 MINI clim yeemeloPM111111111111111114111 II -t I-. • IN INSM11. ma MIS 44 . =man ,,, a m MIMI ;01 ram unitior ,- 711V - 3. - Ir.7 MI pm Al TA 4111114111111444 '..q issavizr wui,14;;Ah• Nil Iii, 111111111111111111N1111111111111 moms •• WIN arginup.r.tr-r4-7 Ili MI M II 111.1.110MUNI ; fie ..1 •/A.t= • 77771 IIIIII•II . lb wrmPvinumm AR iq _ SIMMS AIM " 111111111111-•ar?*- . 1 41 Nan 0 limn 400.404111441411110•4*.44 . Ns 0440 Eti l n unnuniandiimmiumm liii um al7MITiiiiiiiiii .: i limn in PI 111111111•11111111111111111114111 - " - maimmilifilii MN MINN 0151111111111111111111 MON Om um WNW 1.1111111111111•1111111115111111 WHIN 40011.0114 ini NO IN111 401 moil in Ej = „arum. NI as ,,, , ail milli WPM* • 111111111111PINI 1111111111111/10/111,111111111111111•111111111111 OMR mg iiiimeRIMIMMINIIIIIRIslumlimmeminlimmS11111esull WM 1;11111111111111111WW1111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111P1111111 ratannumumnuatinummununws ..... .7.... MEM! 1,141W111/1111 0111411111111 M4 +Nis OWIMIIIINIMMIIIII UV 417.1 WIIIIIMinai MOM sIFFEIffii Ian iiinumwerenstutomminom u.1" r Ini V 04 I 'nil PA own III 11 a • .11111111111 NI MINH ON,11 UM ill 111111111111111111111011111111111111112211 ni M it ligallissiu'uourailiTemblusil win i_ , ia 1111 ill _I. SAM alp 111111111111111111111.11111101111 sp. 4. • AMA& mo • 0401414144401441:7=11 41440141004044014 1 ■ 1441441011 0 ie ISM ilk • * ... I. ,--- ,a4........ 1 : 1 1:1i=== . I oili is 4i HSI gefinglimmll asiesil•I . amt. lanai 1111 9112 101 2: icia_ 111 • iliusim • ill • 11110111iiiimaummitsiiiiiii .11 "Ii=g0:::=7:24713071;;;;; INMAN , I Po 41 1.114144 43•31AVIRI;;;;;;ZialiMMilillillp _ .4%101 _ 111 I W iaNIIIWINITIlirliiiiingit illill . lull • 1 as s 1::: iiiStilliiiii.11111111 .4 -4v=====.1:27.923 1:11C,I=Z:gi aall0 'II -- - _1 .. .„.-- p.m _----. : SEM PM Ul _ q 414111140014±110 SI CLUIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIISE111111111 ;II """'"=r47:=11: el 4 '4 0. a AEI _ malim 1111 .. • t •' $ & • 1 int Xs ' - tat '" ' I - i a ill • .... , .• , .._,..._ .III ow •4= t= sr•-• r -- 1-..-« • Jib. as •• / 4 . : • .•••- 1 ••.• .-- • - sr.-. - = • lilla dk* . • _i;. 1 , 1 .... , v .. . _ _ , __ assamt a . , • I - i 1 1 - I [ 0 I # - -*- r 4 . 11 ,.....rw..n.................. t ---*-,--- - r - r - ..., - r - - _.., ' Ira E-- 1 . - - T i - 1 -1. ;'1 ' 444-, ------ 01 --- , IM1 Dui 44 " 4 . : - • - - •••• -7 14 ••••---s- -1- • - • • i •-• . r r--1-- is •-4, ° - I. - - - '-_ - : - *4 -`, ',--; ; -- -.- as - r. • ■ , e- •• ,--...*-- _ r - • , -..-.--. -.. .--.-ers-s---a-ffet-s .-- 0. - - • 1 • ot.,-• Ire • •-••-t . • $I • • • 4 r * ..--re-e- to- . 1 crcte' 44, * t 1 I • 1 T .;_,-,;-,-, • -• , . t .- tet-a4e - il -to-- - -1--o . • t r -- • -.7 " " ' ' ' • • - • : r • 1 • • f. ''' ' ! • = • ' ' - Igallint "T rt ri risiniik... mmu ma k , •Nor ••••••rr-esil NUM ••.......• 4 isoripumni I III Willi i • 1 isadisaam 01•40040 0 6.16111111116 :: - 7 - ~ -- .7. - 7, torm I - :4 1111.1111111111:1 , i - ' • t r ' - ' 4 11111111111111211181111111111111114 ..." ---. so. • • • • • •-• ••ii U $ I I 6 5 0 I MULTIPLES OF RATED amine/ft MULTIPLES OF RATED CURRENT FA MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS CHARACTERISTIC TRIPPING CURVES I MULTIPLES OF RATED CURRENT APRIL, 1981 MULTIPLES OF RATED CURRENT All curves available on tissue stock 43 a set for coordination studies 6 SOURRE fl COMPRNY • �4 4 a• 7 a w . i i w.•A I A A 1 A AIM wlwww ■ ■r- ,wwwwwwwwww.www■ rrwwwwwwwrwwww• u• w w ■ El /�/a " .'3L.i.:. t ► 44 . ;Jilin C rr w iiwww • NI NUN ' •'-rl its::: a ..Mw.iLY ^ ':.1 R wnlor nr�lwlwww�*�! R Rs no m mow Ell III II I I•1 - s.wMw111 1 1 ri L: "`w " r►.w " iWIII111 1 111 w Rww1 I www n nr, twwrsw wwwwM Ir w 1 Ut ow• RR anal i tiw..w.wrwr,.wrwww lw rwwww r wlw11 t Nov vow o WINNiNW .sr r MI A►YACN i IMP P Pi M ` N RIlIiAU�RA >f111 VIII U U I1 UTAUII M MHIIIIIIIIIi w� 1 ors= w NI 1 ,w. � IP111h1IIftitIII l l Stall Vile , 1l f . II 1 a �>4!. O OEUAIIlINiA�iwAi t Rl RaI w � w ww �'wrl11• I 1:.11111.Zi1 . ■iii C C:- TT 'aIA 1111_ i3l:11,1iii11u% % l'il!► i iii ;iiiiIiiii ; ;iiil - bi . 2311 = =3""3 r.ww�ri• H-t-tH1 w11 w . b wA i is I IN 1� ��a•r N 1111i1111i NI i i A aUNI lg31M0. I �_ { i - -.lwn ow - Z- - - - - -a q?. _ � . _ . s ;w _. �� null i izi I I - i • •t s sisal ' 8i�fiiin \ r , !IiI ! !llM!'J'JIi!!I� _ , 1 i illioi ( Mims I I to ' ' • al a an so - (L M - � � - - - - ._ _'- • • - : i mo t. 1 " i. 1 I .,rr.1 . . ! -it.- t t. Q I P PI I . " wrair.r_lrrw_r ~ iiii ! ! I ao i w w J I/4 l ~ i ia iilii .i.i►, I I. worm N laila " " , �. r ' r r ."' ......-”..-1,- -I, a I r r I , Y amiss 7 T T" � ,--,,----4- t ir* r C C CI. •• ! L ' . t ' I INN Mho . ...w....rr i • "f i i ■1lIIIIIIINNI f ... i fill I II II N NN w, e . . • , .•••• •i s s A I I I I I I I III 4 4 44• 7 • w ••• •••1 a A A 1 A Wit AI I gm w swe ..s4 mom me owanw le " wwww Fq wwwwlY'rr -r . , -_ . U(F :. ., -. .u. l ,,, „onus WI WWI ca lltwwars4l ,:. . Tt1M • lNCr .3l0• III , M MI I Ill N 19 W r•wrwwww min www■ 000.11.1811111 MI wwwwwww ' MAKER • w ww www ■ tE4 III rwwrwl NOUN! i.1R1111 11 1r t inn a1�wwiwu!l,.,llwsias. •. A'O'" U ANl1 IIIUUI4 Il�� 1111111111111111141 i i• a: " "''�i l.aalw+�lllaa� i.. ,,,,Null It a te .. . " 111111111111111111111110111111111 , wW ow WIN a n .•4 I ltww � ara aue W I r. w I M M IrU whew ur.wwl.nl wrw•wwwr toI FIgMw m: awwwnw ►wwwewlwU Uawww+wU..wwnrlarWwsnn ao NINA. ENC.111111111111101111111111N111 NINN+ll11u MUM IMMOII I t MUM 0: � '; 11f�AAlllwlla1 /1 R1 „, 1. IN aww w. r ; irar�i �wan ' � w .� � r•�. mssawwl�twllw men sermlcllle we i i 111111111111 i 111 'r 1t111INION EI MNlt##1 II 11111 lri• lilosnumunsmin � unnu 11111 113 IIIIIIIllAII1I . -' '. • II - 90 il .1 w ' ? r Aiout t infra A11 .0 11111 \+.7 Mtw A ► - - - .. „lwrw IMP U • " � ..wI .lw.lw.. .'p w ww■ Will w wl•lell ar �lt1 .1 .1 to =I 11;11111111 er u N oisome' '' ' "- . 1 11111 1 4l!!Rerl!rrl • ,' 1llere m.r1 ll1R!l R9/V „rwwa.awwr , .' , rl .w•!. r rMIswrrrrsrr w •t. _ww. m M1 :- ::' AR �w�l w�Rlw41. AUII t :"'• 3xialw /.■ /slaw wleslS 1 A11 lla!ta1 Ii,11,. 111111 I1 r . 1111 Ail 1.1.4 I0i 1 Ilil e rr ,ia4 t"" i. �Iiilt r . ' : I I r r- .. iii wi �aai1Miii, x ;- :a. :;.p.:. ...... e1.4 a:,: -: :::::*".1111141119:21n1 : !1 . 16 1 sss>IS1_ . sul Mai lawn Ir IRI null IIII riii - 31 is A I t R� .iii %i �p1i .;: "1- ,I1 111 111111111 1 OH lir ....r.-t Watlit iiiils=awl`riiA f wt aa _O al mom= 0 *4,, iimmiimmi ■_1 \I ww fw..i . .. : ' rt . r• r � 11i t1'Ili'' li' III _ >>+�r •.a•wi.rr...Lr,w.iii,rai.ra i la w. �_..•.. ,._.r rtriiirimwritiwlias'r•waia r m.'s! I .... " • . rli a 1 i L i Ii1i t : : : - t r i1t r �Re .� I ' w•w -e.r . w cr 'j; r c I r a a. m 4 I N :1 1"i I j r ` ' - 1 ay' ' � I l cyjg,: ' . : - ! -.. f - -_ ; -- t r NW ow amma WNW rA mil Ini is11.11iiii .1 �-T-�-• NIMf_I11M r ! , i . ! i _ . � ." : � T [ - _ i _ ! • MINI a Wile ... , `. . s • • • ••, it A 1 , 1 1 1111 H-t-tH1 APRIL, 1967 0 w a D MULTIPLES OF RATIO CURRENT MULTIPLES OF RATEQ CURREN T FA MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS CHARACTERISTIC TRIPPING CURVES 0 a SOURRE D COMPANY MULTIPLES OF RATIO CURRENT 650 MUI.TIF4ES OF RATE() CURRENT All curves available on tissue stock as a set for comwiination studies Vrr NM li wtt w wed twtwII NwtiffNl ■ ■�� UM N! • Mel= M +. N Nis > >N ' 'ilt'.atJ t TAM 0 00(k.30. um , IItI tl UI � 1 11111111111111111111111 1 VI N 1�� ■ ■1U111IIIU at PA*. I I IMMIX * * F i "� OO ■ ■ II 1,_ L L ` `• . . ■ ■ W WIM/111 w1 M M� .r IN1111 111111 * *R M MIS w 1tN HOININ C IN' l �lIPOI N ls1 sartim 1 m e 1 t t t NI I I UiU U R s as11�1�1wrimmisr o lNt�te 1 1tt•14lNlq 11 1111811111111111111111111 ; I�t • w, � = = .• , - 1 4 4 4•., : • , -t -- t . t � -! - -- t - -r .� .s a a . . t.._ T Ti i �.. �..�...+:.._.:.L.. _ tr.... N . . .. .. IEI I I ' • a * *Au r Edit r ; w ' ' _ UP u umuni. a a.i ■ ■ u uu . . , . ett . 1 I >IIIt MII I I : :.. I1 I II Mria "'"C'." 4 4�.�, . 11 I 33 ; Ill a ; _ j s slit • p :t. Y • ft t:f _. j s: s sett r °' IN 3 t s = s r e l t, a �: =s :' z z • 1 1 1111 t i a_• •. _ _ • G50 0 • 4 r MULTIPLE! OF RACED CURRENT • • •••••! ! R w t RiRNNti MULTIP315 Of RAM CURRENT FA MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS CHARACTERISTIC TRIPPING CURVES All curves available on ti ;sue S494k as a Set for coordination studies SQUARE n COMPANY 4187 CPS ?OM APRIL, 1087 Prinlad in USA • FA. PC, Fl 0M I/0 13 VC4 Series t VC 100PA 3 a KA, KM, KC, Kl 04400 keme 1.3 VC4 Series I VC2SOKA3 3 A KA, KH, KC, KI 264). 3SO fteitil allnill VC4 Semi 1 VC250KA35 1 a tA. U4. 04 2S0.3SO kt rrtr 1:3 23 VC4 S.M. VC4 Wu t 1 VC400LA3S 1 A LA. U4, 04 02/0300 Semi 1.0 MaM20111110111 1.4 vC+oaw A LA, U4,04 02/0•$00 kemt IA U. La. LX. LXI 100400 i01M 330 VC400L S ' 1 a tA. LN, 04 7 Cu 23 VC4 w 14 VC400tA7 I. • LC, U, LL LX, LX1 04.300 *me $.OS VC4 SeMS 1,4 VC60003 S • LC U. L. LX. LXI 12.500 ktkni NA. NC, NU, HX VC4 SMes 2 • VC6001.US 4 _ A LC. U. L6. LX. LXI S00750Ittm4 N NC, N6, NK VC4FT of VCIC 1 VC6001t7 4 • 6462.1.4.62 4.300 kami VC4 SeM! MN n vC2SO4463 VC8SOM63S ono • • i � ME2. MX2 250350 Keene — VC. Sues MS4, MX4 024400 kern 22 VC4 Sem VC40O046S g a M64, MX4 rar k et ni e 21 V" F e I VC400M47 I • 042, MX 02/0400 scm4 14 VC4 Wes 2 VC60OMAS 2 a' MA, MH, Ma, MX 400 kt Cu It VC4 FT et 2 VC600MA7 2 • NA, NC, Na. NX 02/0400 km(M 3.3 VC41Mes 4 VC I20OM§ 4 • NA, NC, NQ, NX 750 tlettie 30 Yro4 PT of vci 4 VC 1100N61 4 A This. PNP Pei PXP, 01/0 4 OO k bN • 1 6 vetcooPAa a Pi O O ICY . V %% « • VCt300PA7 t • PA, Mt, PL PC 04.14 Cu L4 VC4 km 1 CVC IOWA 3 a KA. KC, Kt 03/0=X4 Moslem 1:4 VC4 Wei 1 CVC160KA3 3 a X04 11/0300 Yard Cu 1,3 VCS 1 CVG00LA3 1 • 70 1$0 .1/0300 WO Cu 1:3 23 VC4 S.M. VC4 Wu t 1 CVC4001L3 � CVC400LAa 1 • • IA. • 04 140400 Morn) cu 1 3 _ 1$0400 hood! Cu 1.4 VC4 beta 1 cvC4001u 1 • IA U. La. LX. LXI 100400 i01M 330 VC4 MOH ' 1 CVC4000S I A M64, 1,4X4 11/04OOMmtCu 14 VC4Ssntt , I CVC400M64 _ 1 a MA, MIL Me, MX 260.604 seine Cu 1,4 VC4 Nees S CVC400MA4 1 • NA. NC, NU, HX e1J0400 itrrni Cu 33 VC4 $4M! 4 _ CVC 1100NL4 4 A N NC, N6, NK 400750 Soli Cu 3 i VC4 1104. 4 CVC►1001417 Each Is UL Ifs ed (pet UL4513A) for copper wire on OFF . n. of lh ire it br • k : r when the OFF en. y. UL Os CO for use is the OAD en on the U ;t ere a A %leaklt R W' Nem4er M watt 4 W filmset cosiog NWnDi Lug � t K4 ty Rumen A PI PAC! Per KA FAL FM- 'CI, 14.100 1 Cu POC6FAe 1. ♦ 1 5+100 POC3FA? I Z ♦ VIP.. Kel, Kiel 70 1$0 54 14.4 Cu PQC6KA4 1 ? ♦ ._ 7 ZS? 2•!14 Cu 1.412.24 Cu pOC7KA20 1 3 _ 4 UL. Ult. Q4L 128.400 6.412.210 Cu I ?•114.4 Cu POC61A20 PDCl2LA4 1 I 2 23 123 1254'"' 7.414.2/0 Cu t• =2.250 POC4LA250 I 2 0 ♦ MAL. M 1.. MEI_ MXL 125• IMO 6.412.2/0 Cu 12.414.4 Cu POC6MA20 POC 12MA4 I I 0 0 0 0 e UL Listed Field Installable VERSAtiletu Lug Kits &Woo VEASAMe System Range Aluminum Compression Lug Khs N Can *Wen Lut1 Kits FAl Chesil steelier With Twee PQC6FA6 04444 MAL Cuctid Breaker Wnn Three P0C6MA20 Installed tknension A (Nf VERB IMP May ten pat Kit Number A not tot use tiv,lh 1•LWE n'0 n.t4 crew: Creaky $ ; when using tu+e suarseo mot. increased cross sect:or4 area may cause -aauru,m hue We 0 be rerA,CtO Lug Per Kit Price Per Kit • UN e1Mntite ; • wirer line IPpy It Doe Outworn mel mew ceAguetoni • PI , POI/ am PXP (!Quire leme641 pleb la moweing kep of My type Power Distribution Connectors for Circuit Ureakera —for Field Replacement of Mechanical Lugs Can be used for multiple load connections on one breaker, Use In place of standard distribution blocks to save apace and time, Field installable kits, including lin plated aluminum connectors and all necessary mounting hardware are available for Square 0 FA, KA, LA, 04, MA, ME and MX molded cue circuit breakere, CVCIMPA CVCeOOLAe VC1uc0Nls Circuit Breakers Molded Case --- Lugs Crimp fug elle slut eirttil beaker I A' See Table Esfreemity Molded Lugs 1 , I A' Se• TMWe POCVAO p006xA4 POC 12LA4 Class 690 VOA:43 AT CVO:0044AG ♦ See Nest (tatest VERSA-CRIMP arq 1 L 4+E rs 'e;rstered Trademarks of Square 0 Company YERSAkte.s a Truerzars :t 57,:. art 0 Company 10-31 To Order specify; Catalog Number MP AMA • • Class Number • Type Number Claw 'type Ciro111 rNk.i or ,. ' MI u,4 Complete 1111 does brides. not Include Inaudek itentard Shaft 101 ppy i + Standard miss i t Di! IP 0 - . 1 I 5 1 WI Wllh Ciro111 rNk.i or ,. ' Poles Frame s loo 0 PrIN , IYPs Nee Piss Mkt OJt. 0 71,100 LOI $ H. 11 t. 4 1 Si . $'/htdh LOO 1 113. •'11J0h i PAL.. !'CL, PHI , 14 ` 100 LN I SI. 11 0 ' LN4 N. 4'141 U* 0f. /'lies KU. KCL KHL 24 460 LP1 IL •'/a11 LP4 40. •'I+41 LP3 f7. •' /alike LN 041. 4.0 400 LA1 101. O.4.10' /i LR4 107, 001•41'h 0' handles we lot wee 44 akwil brsaken MIL MXL 44 000 LT1 101, 7 LT4 101, 7,'a 4Vh not MAL. MHL 24 1000 LT1 101. 7+V14.114 LT4 101. 7 QIw pUgn Prk4 Single Pot* Doubt* Throw .....11L....... Doubt* Poe Doubts Throw 93. 'type L Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanisms The "type L door mounted, variable depth operating mechanisms listed below are complete kits featuring heavy duty, all metal construction with trip indication. All of the operating mechanisms can be padlocked in the °OFF* position when the enclosure door Is open. The handle assemblies can be locked 'OFF' with up to three padlocks which also locks the door closed, The 3- handle accepts one padlock. Complete Kits t i Operating Mechanisn ^S Disconnect Switches Door Mounted Operating Mechanisms For Square D Circuit Breakers t Mounting dsptlt msawnd hen diva l breaker mowing surface tamwol pM►M) 10 OWalde sA sndoaws doe 411 How To Orders • Order circvsl breaker Iron Peges 5.7 - D CP1 A door drilling template Is supplied with each kit to ease Installation. The complete kits are rated for installation, into NEMA 1, 3R and 12 enclosures, They Include a handle asembty, operating mechanism and shaft assembly. Complete installation instructions are included with each kit. Electrical interlock Kits - Class 9989 Optional accessory for use with 9421 L operating mechanisms. NOTE; Not use4 wish 04, use bete instaaetk Onto breaker In1Of1444 (rand on page 5 ' 11 . Discount Schedule Class 9421 5 -59 To Order Specify; Catalog Number _ it Class Number e Type Number Class Type 1 9421 l I L16 I wll11 �L i VIII�'w —• �111 arm beaker i y (BPS! 1 ii i— i -T. tai {P 3.4 t 4'.lii.4 tong f OIKwA � yy Omit araka or - At i rime rn We NO U UN 1111111111111 .. t FAL FCL. Fit a 100 apt MOM em in 0111 a 7f, 100 1143 I3 11, UN 171, 1.07 130 SWOON UM It Is/p/1 L$IR Ili, ` .:: Boo im 1140 � i ma. sat In Iwo ��1'''I ?M�"'1 _,'_ t l ? »�1Zt'11 .:_ •, mirsil ' NM 3'11.441 w41r tMSe skew lit711 br,Af era W' �. i IIPZIIIIIIMEW1111111=111173101111F1111 71 MI 71 W W'!'il_ I r I► 7I � t .r, r leri 74r '[ ►' !J Use With 3pesial 3" version arm beaker i y (BPS! 1 ii i— i -T. tai {P 3.4 r MEMi14,1 losi+W01 lQiw Kum g �y� El NO OA w, 1111111111111 ra SSC FAL FCL. Fit a 100 1121111311MICEMICIPEI em in KAL Act. KNL a 150 IIMI 11312111111 LC43 !4 tat., OIL. Q'L 1.3 400 M � 41- ci recor e g o br u .4, 4.4 au+t playas MEL, ,,x,, a Boo im 1140 3s. incami ma. sat In Iwo Operating Mechanisms & Disconnect Switches Door Mounted Operatir., Aechanisms For Square D Circuit L .akers Class 9421 'type L Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanisms The Type L door mounted, variable depth operating mechanisms listed below are component parts kits featuring heavy duty, all metal construction with trip Indication, All of the operating mechanisms can be padlocked In the'0FF" position when the enclosure door is open, The handle assemblies can be locked 'OFF' with up to three padlocks which also locks the door closed. The 3" handle accepts Component Parts T Moorland depth nre.wed from circuit Mesita motoring surface (control pans() $0 outdo. os endoewe door in inches, NEMA 3 and 4 Handle Assemblies* * Quo to the eHecis of gasketing, NEMA 3 and 4 handle assemblies are NOT Uip indicating. 5 -60 L CP1 one padlock. A door drilling template Is supplied with each kit to ease Installation. The component parts kits are rated for installation Into NEMA 1, 3, 3R, 4 and 12 enclosures. 'All NEMA 1, 3, 3R, 4 and 12 handle assemblies are painted. The handle is flat black and the base ring is silver. Complete installation instructions are included with each kit. IN Style Operating Mechanisms How To Order: Discount Schedule fl Use with Circuit 9re w Inaaru ryPe ing Mechaivon undudestockout gstension shah r Type Price g Pric leni Pnce " ra $30.00 1.(31 530.00 roam em I1Z.00 31.00 1540 Operating Mechanisms & Disconnect Switches Door Mounted Operatir., Aechanisms For Square D Circuit L .akers Class 9421 'type L Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanisms The Type L door mounted, variable depth operating mechanisms listed below are component parts kits featuring heavy duty, all metal construction with trip Indication, All of the operating mechanisms can be padlocked In the'0FF" position when the enclosure door is open, The handle assemblies can be locked 'OFF' with up to three padlocks which also locks the door closed. The 3" handle accepts Component Parts T Moorland depth nre.wed from circuit Mesita motoring surface (control pans() $0 outdo. os endoewe door in inches, NEMA 3 and 4 Handle Assemblies* * Quo to the eHecis of gasketing, NEMA 3 and 4 handle assemblies are NOT Uip indicating. 5 -60 L CP1 one padlock. A door drilling template Is supplied with each kit to ease Installation. The component parts kits are rated for installation Into NEMA 1, 3, 3R, 4 and 12 enclosures. 'All NEMA 1, 3, 3R, 4 and 12 handle assemblies are painted. The handle is flat black and the base ring is silver. Complete installation instructions are included with each kit. IN Style Operating Mechanisms How To Order: Discount Schedule fl Qi Iisf 11211 Shah LINO ,_ •..__� _— MstJJnq PO 9421 I, * H . 64 14 149 !4 260 ¢Q 140 530 9421 9421 1 :HA 92 LW 140 !at 265 140 >i4 533 159 )1.? 1.T 28 552 Outline Dimensions And General Location information For FAL, FCL, FHL, KAL, KCL, KHL Circuit Breakers and Circuit Interrupters Operating Mechaniste - lc Disconnect Switches Door Mounted Operating Mechanisms ror Square D Circuit Breakers Dimensions 348 M1tiIMUM 83 (eoTH 4 1 HINGE OR OP DO Figure I Panel Drilling For PAL, FRC, FHC Circuit breaker And Operating Mechanism C00360.110 Figure 3 Panel Drilling For KAC, KCC, KHC Circuit Breaker and Operating Mechanism 00 178 MINIMUM TO WALL On ADEQUATE R WARE 1NG SPACE TO LUG SURFACE SIZE WHEN ID MAXIMUM w E 1 TO STANDARD W09, ARTICLE 430.10. MAXIMUM DOOR THICKNESS t Mounting depth measwed horn circwt breaker mountwg surface (Cot lid pa( to Outstle Of enctoswe floor. — TI 0 0 O 0�• �l� Ht MOUNTING DEPTH Fisure 2 Side Viow Class 9421 Dud woollens. : II nle eri 5 -61 ig Operating MechaniPms & Disconnect Switches Door Mounted Operatin .Mechanisms For Square D Circuit L. .,akers Dimensions Class 9421 5 -62 Door Drilling for 9421 L dncioeure Door Drilling Electrical Interlock — FA, KA Figure 2 disotriai Interlock Location Owl Dimensions: D Cam TA* 5h t La+Wh H• $tandatd Shaft H• W g Shah Min. Mac Mint. Mas. $421 LL1,t.RI,t.R4 LoH• gat too aft 271) at i 50 " je 545 Outline Dimensions And General Location Information For LAL, LHL, GC Circuit Breakers and Circuit Interrupters 3.00 f 52 2.00 (4) 01244 MOOCH 111 D 0.00 $MUM 154 MTh MOM 1,1e HINGE DM As arawirra. SAO tai (Th Operating Mechanism& Disconnect Switches Door Mounted Operating Mechanisms For Square D Circuit Breakers Dimensions MINIMUM TO WALL OR BARRIER TO INSURE AOEOUATE WIRE BENDII SPACE ALUG M WIRE SI EN IS USED WITH STANDARD LUGS. REFER TO NEO ARTICLE 43010. 41140 ?AP t e1 Figure 1 Panel Drilling For Circuit Breaker And Operating Mechanism Figure 3 electrical interlock Location MAXIMUM DOOR THICKNRU t Mounting depth miaswed Iron cucwt (weaker mounting surface (control panel) to outside or enc oswe door. Dual Dimensions. Inches MdllmetetS Hf "MOUNTING DEPTH Figure 2 Side View Class 9421 r 5 -63 C4ie 7ypa shollionzio — Pali AC .. 50 a 50 Ht tihth Ay M it e. MtM. Atin Amax ea21 UM, LTI, LT4 Lott • L 102 LII 112 11111 2e5 � let aid US Clair 7�froe k CaContacts Canticl A; AC .. 50 a 50 Ht DC Wits Inductive U% Power Paola Resistive Power Iaga Volta Industi(1v and Resistive Maxi Weak Continuous Continuous Carrying Amperes Mahe and tkeah ATpe /ei m oo* Coming Mahe and Sleek mopes Continuous Molina Mimes AMIN'i% YA AmperN 1M - -*-- -� Stool Throw Double ME* R�7 A ®23 SPOT NV. i N.G. .. 15 15 15 15 IO1RNt1! 115 b 0 2•0 O; 0 5 002 15 15 Rag GB33 OP$T DPOT a N.O. a rI C• 30 Is 6.5 3 1.5 C a 10 10 10 0000 1 0000 11$ 230 400 .�._ 1.0 o.3 0.1 0 0.1 .... 0000 it) Operating Mechanisms & Disconnect Switches Door Mounted Operatin, lechanisms For Square D Circuit E pikers Dimensions Class 9421 Outline Dimensions And General Location Information For MAL, MEL, MHL, MXL Circuit Breakers and'Circuit interrupters 5 -64 Cifeug MAL Milt, MIL. MU electrical interlock Information Maximum Current Ratings sre NlNIMUU 1O WALL OR WOW, tO tMU I AOEOUA1E swum isurOtqd W M� p NEC AAtrt:*. 4 3O IA to Figure 1 Panel Drilling For Circuit Breaker And Operating Mechanism Figure 2 814. View t Mounting depth measured from circuit tuna N e ountinp surface f weal p$MI) to outside of enclosure tiepin inches, pommy. s ett switch*, ntae t: allowing use on cira1$I �sitee po aniy. sac i $t CQ I nt n tir W a u 0 ae Q c anede ee (I polarity. and Two wisp Mot mo O a a us contain aiC sat$ WOW. Dual Dimensions: Inches Millimeters 1J Fuse Blocks General Information FUSE BLOCK SELECTION The following guidelines should help to simplify the selection of proper fuse blocks: 1. Determine the system voltage Since fuses are selected on the basis of system voltage, fuse blocks are selected to match the voltage rating of the fuse. 2. Determine the design short- circuit current Available and/or design short-circuit current is an important consideration when determining the class of fuse and fuse blocks to use. If available short- circuit current cannot be determined, or if it will vary with equipment location, select fuses with a 200,000 ampere interrupting rating (A.I.R.) and mating fuse blocks with a withstand rating of 200,000 amperes for maximum safety. Class H fuse blocks will accept Class H or K5 fuses (which have an interrupting rating of up to 50,000 amperes) and Class R fuses (which have a 200,000 AIR.). To prevent the possibility of inserting a fuse with the incorrect interrupting rating, the use of Class R fuse blocks Is recommended for use With Class R fuses. Use Class H fuse blocks with Class H or K5 fuses. These fuse blocks are dimensionally the same, but the Class R fuse blocks incorporate a rejection feature which allows only Class R fuses to be inserted. 3. Determine the type and ampere rating of the fuse to be used In addition to voltage and Interrupting rating, as discussed above, the fuse's ampere rating, opening characteristics (fast- acting or time-delay) and size are other important consider- ations in fuse selection. Once the fuse type is selected, the mating fuse block can be chosen. Fuse blocks are available in 30, 60,100, 200, 400 and 600 amp ratings, and may be used with a fuse rated at the corresponding amperage rating or below. For example, a fuse block rated at 30 amperes may be used with a fuse rated from 0 to 30 amperes. 4. Determine if NEC, CSA, UL or other requirements are applicable • It fuse blocks will be installed in equipment to be submitted for agency approval, the requirements should be obtained from the approving agency in advance of fuse and fuse block selection. Littelfuse' POWR•BARO "Products 5. Select the type of wire termination A choice of three types of wire termination is available: a) Screw*— for use with spade lugs or ring terminals. b) Screw with pressure plate* -- for use with solid or stranded wire without terminal. Recommended where vibration will be a factor. . c) Box lug —• the most durable. For use with all types of solid wire and Class B and Class C stranded wire. Not for use with welding cable or other rape•strandod conductors. * 1/4" Quick connect terminals rated for up to 20A ate available on the midget and Class CC fuse blocks. ii Pressure Plata (P) ( S Screw 6. Decide on the number of poles in each block The number of poles for each sot of fuses is determined by the characteristics of the circuit. Whether to gang the fuse blocks Into long strips will be determined by the available space and by the type of wire being used. 7. Determine If fuse clips need to be reinforced Fuse clips may have a tendency to lose some of their tension over a period of time. This may be prevented by specifying reinforced fuse clips. Reinforced dips are standard on certain fuse blocks (see individual product pages). Ordering Information The Uttelluse fuse block part number consists of 5 or 6 components, as shown below and in the individual fuse block data tables. ' ,Q„ BDERING INIMATIOA For all Class R, H, J, T and 15, 20 & 60A Class G Fuse Blocks: For all Class CC, Midget and 30A Class G Fuse Blocks: EN 600 ElIBEGI a fi d N fi d Sox (C) fi 0 8 fi T3 U 0 Amp Rating No. of Poles Cobb() Number Connector type (Add suffix shown) Maximum Wire Size km w Pressure Plate Box Lug I LR25030.1 SR [C t. CR S s P * #10 CU 30 M 1.0250304 R • I. SR R PR PR CR C ■ us CU•AL �. LR25060.1 CR S S. 00 CU 60 rut C 7� LR25060.2 8 S CR C • #2 CU.AL •■■•NlJ R25100.1 • 1000 100 cv 025100.2 C #2/0 CU-AL 200 1 1.025100,3 C 200 1 3 L1325200.1 1825200.3 • . C C 250 MCM CU-AL 400 1 3 025400 1 LR25409•3 LLH2S 0;9 CR CR (2) 350 MCM CU-AL 600 3 1.025600.3 C (2) 500 MCM CU-AL Amp Rating No. of Poles Catalog Number Connector Type (Add suffix shown) Maximum Wire Size scam PreseuN Plate Bo• Lug I LR60030.1 SR PR CR Sit P• #10 CU 30 M 060030.2 1.11600 0• SR SR PR PR CR CR C • #6 CU•AL �. '60060.1 CR S #10 CU 60 M M' LR60060.2 LR60060• 8 S CR CR C • #2 CU•AL •■■•NlJ R60100.1 • 000 100 ca R60100.2 C #2/0 CU.AL 200 1 LR60100.3 C 200 3 LR6020. • . C 250 MCM CU AL 400 I 3 LR60400.1 LR60400.3 LLH2S 0;9 CR CR (2) 350 MCM CU AL 600 3 R6060. C (2) 500 MCM CU -AL Amp Rating No. of Poles Calalog Number Connector Type Add suffix shown Maximum Wire elze genes pmuur• Asia Box Lug I LH25030.1 H CI.1 H S a P• N t O CU 30 1M u 1..14250304 o� C • #!e CU.AL �. Iv ..t.1 C S•N10CU 60 M G7 LH25060.2 Lt 5Q60.3 8 S C C C • 02 CU.AL •■■•NlJ LH 25100.1 0 0 100 N !1 U425100.2 C #210 CU.AL 200 1 1.1426200.1 C 250 MCM CU•AL. 400 1 • . j (2) 350 MCM CU.AL 600 3 LLH2S 0;9 C (2) 600 MCM CU.AL Amp Rating No, of Poles Catalog Number Connector Type (Add suffix shown) Maximum Mrs Size sanre ►,,saws Muls sox Lug I L1460030.1� H CI.1 H 8f►P•111 001 1M u U46009042 1 C • 16 CU.AL �. 8 ■ 610 CU 60 M G7 1.146050.2 0060.3 0 C .1/2 CU•At. •■■•NlJ LN 60100.1 100 1.1460100.2 C N210 CU•AL 200 1 3 60200.1 1.1460200.3 250 MCM CU•AL 400 1 1.1460400.1 C (2) 950 MCM CU.AL 600 3 R �.3 C (2) 500 MCM CU•AL Class H /K5 and R Fu. : Blocks 250 and 600 Volt 4 E t ; �1 .3.. 1. 1' Class H 250V Note: Reinforcing springs standard on all Class H fuse blocks 100 amperes and above, Class R 250V Note: Reinforcing springs standard on all Class R fuse blocks. s Littelfuse POWR-6ARD'" Products SPECIFICATIONS Voltage Rating: 250 Volts; 600 Volts Ampere Ratings: 0 -- 600 amperes Approvals: UL Listed (File No. E14721) CSA Certified (File No. LR73091) RECOMMENDED FUSES Class H Blocks Class R Blocks 250V 600V 250V 600V RL RL K R LNNR KLSA LLNRK LLSRK $DSR Class H fuse blocks are for use with Class H/K5 fuses, which have an interrupting rating of up to 50,000 amperes. When higher Interrupting ratings are required, use Class R fuses (200,000 A.I.R.) and Class R fuse blocks. Class R fuse blocks are dimensionally the same as Class H blocks, but incorporate a rejection feature which allows only Class H fuses to be in. sorted. FEA TURES EENEFITS" Class H and Class R fuse blocks feature a one-piece fuse clip design for positive electrical contact and minimum heat rise, Side barriers provide Isolation between poles. Bases on most blocks are of molded phenolic or thermoplastic, UL rated at 150° C. . Class H 600Vs Note: Reinforcing springs standard on all Class H fuse blocks 100 amperes and above, Class R 600V Note: Reinforcing springs standard on all Class R fuse blocks. 73 1 i,. w D+m.ntiwtS • Fig.2 yv Nee A 9 C KPi0001 F _ 010001 X0 011001 2.00 011001 4' 030003 50 030001 r itet f"'" RRM s.e nr, .eiea 'waft .'R 010003 KP10001 050001 3.34 0350013 0100020 500 211 0100023 500 KPI5001 3.50 3.13 KP20001 4.11 3. K1 iE 5.10 8 2 3.75 2 4 030001 4.31 3.75 KFs0001 S e3 7s 075001 P100001 3.50 50 4 02. 24or4tO - 24V A Sarno As pots 010011 50 01001 01001 KPi0001 100 010001 4 011001 110 011001 4' 02. 24or4tO - 24V A 'gem Some as p 01003 50 00001 01001 KPiOOD3 100 010001 010001 KP110D3 150 015001 4' 030003 300 030001 030001 010003 $00 050001 K1/36001 02. 24or4tO - 24V 1* %.% Li Dimensions p 01001 10 01001 KP7i023 010002 100 010001 KP100033 011001 150 015001 Kill 50023 KP30001 OC 030001 AMOMOM 020.2034301410 - 115V w w IA pm. 050010 50 KP7501 KP7i023 0100070 100 1015001 KP100033 0150020 150 020001 Kill 50023 0200020 200 KP21001 KP210023 0300020 300 K1/36001 0350013 0100020 500 050001 0100023 V. w M j I Pnce 010013 50 05001 50 to 500A 50 to 500 50 to 1504 20010 1000 KP7i023 75 07501 KP100033 100 010001 Kill 50023 110 015001 4 KP210023 200 KP21001 0350013 350 036001 0100023 500 050001 Type Use On TySiteg (VA) U40 On 1, i �K (VA) Fuse SO ^ - Price API AP2 AP3 AP4 2510 350A 2510 350 25 to 150 200 to 750 50 to 500A 50 to 500 50 to 1504 20010 1000 r a °h: 1 -'b' a ' i4 1 -' /0 a /. 1•'A' I' /: 3, Control Power Transfort -- Irs Type KF and Fusing Options Class 9070 9-4 'type KF (With Top Mounted Fuse Block) The 1jpe KF transformer will help panelbuilders and machinery OEMs comply with the revised UL standard 5013 and NEC 450. The primary fuse clips accommodate Class CC time delay, rejection type fuses. The secondary use clips use a midget (1.5" X 13132") fuse, The 'Type KF frees up space, reduces labor and additional cost associated with purchasing, stocking and Installing separate fuse blocks. (moo V 01 a 240/4110.120V 50/10 H2 D13.1201'140 -14V Tranalormet with type APi Ttar4lomter with Type AP2 Secondary Fuse Protection Kita *t 03 -120V A Separately mounted Class 9080 Type PFI fuse blocks can De t4e0 eidl lamer VA ta4 @s. t See Pages 3.17. 3.18 and 12-12 tot fuse blocks suitable tot pninery ;selection. * Use AP4 Kit lot 9070 K150 018.019.020 and 032. Tringortnet frith Type AP3 (AI TYpe AP4) Type KFiS001 DI :10O -120V • neon Wailed 1Ioaldw Fusing 01.2401410 -11OV 11941 X$00101! 50 PM. $10001112 100 'S K11001511 150 r ^ Ib4s4 7 luno pips Io 0000modale one I.5' X Other fusing options are available to meet specific fusing requirements. For more information, please have your local Square D Sales Office contact the Square 0 Factory. 4, See Digest (latest version) for pricing. CATALOG ........... NUMBER RK RATING VOLTS C BRTIF I• CATION CATALOG NUMBER AMPERE RATING VOLTS CB�PT' CATION CATALOG NUMBER AMPERE RATING VOLTS !_ C CAT GOL%1. COL 14. 00L t4 GOLSI. G0 L PS. I GOL'A• GOLYi. COL% 62mA 100mA 1Z5mA 167mA • 250 250 250 250 GOLY. GOt.I COL ti. GOL1 700mA 750mA 500mA IA 2R: for• GOL9 GOL91M G0L4 GQL$ 3A ' 3.2A 4A 6A 200mA 250m A 300mA 375mA 250 250 250 250 GOLI N GOL'1' // GOU !li GOLI Y. 1.2A • � 1.25A 1,5A 1,6A 250 250 250 250 GQL6 GQL6' /� GOL7 0016 6A 6.25A 7A 6A ,_. 250 250 250 ' 250 ., • Co ri. 00L ''A GOL VI. CATALOG NUMBER Csot.•V' /•. GOL•V'A• GOL•V'4 COL•'/ GOL•V iri1a, OOL•V'A. GOL•V Y■ QOL.V V. 400mA 500mA 600mA 250 250 250 VOLTS 250 250 250 250 250 2:0 250 250 250 0 0 0 tit" Q p 0 O O. O C O Q O 0 f N N wm N N1 Cd YIP 1M M�•1#► Vf Cd trt V) UP UP V1 Q N N N N ; N N N N N !NIP N 1 1 1 I CERT1Fi• CATION I i I I 1 1 i 1 i 1 1 'GOL2 CCU Vs GOl2 Ya 2A 2.5A VIA 250 250 l 2S0 VOLTS 250 250 259 c 2.0 250 259 Zia 250 250 250 250 1 1 1 CERTIFI. CATION 1 1 1 1 ( I 1 . 1 I I . 1 I GOUO GOL12 U 6 GQ CATALOG NUMBER GOLN3 •',OL•VZ Y'. COL•V+ � GOL•/5 COl•Va GGl•v6 /4 cr,va GOt..V3 GOL•V10 GQL•V12 GCI. / 1: 10A 12A 151 AMPERE RATING 3A 3,244 4A S.1 6A 6.2`5A 7A 8A I0A I2A 15,1 125 125 125 VOLTS 259 2:9 259 250 250 250 250 250 125 X2 125 z 2 2 , CERTiF}• CATION 1 1 i I 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 AMPERE RATING _. _.. 62mA 199mA I21mA 150mA 175mA 18701A ZOOmA 250mA CATALOG NUMBER CCl•V'h col 1i• GCL•V'/. CCL./Y• ' CCL•V1 CCI. V,• CCL•VI '/. . GCL•VI ;i Cu "L•' /1 YT CJL 11/2 GCL•'l2 'n AMPER RATING 500mA 600mA 759mA 800mA IA 1.2A 1.25A 1.5A 1.6A 2A 2.5A COL•V Yes GOL•V » GOO 1/49 309mA 375mA 4COmA r G D L- 7 GlassBody Fuses Time Delay - %►.x. l %" GDL• Time Delay 1 /,a to 8 Amperes, 250 Volts AC 10 to 15 Amperes, 125 Volts AC UL Listed ' CSA Certified Time Delay 1 VP Axial Leads 1 /10" to 8 Amperes, 250 Volts AC 10 to15 Amperes, 125 Volts AC UL Listed CSA Certified 1000 100 1 a W At E ,1 Catalog Numbers, Ampere Ratings and Certifications Certifications: UL lisce CSA C :':ae :: 22:0 2CC`• :�. 25V IOkA IR 115-4 vw Fwwww �w Qw t71 1 .rt ni VI A. U0 4a 1�� .w /s w ta10.. ato m iIIw1lmm -101.1361; BI1 fflhIE ElImmh$IQlnhIIlIil 611111111�1�d� 111111 www� w www ww w wooer .w w wl...wwnM w w .....ww ....�...w .. ....w.• lwaww own. woe O\ww 1111 Mr Mr wa AO Or w'•I1, VIII / WOO WOO "en es..rMOM Mini tmww.ww•.IwtItuII Mil i A�mw %aumaiwaaa . . M UM nn► ���nn�r��►�i�i��►� Ill wwz�.w www.w.w w wort woo* we owe OW w VI • � w � ww w.+� rrinp••t twlApq"Xtlrrltrmlb Hii.11wt7 11tll1MAwaraII,rrnw.t.r,.«w riTTiw11R1 r1 t10 ti A if11 Pg 0111[11111 A V % A 110111111111111 PI wwaimmi tiftr■1 IRU1II.Ala *w*a *n>A1I11111114 Mtn 111111 Aflu1 =MI Mr INIMIP►a► MATIMw►wAWM11 0 I • •••• w. w .rw w • of I w— • w.w... h VI WI INT... w' w. M. b w W T • w A \ A1.www.woo +R ?r+ .;• '11 tall wl rl WIA• PO 1RA I.A 4111% 11 x(11 • Awes Muimomm -- . rrt>' . LA wlMtw►7�14 A 1U A*?* wArrH�lrMlarr■1. rTru 1r>. 1 a► 1 in��l�lwwn.r.n1 nrimummmnamiwomitimaAlk %IlliVnwi1111U 1111111111114 Viigtl 1 1 ores tear ow TO w, w. t.0 .. O• w wwTHr r w•wwL ss■■a■laasaa,■TIa ,1 emit et wit 'al ft art rt11 lop wrt• II ■ ••t1yi t1 a Iwo mail �r rr ll■ii � = =w ratr a• wwarr'q� q1 t }4 r s�1gr�i%Ss/r IiIlsaipll / 11111MUM 11114Ri� Mil 11 � 111�i' Swr U!l 11 �t NAllilllma f►'1 '�1l1 U1'U\ an lfl�� dill 1►'� l�A • } 10 CURRENT IN AMPIRES rritr--; 100 AMPERE RATING CATALOG NUMBER AMPERE RATING CATALOG NUMBER AMPERE RATING CATALOG NUMBER AMPERE RATING CATALOG NUMBER 6OO 260V 50 250V 600V 25OV 500V 280V� 14o TR'/ioR TRS'hoR 2'h TR2 KR TRS2' /•R 10 TR1OR TRS10R 90 TR9OR TRSOOR 'Vwo TR'3SwR TRS'Vi%OR 2 'h TR2 1/2F1 TRS2 VsR 12 TR12R TRS12R 100 TRIOOR TRS1OOR Vs* TRVIoR TRSiiioR 2 Vio TR2 VsoR TRS2 %oR 15 TR15R TRS15R 110 TR11OR TRS11OR Vie TRV.oR TRSVioR 3 TR3R TRS3R 17 'h TR17'AR TRS17'/ZR 125 TR125R TRS125R � Vio TR'/ioR TRSY;oR 3 Yw TR3 VsoR TRS3 %9F1 TR2OR TRS2OR 150 TR15OR TRSI5OR 'h TR' R TRS'hR 3'h TR3'hR TR$3'AR 25 TR25R TRS25R 175 TR175R TRS175R 314 TRVIoR TRS'YSoR 4 TR4R TRS4R 30 TR3OR TRS3OR 200 TR200R TRS200R Vo TRVIoR TRSSioR 4'h TR4'AR TRS4'hR 35 TR35R TRS35R 225 TR225R T RS225R 1 TR1R TRSIR 5 TR5R TRS5R 40. TR4OR TRS4OR 250 TR25OR TRS250R 1 '/o TR1 ''AR TRS1 VoR 5 Vie TR5 V;oR TRS5 VioR 45 TR45R TRS45R 300 TR300R TRS300R 1 '/. TR1 ' /.R TRS1 ' /.R 6 TR6R TRS6R 50 TR54R TRSSQR 350 TR35QR TRS350R 1'/io TR1 VtoR TRS1' //QR 6'/. TR6'KR TRS61/4R 60 TR6OR TRS6OR 400 TR400R TRS.100R 1 Yu) TR1 TRS1 VioR TRS1 VioR TRS2R P. CO c+ TR7R TRS7R 70 TR7QR TRS7OR 450 TR450R TRS45OR 1 VIo TR1 VioR TR8R TRSOR 75 TR75R TRS75R 500 TR5Q0R TRS500R 2 TR2R TR9R TRS9R 80 TR80R TRS8QR 600 TR600R TRS690R 71 . Tri-onic Class RK5 Time Delay Fuses TR/TRS UL Class RK5 Time Delay Current Limiting 200kA I.R. 250 and 600 Volts AC 1 /10 to 600 Amperes UL Listed CSA Certified DC Ratings FEATURES • Fiberglass body for dimensional stability • Imprint labeling for permanent Identification Standard Fuse Ampere Ratings, Catalog Numbers Most popular fuse for motor branch circuits. Also suitable for general purpose protection of transformers, service entrance equipment, feeder circuits and branch circuits. The time delay characteristic of the Tri•onic fuse allows it to ignore normal surge conditions without compromising overcurrent protection. This is a rejection fuse. Replacement of this fuse with a fuse of a lower voltage or lower interrupting rating is not possible provided this fuse is used with rejection fuse blocks such as those listed on page 40. The fiberglass body provides superior reliability in adverse Industrial environments. Now Available — New DC Ratings TRS7OR thru TRS800R are now DC Listed at 100kA, 800VDC, per UL 198L, Special 800VDC rated Tri•onlc fuses with MSHA certification are available in ratings of 35 thru 400 amperes. These are Cat. Nos. TRS35RDC thru TRS400RDC. See page 41, To Order Specify; laded Rotor Catalog Number Illet=111 H.O. • Class Nomter • Type Ne.nCer • Cal Voltage Node • Form(s) see pq. 1.1 t4 Cass Type Cal Vo age Cole Form(s) 1 8910 I ( 0PA34 1 VO2 j 1 Y392 no Z! 121 30 M Pull 44 laded Rotor A•aseve 4:144 Illet=111 H.O. H.O. Pow Pit• Pete ff0 x Polo, — 0 f00 2! 1 OP1f! no Z! 121 30 MEd! - -1 C P21* 31. � 1 e MIMIIIIIIIIIIIMMIll 3 4 Load Full M+p44 laded Rotor A•aseve 4:144 Hatunowiff Mange H.O. Pow i = zl Pete 277V 4iOV 171V 111V ,. : • : : ! I MIMI ii rPI• 1 e MIMIIIIIIIIIIIMMIll 3 4 INETPIIIIINFINIIIIIIFIIII 1 , • r. —IL-- 1M Mir:' mr.m. r' memo Mall 1 3 jipn• I trotted RON Load M1p44H 14441e064.e4 Relrgr i = zl Too Pose INN 4i0V 111V t1; t0 120 100 10 ii t 1 0 7'4 3 4 P(A 1 , is t10 1M I00 31 2 3 VII 10 3 • $2 30 110 110 120 40 2 I 10 II 3 O # OPA344. 1. II. 40 —�. 240 _ ' 200 160 60 3 _ 7'/t 10 20 _ _ 4 2 4 0PA43* +PA44$ 1 104. 10 4400 210 200 to 30 11111 O O P Al2• PA .. • 1110, 1 10 340 000 10 39 MHO °PA' • I • 71 410 07$ 300 MI 11 21 40 OPA7241 !PAT • 203, • 10 140 3" Ill:1111 7 ' " 10111211111311111111111 gPA =l 30, >m nil 71 441234 1� $ O 120 �� =NM BY01 art. no isoo 1200 no � .... Sy0230* 121$. .... 2 • • 2200 l6. • 352 5Y0368* .3121._, Definite purpose contactors are ideal for heating, air conditioning, refdgaration, data processing and food service equipment. New compact 1 and 2 pole contactors are available along with standard size 2, 3 and 4 pole devices. They feature quick connect terminals and binder head screws for • Compact Design • Low Coil VA Compact 1 Pole Contactors --300 VAC Maximum * Vollsoo code mot be spirifibi to order Cod p odu t. A•fer to 'UMW voeag• odes had below and Mutt a shown In HOW 10 0410111 Meta. Compact 2 Pole Contactors — 000 VAC Maximum' * VOMeoe code email be spa•lfed 10 44044 Orr product. 1104410 t14404rd voltage Woo kW below and When e$ Mown N 140W TO ORDtAEdo& • Above 410 NAIL ilk** mIm be reached. 2, 3 and 4 Polo Contactors — 000 VAC Maximums a it W�yg 00 m 4 r old Oa p+04i41. Rrlot to 51AROotO v4uege codas 4V1t4 blew tm0 in ;en io shown in HOW TO OROO block. Coil Voltage Codes Vatas• 00Hs 24 24 120 208 208.240 230-2 40 480 440 600 550 ♦ 24V 50 Ht Only. Avauao+e Sot Type ()PA Contactors only. • Available on Type SY0136 only. 110 220 OP. Type V14 V02 V09 VO4 V06, V07. Code Type SYO V124 vol V VC0 vo3 VO4 v07 • Industry Standard Mounting • Straight-Through Wiring CP1 easy wiring. Box lugs are standard on 40 ampere contactors and larger. An exclusive DIN track mounting option can reduce installation costs. Coils can be changed on the Type DPA contactors quickly without a tool. Auxiliary contact modules snap on either side of the Type DPA contactors. How To Order: Discount Schedule lr Purpose Contactors Types DP, DPA and SYD Selection and Pricing Class 8910 • Double Break Contacts • Low Cost Mr" " Type d P433V02 1 - -113 To Order Specify; Cata log Number HarltpawN mane L • Class Num • Type Nt,:nx,e, • Voltage Code or Voltage •Fermis) CM Type Voltage (Voltage) d. Form(;) 1 131 r I I OPSG33 I I VOZ I I , 3 30V 10 2 230V 30 � 10111 10 VOW Hi (1•014 `ms nits ier iM Vo *0$,4 1114 1 7200 4 • 0 03 AI 7 OAIVO4 131. CP10 I 1t0 VOI OAIVOI F 4 1.044 Op•n 1rp• 004444 Amp•r•4 PQ44 _. __._.__ Type Pace Ty Price ;elf. ;174, III. 107, 193. 223. 2$6. 310. P A N " HarltpawN mane L Laded near Amporta O Open Vy N NEMA 1ypo 16Adoaea ItSV 1 3 3 30V 10 2 230V 30 � " 230V 4 410V 1 175V f fyps ; ;Man, ' 'Type r rADeA 2 !Ir 2 20 — — . . 2 222 --- 822 1 282 o� 1 114. O OP10722. 1 1139. 1 I I Pelt 3 22292 3 1 1 1 i 2 222 2§ 2822§ A •..., • ��b! 1-10 1 0 0 0 0 1 11 7 70 3 300 E E� I M w * * 7 00. 1 11043 3 301 (1•014 `ms nits ier iM Vo *0$,4 1114 1 7200 4 • 0 03 AI 7 OAIVO4 131. CP10 I 1t0 VOI OAIVOI F 4 1.044 Op•n 1rp• 004444 Amp•r•4 PQ44 _. __._.__ Type Pace Ty Price ;elf. ;174, III. 107, 193. 223. 2$6. 310. ! 1 2222R MI �N • F 4 1.044 Op•n 1rp• 004444 Amp•r•4 PQ44 _. __._.__ Type Pace Ty Price ;elf. ;174, III. 107, 193. 223. 2$6. 310. ! 1 2222R MI �N • n 888 r Definite Purpose Start rs Types DP3, H Thru M Selection and Pricing Class 8911 1 -118 Typo OPs033V02 Typo OPSG23V14 Coil Table for 'Type DPSt t Coil inlormaten for Typos Haw M good on page 17.4, Auxiliary Contacts■ For typo PPS o•4aron 1 N. . I N, , 1 NOJI MC, 71,0, C441ing Otvico 403 K033 L03,1 0 3 3 M033 am MS 010 001 011 030 2, 3 and 4 Pole Starters — 800 VAC Maximum Class 8911 definite purpose starters are inexpensive starters for applications with relatively low duty cycles, Typical applications include air compressors, agricultural equipment, pumps and HVAC equipment. Definite purpose starters offer. • Low Cost • Trip Free Reset Mechanism • Small Size • Open rpa or Enclosed • Melting Alloy Overload Block • 500,000 Mechanical Operations * Vts*ago lode mull be walled Is west this M 10 mondtrd *Imp ado* fia Wow ow and fns*l so shown in HOLM TO Olen block Prim A do not Indudt thsrn+al vane. Sw+dar0 ay M Met urns are Pfd N 5!. each. M A4tu ale aviiliQN lictartr in id. ConConsul 1 Gt$ Wm, 0 iNd silts Omar Cross Reference ExIstIng/Replacement Class 8911 OPSG33 OPSO43 OPSO43 OPS053 CP$013 CPI Price SIC 27, PoplicNMni O•vKt OP O I3 pP 23 OP a3 0P5033 • CP10 Replacement Coils/. A Fa typo OP$O$3, vfo Clam ill typo OA1V" will wow vooago node, For 'Type H Thru M 0ossnat on 1 N .O, I N. C. +....1.s•••■•••■■• Starters for Replacement Only How To Order: Discount Schedule Clams 1111 R21 Pnao 115, D 1161 ^. CLASS 9999 --, !YPE DO1 010 D11 AND 02. AUXILIARY CONTACTS' roR USE WITH CLAss 8 910 'HYPE, UpA CONTACTORS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 1. Disconnect all voltage supplies. 2. If installing only one auxiliary contact, mount it on the left side of the contactor (see figure 1) . 2. Hook bottom tabs of auxiliary contact into corresponding slots on the side of the contactor, while holding brown operating tab of auxiliary contact approximately 1/4" away from the contactor. (see figure 1). 4. With bottom tabs fully engaged in the contactor slots push up and in on the bottom of the auxiliary contact until the top hooks engage. 5. Make certain that, the brown operating tab of the auxiliary contact is in the upper groove of the contact carrier. (see figure 1). 6. To remove the auxiliary contact, push up on the bottom of the auxiliary contact while pulling the top away from the contactor. CONTACTOR AUXILIARY CONTACT aaTTai Tao Tap NOOK: aFCRAT(NO TAO D1Q 1 N. C. DO1 1. N.Q. /1. N.C. 011 2 N.Q. ' 020 CCMPANY O00ic3tact to Geowin . Canattttaa to Quality 00* --- ter , 7 i 'fi` q APPLICATION INFORMATION Maximum wire size per screw terminal: 1 no. 1.2 AWC. Use copper wire only. Torque sc= ew terminals to 6-9 lb.-in. 30072-- 004..97A open Construction 600 VOA USK The USK is an easy to wire, easy to install family of terminal blocks designed for applications where a standard screwdriver is used. Its modular design allows for individual mounting for any number of circuits and conveniently mounts on any DIN EN rail. Additional features include nickel plated copper construction, an easy marking system, and external bridging. 04/GIp00n TNM IMI Ilaek. W01 Won tom 1•11 matmM on Cr* ur Ind Cover Minton Irldla, N14ated. 2 p0aildn Notated OW. dh40l14. 10 p4Wa Ind Clamps, Mr * d wpm M kwowtal law Wu LS�iltnl (,31) w 4 i Guist'. drip Matter, •rate WU* 10.4•O04 dins eta. Imprinted. Nr 10411404 v46 nwku pen •fir /Nip Matka, M na 01444,10.o4asn, (*Ws. Awliwaty 4) prlAladi wiIlt swami swum 4 At prilu4dl L1.1.341.3. N. 111.1.1.1,2.11. N. PI ;ill H ptitt*WiU.V.W. N, I. ti. v.W,N.I IM MIAMI Ca , ott4S1 /4+IIt WWII pass. N t1OlennM4ta. antWy al oudniii Mr N MN1+M w+N NI �rYN twat lea Oman H Wr ► Z I. l aam 31: o LI 341.7/0 4 41Pent 1 141 st1ayi 188 Pant $01 (1000 4111 7114 000 Morin Pm. Mr MIAMI el NnpM{N LI 401 III 440114/4 Te ndnal wldd11.2 (.24) Aced VOC data (Ina :trend) Vo d4u, mid stand IA CU '„4 UIK O.v$K 4410 !W /I SUNK gll/.po 1.10 110.141! 11.10 ILpa11 1, 1, 111111/1000 II X$ I.11i L244 Will ItWLANK tl lI It 140 11 2140 IW 113111400 41 III I; 1400 III /110141000 USK4 1N143 A 43 A wa'®,. 14141 Aat#u41I $*V W MM1 w11 lawn 10 1,1 owl (I 14 AWQ11ne Mw. _s) AWO 1 - 4 12 • 22.11 22.12 .. Ent Caws width 1.3 LOS) N I M 34 110 24 1SO 20 100 22 100 t�1I. Md. Owlet N4. 01 !001 1 !0 O1 IOU 1 SO $1 01111 100 0201142 100 le 0113II 10 110144 2 100 10 11 00 2 10 1011010 10 1011414 t0 101I4!0 10 1001222 1 1001011 1 1007111 i 1011113 I Terntinai width 1.2 (.22) Ram V00 dui (Wto stand) VOIdata.aebsud CSA Tie WWI 10 vtgi 041101 4111 U24) IO 341 10104, Iru1t 20 It SLAW al 2I 1,1111 1.11 200,1111 1140 110.4011 ZS 1,194i1111110011 112111,11x1 L1•N, rl a) 20 Is Nil U•N 4111111 SLAM 11) /1 /01 1.20 $ 11 21.40 /Mil / 2001400 4) 11111 11 1.100 OW It 101.1000 0414 USK 10 1#41 43A 434 irou 'Wm Is to 110 A MM. Petrol I 10 a=== end Caws "AIM 1, ta) AWC1 104 114 1 W 44 II to m VAC 110 714 1110 100 &du NM, 07 11014 10 0200 021 10 10p001 II 1013 01 11 10 • 0002114 100 0202141 100 0202 121 10 1201441 100 10nyi 10 1007771 1 1007031 1 10 i 1011113 1 alp. 36 AUTOMATIC TIMING & CONTROLS (ATC) CONTROLLED BY A BUILT-IN MICROCOMPUTER, THE COMPACT ass iS THE MOST VERSATILE AND COST-EFFECTIVE TIMER ATC HAS EVER BUILT. IT I3 TOTALLY ADJUSTABLE BETWEEN 0.01 SEC AND see HAS, WITH A REPEAT ACCURACY OFf 10 MS AT ALL SEttINOS. rr IS EASILY PROGRAMMED TO 1IUE UP TO OR DOWN FROM THE SET POINT . , . AND TO STOP OR00 (I.E. CONTINUE DISPLAYING TIME) AFTER TIME-OUT. A BUILT-IN SELF-TEST PROGRAM VERIFIES PROPER OPERATION WITHOUT TEST INSTRUMENTS. THE 31S ALSO SETS NEW STANDARDS FOR NOISE IMMUNMY, RESET RELIABILITY AND DUST AND WATERTIGHTNESS. OPERATION MI liming and !ogle functions its performed by en Internal microprocessor, its working memory (RAM) and a read-only program memory (ROM). Th. microprocessor communicates with other timer components through a number of II0 pone. When power le applied to the timer, the parameters al one group of 110 pone — for the range switches, display mode and 60180 Hit Jumpers — are read into RAM registers and stored for use during the timing cycle. Ths I parameters at The other U0 pons — for the set point switches and clock output — are continuously sampled to that any change Is Immedlelely reflected In the appropriate RAM registers. When the microprocessor receives a clock pulse,111ncroments 11 t0 the time already stored In RAM, In the TIME DOWN modes,11 subtracts the pulse from the stored time interval, displaying the emounl of lime remaining betore Ilme•out; In TIME UP mode, II adds the pulse to the 010(0 101s,, displaying the amount of lime that has elapsed slnooalarf. At each computation, the microprocessor compares the new Incremented total with the .urront set point switch settings. As soon es the total Is equal to or greater than the switch settings, the microprocessor times out, enorglting the delayed relay and the 17 display, in UP 4 GO mode, the microprocessor continues to count clock pulses alter the delayed relay le energized, displaying the Ilme accumulated alter time-out until the timer is reset, In DOWN li G0,11 reverses direction at time out and counts up from zero giving a direct overshoot reading. To rases the 365, power must be removed from Terminal 1. The microprocessor clocks the power interruption, ignoring any event of less than 30 ma. In repeat•cycle operation, the microprocessor also clocks the duraction of the output pulse. SPECIFICATIONS MODELS Choice of two: • Arrangement 30, with digital display Arrangement 10, without display Roth available Toren delay operation at 120, 240 or 24V AC; and 24, 48 or 125V DC. RANDES Switch•selectable ranges of G949,043.9 and 0.999 sec, min or hrs. REPEAT ACCURACY AC 10.01 sec on all ranges, synched to AC line. DC better than * .010% by crystal controlled oscillator after warm up. RESET TIME Clocked at 80 ms. TIMiNO MODES SINGLE CYCLE: Interval or delayed. REPEAT CYCLE: pulse .clocked at 6010 80 me (will be constant for a given unit). DISPLAY (An, 30 only) CYCLE PROORESS: 3•dlglt display, 0.3 Inch, hlgh•Intenelty, blue programmable: DOWN and STOP, DOWN and 00, UP and STOP or UP and 00. TIM E•OUT; V display (loll); energized 111 Ilmtout. TIMING DAR: = display (right); blinks once per second during cycle, rapidly eller time-out, PILOT LIGHT (Arr. 10 only) Blinks once per second during cycle, rapidly after time-out. LOAD RELAYS NUMBER; ono instantaneous and ono deleyod, TYPE: °PDT, Form C. OPERATE TIME: 13 ms, max. RELEASE TIME: 10ms, max, CONTACT RATINGS: 7A at 120, 240 or 24V AC, 1/0 HP. 3Aal24V DC, 1.112Aal48V DC, 112Aat 126V DC. LIFE; 100 million operations (no load). TERMINALS 10 screw terminals accessible st rear; integral wiring diagram, HOUSING 72 mmr PIN size: plug -in design; fully gasketed, dust and watertight whether panel or surfaco'mounied. Meats NEMA for and NEMAl2 standards. POWER REQUIREMENTS 120V AC: 95.132V AC, 50or 60 HZ. Inrush -•• .3A. Running — 0.06A at 120V AC. 240V AC: 190-264V AC, 50 or 60 Hz. Inrush — .15A. Running — 0.03A at 240V AC. 24V AC: 19.2.26.4V AC, 50 or 60 Hz. Inrush — 1A. Running — 0.25A at 24V AC. 24V DC: 19.2-26.4V OC, 5% ripple Running -• .120A at 24V DC. 365 LOV3-RANGER YAM 41010 PIMA( 114.00 ►net Aootas 1.00 toe 70,00 eosins coot USA * 0 w P a eA1se TYM 1 5A1011 Ira 010 Wet V06TAea APO MIOYIMCY 0 INN AQ, MN010 HOIAAa0NW• MN . a a T N K em r AMIM$0IMINT+. �■01/1e MEM K WM HOW, 0/40t, 'IAnmss X K vnuww a•a►t PRICE oaot:flwocOOE MIA 1111.00 PAW TYPE DIMENSIONS wCMES W1.4INIT €H; THE COMPUTING TIMER tY; . .: :u . 010 »{ :f 0011910111110 *woo* 000 1 IN pop bowl) s•w►Mt■w4 tww« DIMENSIONS: MOUNTING: H; f•1 Fi • ♦ • 365A Long Ranger Timer DESCRIPTION: The 365 is a digital, microprocessor based, indicating reset timer with on-delay start. Two DPDT relays pro- vide instantaneous and delayed outputs while combine- tions of the two will give interval or pulse mode opera. tion. Time is derived from power line frequency (SO or SO Hz.) and reset occurs when power is interrupted to the unit. The set point can be any three digit value between 0.01 and 999, of seconds, minutes or hours. The timer provides a salf•test procedure and any one of four, different, easily programmable modes of cycle progress display. The 305 plugs Into the standard ATC DIN sized housing, and without wiring change, can retrofit a model 365 timer. Nit •i.i�.w ap• 1. Cut out a 2 N+" square mounting hole, 2. Mount timer to housing before mounting in the panel. Make sure rubber gasket is flush with timer bezel before tightening the screws, 3. Slide timer /housing complete (as pictured above) through cut out until the gasket is against panel. 4. Holding the timer in place, install the mounting bracket horizontally around the timer housing and slide it forward until the ends contact the rear of the panel. TIMe.OuT SYMBOL. 'THREE O10IT DISPLAY TIMING OAR TIME UNITS WINDOW 000 d114REE DIGIT PRESET ECIMAL POINT WINDOWS IOIT SET KNOSS IRIMOVASLII s•t• INSrAU.ATi0N . INSTRUCTIONS JULY, 1092 PH 0315013.02.00 5, Using the two screws, provided, attach the bracket to the timer housing and tighten screws until timer Is held securely in place, 6. Install mylar insulator over rear of bracket by sliding the end tabs between the bracket and the housing and allowing metal extensions on rear of bracket to go through the slots in insulator to hold it securely in place. 7 For maximum water• tightness, the two (2) front screws on this product should be torqued to 4 inch pounds. 1 NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS • 365A Long Ranger Timer SELF•CHECK DIAGNOSTICS: • CAUTION • Output Rolsys Do Operate During the Selt'•Cheekl The 365 can be checked whenever there is any doubt that it is functioning properly. A Self -Check procedure is listed on a card permanently installed In every timer. This card folds out for convenient viewing as the Seli•Check Is per- formed. The only external wiring required for this procedure is that L be connected to terminals #1 and #15 and L3 THE DISPLAY: A high Intensity blue fluorescent display consists of three digits and decimal point (If decimal Is set In tenths or hundredths position). Also, there is a blinking Timing Bar and a spacial Tlma•Out symbol. The Timing Bar appears to the right of the digits and blinks once every second during timing. This Timing Bar shows quickly SETTING SWITCHES: The three digits are set with the rotary switch knobs located beneath each digit. These knobs can be rotated in either direction (CW or CCW), and they are "pull" removable, if digit set security is desired. Ing. - •. >••a�Y.. s..•.. -; • • be on terminal #2. The Infernal program wire for display modes should be placed on the fifth pin (test), II load operation cannot be tolerated in the installation, see CAU• TION above, perform the Self-Check in a separate hobs• that the timer is actively timing especially when the digits do not change rapidly as In the "hours" ranges. When the delay relay is energized at time•out, a tria• angular Tlme•Out symbol appears to the left of the digits. The Timing Bar blinks noticeably foster at time. out, also. When the 366 is In either "Time Down" mode, changing one or more digits, during timing, will instantly be ro• flatted by an equivalent change in the timer's display. in either "Time•Up" mode, changing digits immediately changes the time•out set point. Setting all three digits to zero will cause Instant time•out in any display mode. • ti OPERATION As suen as is applied to terminals 1 8,..2 of the timer, the Instantarbtius relay Is energized and changes 944-10). the The timer then looks fox terminal 15( e dad( terminal) to receive power. When terminal 15 Is powered, the internal clock tired Ia enabled and the timer starts to time. When the Internal clock time the time set on the front taco, the delayed associated energizes s (3-4-5 d 113.1 states of its The finer Is reset by removing porter from terminal I for at least 60 msec. At reset, both relays revert back to their shelf (without power) state. SPECIAL NOTE FOR UNITS WITHOUT DISPLAYS On nor•diaplay units, terminals I & 15 are *pored togetmet Internally, As soon as power Is applied, the knlanlaflir us relay energizes and the timer starts to time ktmmedlatefy. DISPLAY INFORMATION The dgltal display can be set to opotato In any of 4 modes b by Orr* movi moving a pumper on the dlt reu MODS: — • UP A TOP (Time to t set, transfer delayed stop timing. • UP & 00 (Time up to titre set, assailer delayed relay, and continue liming (until unit Is reset). • DOWN A STOP (Time dawn to two from time see, iranelordeayed relay, and slop trig.) • S del+Y ed �y ond b c zero from lime set ontinue liming up from taro gMng a drool overshoot reading, Timing MN oortilnuo until unit la rased.) Al 365 tknen are shipped from the factory In the UP & STOP mode. To the right you wiN find some typical application. A WORD ABOUT SANITY Moss ol ATC•a products are designed lot general and not for spa aide applCatio+Is. Because of this, we usually we not aware of how they everouaty will be used, However. they are freewnty employed in controlling automatic mectvnsy or processes. Although MC makes products of high timbal: every product, given enough lime. can be Mooted to fad. Steast`cetsy. devices can rill alter a shun period os time or a long period of lime or anything in between, In eseenhWy 0 cams, Newt miens pWure 10 provide a logic signal or power to An electrical Wad when d mould or to provide ii when d should be absent, Loss o1(en, haws mean; Sedum to meet sate other apefhcaUWn. (tut, in as CAaes. d means to 00 something unwanted of wtespected. SuICO the lai or Automatic machinery or p'QCeasei Can goal, hue/dove condition., lot persoael or property, whatever the deli- Man Or Iaikge might be, d is necessary to cotnaidsf the cons,• quinces of failure and design in such a way that laiture will not create a hazard to personnel Of Property. The design must insur that any failure will result in a Lad sale con4 ton and there will be no danger to personnel andror property involved in the use of the product. Oasigns Incorporating control, of any kind should be carefully considered to provide for their eventual failure. TYPICAL INSTALLATIONS KEY SYMBOLS POWER SUPPLY a.ocx INDEPENDENT LOADS DEPENDENT LOADS oft, MOMENTARY STAATINs "•• .•' cONTA t „et. S UST D STARTING x LOAD ENERGIZED 0 LOAD DEENEAOIZED �' DELAYED CONTACTS Contacts transfer i., e.rUt «M«n „Sat 1111 • 'IWII " USW CYol.5 PULAS Al timer! shown In "before sten" posabn. Otagrems shown with tower off unless otherwise tnetked. Alaiblitert bed current through any bad carrying cowed N 7 amperes. ON DELAY: Retiree on power Iae(l.. T fP INSTANTANEOUS CONTACTS act a trrntNrreA ea to when Mle•guU IM , llarred beak, as shown wren deenrweind. •.• Lose A poses enlaapproslmatMySOmS• (--- ti VOC R ATC PT. NO 48 150n2Ow 3652600500 125 650n20w 3652600600 *:Display model only. Clock prewired to terminal 1 on non display m.,del. CHANGING RANGE: WIRINGt a 4M11u11 .4h10u160M►4611: THE 365 MUST ee fEMOVEti FROM ITS HOUSING TO INSTITUTE ANY OP THE FOLLOWING "CHANGE" PROCEDURES ON THIS PAGE. Decimal Point Location can be changed with the white plastic fait mounted behind the front face of the timer. This lover moves Into three positions. With finger fore. you can change its position and at the same limo observe the front of the timer. NOTE • this prbcedure sets the decimal point electronically as well as mechanically. TIMING DISPLAY MODES: • j �• (1) Down & Stop (2) Down & Go (3) Up & Stop (4) Up & Go R z T U + In El El O m Qj s FREQUENCY: PQw1• WM *NOTE; NOn unit hal clack internally wired, Not Accit ;1014 it tormin.i 15. The 365 has two pin programming to select either 50 Hz or 60 Hz line power, These pins are clearly marked on the side of the timer. OtMvr06oM1A6111 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS t 365A Cons Ranger Timer .. -. .;.. . . • r' - . 4 • • rit.,{i{z, ' r ... ti" - �t!�Sv. . . F Time Units (Sec /Min /Hr) are sat by moving a small arm In a slotted a'ro• on the side plate of the tirnar. 8y depressing this arm slightly with a pencil or pen point, it can be moved to a new position. The time units physically change In the timer's face and the timer is electronically 'Witched to the new units as well. • NOTE: the moveable arm is found on the side closest to the units (Sec /Min /Hr) window. The four (4) possible display modes ere pin program• mable on the side of the timer. (Note: the fifth pin is for test mode only). All pins are clearly marked with their function. TERMINAL WIRING: 4 SPECIFICATIONS: Time.Out: Type: Operate Time: Release Time: Contact Ratings: Life: Models Choice of two: Arrangement 30, with digital display . : Arrangement 10, without display Both available for on delay operation at 120, 240 or 24V AC; and 24, 48 or 125V DC. Ranges Switch•selectable ranges of 0.9.99, 0.99.9 and 0.999 sec, min or hrs. Repeat Accuracy AC± 0.01 sec on all ranges, synched to AC line. DC better than ± .010 sec by crystal controlled oscillator. Reset Time Clocked at 00 ms, Timing Modes Single Cycle: Repeat Cycle: interval or delayed. pulse.clocked at 60 ms to 80 ms (will be constant for a glv. on unit). Display (Arr. 30 only) Cycle Progress: 34di0 display, 0,3 Inch, high. intensity, blue programmab• le: DOWN and STOP, DOWN and ©O, UP and STOP or UP and ©O. Vdisplay (left); energized at time.out. Timing Bar: — display (right); blinks once per second during cycle, rap. Idly after timo.out. Pilot Light (Arr. 10 only) BIiriks once per second during cycle, rapidly after timo.out, Load Relays Number: one instantaneous and one delayed. DPDT, Form C. 13 ms, max. 10 ms, max. 7A at 120, 240 or 24V AC, 1/6 HP. 3A at 24V DC, 1.1/2 A at 48V1 C, 1/2 A at 125V DC. 100 million operations (no load). 240V AC: 24V AC: 24V DC: 240V AC Model: 24V AC Model: 24V DC Model: Optional: INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS • 365A Long Ranger Time Terminals 18 screw terminals accessible at rear; integral wiring diagram. . Housing 72 mm DIN size; Piug•in design; fully gasketed, dust and watertight whether panel or surface mounted. Power Requirements 120V AC: 98.132V AC, 50 or 80 HZ Inrush Running -- 0.06A at 120V AC. 190464V AC, 60 or 80 Hz. Inrush — .15A. Running — 0.03A at 240V AC. 19.240.4V AC, 60 or 80 Hz. Inrush — 1A. Running — 0.26A at 24V AC. 19.2.28.4V DC (6% ripple) Running — .120A at 24V DC. Clock Input (terminal 16) Voltage Model 120V AC Model: Temperature Rating 32 to 140'F (0 to 00'C). Weight Net: Shipping: Accessories Standard: 96.132V AC, 10 mA max. current at 120V 190.264V AC, 10 mA max. current at 240V 10.2.28.4V AC, 20 mA max. current at 24V 19.2.26.4V DC (5% ripple), 5 mA max. current at 24V AC 1 lb., 0 oz, DC 14 or, AC 2 lbs., DC 1 lb., 8 oz. hardware is provided for front•of•panel mounting. Surface.mounting brackets with front.facing terminals. NEMA 12 molded case (1 timer) or NEMA 1 steel case (2 timers). INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS - 365A Long Ranger Timer BASIC TYPE RANGE VOLTAGE & FREQUENCY Q 120V AC, 60/60 Hz** R 240V AC, 60/60 Hz" T 24V AC,50/60 Hz" N 24V DC K Special ARRANGEMENT FEATURES P Basic plug.ln unit 8 Surface mounted plug.in.unit X Standard K Special ORDERING CODE 365A 300 0 10 300 0 to 9.99,99,9 or 999 sec, min or hr• 000 Special 10 Without display; omdoloy (reset on power failure) 30 With display; on delay (reset on power failure) *Switch•soiectod **Frequency Is floid Concerning Daley .. , MO makes every alai W build a i&e product, We by to Nate epeoacalaM eratmatery. Out wiry product made w9 oventualy fail. so design our product" into ptipnint W Mal Pay lad sal*. ow nrtterldivatl, en , IMPORTANT NOTICE race �r la the use a this product we b isect O n tests beiered to be roil e• TM retell •e re If eserci od to IM lilestion a our row mitriill end In ow Mnt/KIVMg epeletie01, HQwirer, since t e use a this product Is be 14 control a the min4leclWw, no pewees or wiIroMy, espreised or implied it pride es le such use or Immll trtcid•ntel to Posh toe, Sending or polN etien or the re Wes to Ira ebliined, whothw N cicWdence with the directions or clamed so to be. The mentliclWlt rga"illy disclaims selN I,* therelere. Furthermore, noumg contiined Mrein Nil be construed as • re ;en4mengition to use My product in conflict with •doing lows Mellor pooems cerwng My wawa! of use 'W /lIM"el a Sae, 44$61V mw MVO. sod limiNtionl a liblisy Mel coowa4 esclunvey OY iutomatic Timing and Contras pri►",d mammy aatement la the comae There inStiVeeene de not espin4, redVie, modify or enter Automate Tuning and Commis wanonty voters'! 04 ns wwroray or rsmady n lacer el I CU tQmsr W any ether par1M Mss!"a 1M1e 0$1 /141 IWn1 ate AUTOMATIC TIMING & CONTROLS a division of Sycon Corporation 959 Cheney Avenue, Marion, Ohio 43302 Phone: (614) 387.8827 • Fax: (614) 382.9Q80 Printed in U.S.A. Timing functions ON•delay, Repeal cycle (0, 02), Signal ON/OFF delay, Slgnal OFF•dolay, Interval ON•doley and Interval •. Terminal form 11•pin round 8•pin round H3CR•At1•AC100•240 Contact output 100 to 240 VAC, 80/80 Hz H3CR•A•AC100•Z40 12 D 9CR•A•DC1� Z — H3CR•A8.00T 24 VACNDC H3CR•A•AC /QC24 H3CR•A8•AC/DC24 Transistor output 12 VDC H3CR•A8.0012 H3CR•A68•DC12 24 VACNDC H3CR•AS•AC /DC24 H3CR•A88•AC/DCZ4 H3CR•ASEL•AC120.240 Instantaneous output contact 10010 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz — 24 VACNDC — H3CR•A8EL•AC/DC24 Description Part number Sockets H3OR•A, H3CR•AS timers H3CR•A@, H3CR•AOS timers Bottom surface or track mounting, top screw terminals P2C1 Back mounting, for use with Y92F•30 mounting adapter, bottom screw terminals. P30A•11 P2CF•08 P30.08 Y92F ;30 Bottom surface or track mounting, lop screw terminals Back mounting, for use with Y92F•30 mounting adapter, bottom screw terminals, Fits behind panel, ideal for side•tiy•side installation, Use PSG;;': - sockets. . v Panel mounting adapiaf Protective cover Hard plastic cover protects against dust, dirt and water; not for use with panel covers. Y92A•488 Panel covers Light gray (Munsell No. 5Y7/1) to match case Y92P•48GL Medium gray (Munsell No. 5Y5/1) - Y92PO48GM Black (Munsell No. N1.5) Y92P Time setting rings Used to lock in a single setting; one ring, can be used with Y92P panel covers. Y92S•27 Used to lock in a setting range; two rings, can be used with Y92P panel covers. Y928•28 Mounting track PIN rail, 50 cm (1.64 ft) length PFP•50N DIN rail, 1 m (3.28 h) length PFP•100N . End plate PFP -M omRon Solid -State Timer 1/16 DIN Analog -Set Timer with Many Time Ranges, Operating Modes, and Aesthetics Options ✓ Field - selectable time ranges from 0.05 second to 300 hours a Choose 6- or 2- function models to handle most applications x "� ■ Wide range AC supply voltage models (100 to 240 VAC) fits most applications and reduces spare parts inventories ■ Three external signal inputs for remote control of the timer ■ 'Short, 80 mm (3.15 inch) panel mounting depth with socket allows space - efficient control panel design ■ Choice of light gray, medium gray or black panel covers to match panel aesthetics Ordering Information ■ TIMERS • • ■ ACCESSORIES H3CR al Para number -- ....r. H3CR•A I H3CR•AS 1 H3CR•A8 24 V 0000 to 240 VAC, 50/80 Hz H3CR•AOS H3CR•AOEL" Supply vofta o ' AC DC AC - 12 V or 24V 1SY. sa 1 0 i rated supp voltage p ating voltage 0.12to1.2 90% to 110% of rated supply • tage at 1 ' •' Power consumption AC 10 VA AC/DC 1.5 VA (AC), 0.8 W (DC) TO 1.3w -- Timing functions .. ON•deley, Repoli' cycle signal OFF start, Repeat cycle signal ON start, Signal ON/OF delay, 51 nal OFF•dota , Interval ON•dotay, Inlervat = tart, Raet, 'ate Inputs H3CR•A, H3CR•At3 No•voltage Inputs ON Impedance; 1 YO max. ON residual voltage: 1 V max. OFF tm • odanco: 100 kA min. 3 to 30 Control output Type DPDT holey Transistor NPN/PNP) OPDT holey Translolor NPN/PNP SPOT relay Inotanloneouo contact Max. oad t3 A, 250 AC 100 30 VOC 6 A, 260 A 100 mA, 8 A, 250 VA Min, load 10 mA, 6 VDC 10 mA, 5 VDC 10 mA, 6 VDC 10 rnA, S VDC 10 mA, 6 VDC Residual voltage 2 V max. - •• 2 V max. Repeat accuracy ±0.3% full scale max,, except in 1.2 s tango 10.3% 1117 ms Ong error t6 u acate t .0 a max. Resetting system Power OFF; external, aelf•reaotting Power OFF Rear ng me 0.1 s max. . IcatOM ower . ` n. cetor green ► , • utput • ` n• cator re ') a rna a ---- PliErCZETTIRFITTMITa 5Y7/1) and knob (clear) Mount ng onnec ono Panel, track or surface depending on 11.p n noun• socket socket selected _ 8.pin roue' socket Weighs Approvals • pprox. 00 g (3.17 oz.) I Approx 110 g (3.0 oz.) UL Recognized, F le Number E41515 CSA Certified, File Number LR22310 t temperature O p e r a t i n g •10 to 55 C (4 to 3 1 ' F - Storage .25 to 65 ( to 149•F) • Humidity 35% to 95% Vibration Mechanical durability 10 to 55 Hz with0.75 mm (0.03 in) double each in three directions Malfunction durability 10.to 55 Hz with 0.5 mm (0.02 in) doable amplitude each in three directions Shock Mechanical durability 100 G each in three directions Malfunction durability 10 G each in three directions Variation due to voltage change ±0.5 %full scale max. Variation due to temperature change ±2% full scale max. Insulation resistance 100 Mil minimum at 500 VDC Time range Time units seconds) minutes) , hrs (hours) 1 Oh (10 hours) 1.2 0.05to1.2 0.12to1.2 0.12to1.2 1.2t012 3 0.3 to 3 0.3 to 3 0.3 to 3 3to30 12 1.210 12 1.2 t012 1.2 to 12 12 10 120 30 3 to 30 3 to 30 3 to 30 - 5510 300 0 instantaneous output' H3CR — , omRon ■ RANGE SELECTION Paw indkaldr (gran LEb) osesol Whom whin *OW epeatea. AI who., timer stops vowing Output ind;ealor (rod LEO) two snot soteeta 11.2.3.12 et 30) Time Muni; Mnob 1N) Specifications Op.raang moan disoiay window opera a matelot A B Repeal cyd.rsignstl OPP siaA A..,,.,__ 82: Repeat cydetsignitl ON start c: Signal OwOPP y a signal oPa•alay E: Interval Time unit sofa** (tee, men, Ars.1 Oh) Scale range display windows Time unit oitplay 'meow • Set to time setting knob below zero. 41 Dielectric strength 2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between current - carrying metal parts and non- current - carrying metal parts 2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between control output terminals and operating circuit 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between contacts not located next to each other Service Fire Electrical 100,000 operations minimum at maximum ratings H3cR n omRon Engineering Data ■ ELECTRICAL SERVICE LIFE a i t I • t •R +• In the schematic diagrams, each thick line indicates the external wiring: shaded areas show Interns connections. 0 1 2 9 4 Laid art a W Timing Charts • H3CR -A, H3CR -AS (SIX-FUNCTION TIMERS) Mode A ON•DaIey Signal Start/Signal Reset Power Is applied continuously. Timing starts at the leading edge of the start input. The output relay is energized when the accumulated time equals the sot time. Subsequent start signals during or alter timing will not be accepted. The output relay or transistor will remain energized until a reset input is applied or power is interrupted, The minimum signal Input Is 0.05 second. Power•ON Start/ Power•OFF Reset The start terminals are connected, Timing starts when power is applied. The output is energized when the accumulated time equals the set time. The output relay or transistor remains energized until power is disconnected or a reset input is applied. The minimum resetting time is 0.1 second. E114maU)r ihQAtY;W40 Pt** a and 10) 541,1 tt and q Newt (1 and 7) Control output N0 (11 and 11) NO (I w1d 4) Control output NO (9 and 11) No ar4s) Power indira►a Power t? anq 10) 518o1?4r4 6) Contra outgo: NC (6 and 11) NC (1 and 4) Control output: NQ (9 and 11) NO (1 and 3) Power naJcator .• I MEM 1 ? ' H3CR Lit H3CR In the schematic diagrams, each thick line indicates the external wiring; shaded areas show internal connections. Cumulative Timing Using the Gate Input with ON-Delay When the gate signal is closed, timing Is temporarily stopped. When the gate signal opens, timing resumes at the point of Interruption. The gate input terminal permits the timer to sum up times t and t as shown in the timing chart. , •! . • rommimmemommumh t3ale soil (The operant v is interrup(Ed *ilk e gate sire! ii the tow defects stn Mania, Opal.) gloomily 51WA CWC 4I 4 Medea B and 82 Repeat Cycle Signal Start/Signal Reset Power is continuously applied. The ON/OFF cycle Is initiated at the leading edge of the start input. In Mode 8 the output relay or translator will be OFF for the set time and thou ON for the set time, creating an operation pattern of OFF/ON/OFF, In Mode 82 the output relay or translator will turn ON for the set time and then OFF for the sot time, creating an operation pattern of ON/OFF/ON. This cycle will be repeated until a resat Input Is applied or power Is disconnected, The minimum signal Input Um is OAS second, Powor.ON Start/Power OFF Reset The start terminals are connected. Timing starts when power is applied. The output relay or transistor operates according to mode B (OFF /ON/OFF pattern) or mode 82 (ON/OFF /ON pattern), whichever is set, The cycle repeats until a reset input is applied or power is disconnected, omRon power 2.10 f ON Atari 2 • A o Gate (lnterrtsptkxi) 2. 5 of CWIWI output NO 0 • t t ON OfP- ON Off ON OPP ON OCP OH Of, Coriuet output NC a • 1 Comsat outvut NO a • I Candid output NC 4 . 1 Iv d aIar Pew 01 and 10) SW (t anO I) Meet (t and 7) Central o flout so to end II) N6 I1 tai e) Cenbol NOW No h and 11) NO (1 and a) opeteeon tnaiswo Power (t and 10) Alen e14 0) Cpnugl woo,: NC (0 4n4 I 1 ) (I anO •) Cmuol gvipgt: N4 l9 4n4 • I) No (I ant) 7) Operat.on 44cator • • • • ( ;11N Arne • • • • • • • 1 1 I I H3CR ._ • 110 1.1•11111 WINN __WW___ WIRMOURN I • set time 43 H3CR ; r; . omRon r, H3CR 44 In the schematic diagrams, each thick line Indicates the external wiring; shaded areas show internal connections. Mode C Signal ON/OFF Delay Signal ON/OFF Start/instantaneous Operation/Time•Limit Reset Power is continuously applied. The first timing cycle begins when the input signal is applied, the second when it is removed, The output relay or transistor is energized when the lapsed time from the first timing cycle equals the set point, The output remains energized until the lapsed time of the second timing cycle equals the set point. The minimum signal input time Is 0.05 second. Power ON Start/Instantaneous Oporatlonf lmeaLimlt Reset TMiming cycle starts when power Is applied. When the Um point, the output status changes and holds that Natty until power turns OFF to reset the timer, Minimum reset dmo Is 0.1 second. stag ii al fT1u eperadon starts wiet the signal ON or OKF) owl signal (NO le NO) Mode D Signal OFF•Delny Signal Start/Instantaneous Operation/TIme•Llmlt Reset Power Is continuously applied, The output relay is energized et the leading edge of the start input. Timing stars at the trailing edge of the start input. The output relay is de'enerpized when the accumulated time equals the set time, The minimum signal input time is 0,05 second, Sian sirll& (NO to NC to NO) (Power conpnuoutly Supplied) Power (2 and 10j Burt t2 and ti) Control Output NC (s and 1 I) NC (1 and 4) Control output: NO (9 and 10 ) rro (1 and 3) Paw*, Irldalor Power (2 and 10) OW it ma h CoNrel aAput Na a and I I) NO (I and 4) Caw% oulpu: NO (1 and 11) NO (i arta 3) Power (t and 10) Pan It and 0) Contra output: NC (e and I1) NC (1 ins 4) Control output: NQ (9 and II) NO (► an4 3) Power indicator i•aa1Urns I II' set time NOON f (r sat Ums W r toss than sat lima . . • lit Flaoin9 H3CR . In the schematic diagrams, each thick line indicates the external wiring; shaded areas show intemal connections. Mode D continued Power -ON Start/Instantaneous Operation/Tme -Limit Reset Power is continuously applied. The output relay Is energized at the leading edge of the start input. Timing starts at the trailing edge of the start input. The output is de- energized when the accumulated time equals the sat time. The minimum reset time Is 0.1 second. 5UA d rA& (NC 16 NO a Mode E interval Signal Start/Instantaneous Operation/Time -Limit Reset Timing begins on the leading edge of the start signal. The control output it only energized during timing. The timer Is left when a reset signal Is applied, Sid stelae (Pow send* uNy supp0o0) omRon - H3CR Poway (2 And 10) Sun (2 And si CcW t t output NC (d And II) NC (1 and 4) CenUot oulpd: NO (0 sod 11) NO (1 And 3) Power Memo Pow t1 and 10) sun O and I) CarM104 a 000 No : and II) NO(I end 4) WNW output NO (1 PM II) nd toUtdm1 I • sot lima a. . • Power ON Start/instantaneous Operation/Time -Limit Reset Timing begins on the leading edge of the start signal. The , control output Is only energized during timing. The timer is roast when power is interrupted. • S. Brut I19n11(NC to NO) Pewee 1.20,40 10) Start (2 god 01 CovUpt output: NC (0 and 11) NCp ono 4) t*0+100100001: iI) NO( y l� f . 11:1%:4 +: "ii'.:'i Tin ;et time 45 t , ' *" _17 ilk 101111 1111111111111.111.10111111 MN NMI 11111 RIM ism MIMI OM 1111111111111IIIIIIIIIMIiII® n.• . " • :C IM III MEI t , ' *" _17 ilk 101111 1111111111111.111.10111111 MN NMI 11111 RIM ism MIMI OM 1111111111111IIIIIIIIIMIiII® H3CR - _ - omROn H3CR In the schematic diagrams, each thick line indicates the external wiring; shaded areas show internal connections. ■ H3CR -A8 TWO - FUNCTION TIMER, DPDT CONTACT OUTPUT Mode A ON -Delay Power•ON Start/ Pow r•OFF Reset Timing starts when power Is applied. The output its energized when the accumulated time equals the set time. The output relay remains energized until power Is disconnected. The minimum resetting time is 0,1 second. Power ON Start/ Instantaneous Operation/Time-Limit Reset Timing begins when power is applied. The control output Is only energized during timing. The timer is reset when power is interrupted. ■ H3CR -A88 TWO- FUNCTION TIMER, TRANSISTOR OUTPUT Mode A ON -Delay -{ Meurer supply Power•ON Start/ Power •OPP Rent Timing starts when power is applied, The output Is energized when the accumulated Urn. equate the set time. The output transistor remains energized until power is disconnected, The minimum resetting time is 0,1 second, Power ON Sten/ InstentaneotbI Operetton/Time•41mit Reset Timing begins when power Is applied. The control output is only energized during timing, The timer le reset when power Is Interrupted. ■ H3CR -ABEL t - set time t -a - less man set time Fit z reset tree Output Way Output 'nay Pewit tnaettta • Pews Oulptil /Nay OtAput May Power Indenn Pawn Oulpul (NO) master Power Indiana Poway Output (NO) Umtata Power rckarat Mode E Interval Mode E Interval Pane; Time 4aley contact (NC) Polo Paley contact (NO) In ;tantan4Qys contact (NC) In$t#nten$oU* contact (NO) P;1wer incucatoi Mode E Poway Time dewy Contact (NC) Tune dewy contact (NO) Instantaneous contact (NC) Instantaneous contact (NO) I *olden. t • set Wne w • Ma than .et into taElet(Nne t- su Wig tInsalWM TWO - FUNCTION TIMER, SPDT CONTACT, INSTANTANEOUS OUTPUT Mode A ON -Delay Rt Interval 1 ,`....`°' iii: i 1 H3CR Dimensions t o CC o e w " Unit: mm (inch) ■ TIMERS H3C14-A, H3CR -AS, H3CR -A8, H3CR -A9S P2CF•11 ?,3 Timer with Y92P Panel Cover and Y929 Setting Ring P2CF•09 __. omRon *3 30 de The seine dee ,, 61.6 (2 Is u hnti WOW ea PAO taCtIA H3CA�Ae s Me= Ye2F•a0 P30.08 .: H3CR Panel cutout New necenvoinded tatiettitess teen. . u1 . b Overall Mounting Depth Track Mounting P2C1 Track Mounting P2CFOe Panel Mounting P90A•11 Panel Mounting P30.08 • , a • H3CR = ,_ omrton ', H3CR • SOCKETS 11 -Pin Sockets for H3CR -A, H3CR -AS P2CF•11 Bottom surface or track mounting socket MA-11 Back Mounting socket P30.08 Back mounting socket 8 -Pin Sockets for H3CR-A8, H3CR -A8S P2C1408 Bottom surface or track mounting Mos Awn /A Two 43 ow. mowing holes —4 car • Terminal arrangement (r P Mow) Terminal arrangement 0 0 a �oa►� ° modem Terminal arrangement ow low I, 'e q tti ! k i (TOE Mewl Mounting holes Two 4.5 NW/A if •oter M)i i Terminal arrangement mi., (Bottom vyw) H3CR ' , omRon ■ PANEL MOUNTING ADAPTERS 4 192F•30 Mounting Adapter Adapter installs behind the panel. It is ideal for side by side installation. Use P30A•11 or P33.08 sockets. Mounting psnwr . Motet Socket 42 (11 3)... ..,. 48 (rig r ■ PROTECTIVE COVER Y92A•48S ■ PANEL COVERS Ohuon offers throe colors of panel covers to match panel design aesthotbe. Choose light gray (Munaell 6Y7/1) to match the cue, medium gray (Munaell 6Y6/1) or black (Munson N1.8). Panel covers conceal the Urns range and timing function selector knobs. The Umo setting rings can be used with panel covers. Y028.27 Betting a Single Preset In this example, the time setting will be locked at 10 minutes: Select timing function and set unit of measure to 'mine, Install the panel cover. Turn the Urns setting knob to 10. Align the notch on the ring with the tab then press the ring onto the time setting knob, Y92$.28 Limiting the Setting Range In this example, the timing range of 10 to 20 minutes will be locked in using the two rings in Y925.20: Set the tinning function and set unit of measure to *min *. Turn the setting knob to 10. Align the thinner ring's tab with the right side of the panel cover tab. Press the ring onto the time setting knob to set the lower limit. Turn the time setting knob to 20. Align the thicker ring's tab with the left side of the panel cover tab. Press the ring onto the time setting knob to set the upper limit. ■ TIME SETTING RINGS limo setting rings allow the operator to lock In a selected, preset time. They must be used with YO2P Panel Covers. Each ring fits snugly around the Urns setting knob. A notch on the ring engages the tab on the panel cover to prevent setting The hard plastic protective cover prevents accidental resetting. It also shields the front panel from dirt and water. The cover Is Intended tot use In areas where unusual service conditions do not exist. The Y92A•488 cover cannot be used with the Y92P Panel Coven below. Y42s•2e Thick nn9 Y12P.41OL Light Cray Ili no Mkiq Wan TO; !NI bout tune alt wg kna° Yivd `;) Y92S•28 Thin nng Y9t3•4 Time Pipit Mover kiwi Roo knob travel. Omron otters two types of time setting rings in medium gray. The Y028.27 setting ring is used for a angle set point. The Y028.26 pair of rings are used to lock in two set points for a timing range. Rossi lac position Rii1I lock poivWn Panet Cover Ys2P.4$OM Medium Grey H3CR Panel cutout Nora. florommondod pm( Wetness toSWUM Ye2P -uaa Sleek Ring NO WS under ppoi wvN WW, Tb*e stitirit Tvno w ort0 to 20 m }tss s a. 49 a Part number Input Nominal number (no voltage only) ADo t Power supply terminal AC (common), DC- numbers AC (hot , Output temllnai numbers hype Reset Input No•voltage contact closure Interrupts time measurement and reset the operation to start. No ti nro measurement Is made and the control o • ut is OFF while the resat • is ON Goto Start H3CR•A 8 8 7 2 10 Imo contact 1 3 Timed contact 11 9 — � r Star moo H3CR•A8 — • — 2 7 Timed contact 3 Timed contact 0 7 6 1: 1:•lirrk, _, — .- 2 r for — t7 H3CR•AiIE -- — — 2 7 .� Timed contact 1 . ter 1 . 1 3 Instantaneous contact 8 6 •1 it ° T .: Description I111111 Novolta • a contact closure Initiates timing. .. . Reset Input No•voltage contact closure Interrupts time measurement and reset the operation to start. No ti nro measurement Is made and the control o • ut is OFF while the resat • is ON Gate I . No•vofta • a contact closure Inhibits time measurement. Timin, resumes when the • ate i • Is turned OFF. .Control output Relay or transistor Turns ON and OFF when the preset value is reached, according to the operation mode selected. Input type Open collector transistor Voltage when collector is OFF 20 V min, Saturated voltage when transistor is ON I V max. Collector current 50 mA min. Input currant between collector and base 0.5 gA max. Resistance when transistor is ON t kf2 max. Residual voltage when transistor is ON 2 V max. Resistance when transistor is OFF 200 Kt min. Resistance I kA max. Residual voltage 1 V max, when We contact makes Contact pa Capable of switchln, 80 hA at Sat 5 VOC H3CR ■ MOUNTING TRACK AND ACCESSORIES PFP•100N/PFP -50N DIN Rail PFP•M End Plate 62 4.4 MIEN" i OEN ill .ww.w.n.s w.wwww...w lifitill • ■ Y tt! Connections M INPUT /OUTPUT FUNCTIONS N CONNECTION SUMMARY • CONTACT SIGNAL INPUTS Input Signal Requirements t.5 }e 27.. 11 H3CR•A • Start Input contact between terminals 2 and 0. • Reset Input contact between terminals 2 and 7, P Oslo Input contact between terminals 2 and 5. ■ SOLID -STATE SIGNAL INPUTS Input Signal Requirements H3CR -AS Solid -state input signal terminal connections are the same as those for contact signal inputs. . omRon . : H3CR 1.6 H3CR•A 5044state sucwt prosuroty sx 04$0. sensor PFP -S Spacer Solid•State Inputs (NPN or PNP with voltage) Proximity and photoelectric sensors often have NPN or PNP typo solid-state output circuits and rated supply voltages ranging Irom 6 to 30 VDC. A typical NPN connection is shown below. ..• Reset input tent uwts 2 and 7. Gate input terrrnals 2 an0 5. H3CR ------ omRon H3CR Installation a WIRING PRECAUTIONS (H3CR -A) Except for the wiring of the power supply circuit, avoid laying input signal wires in parallel or in the same conduit with high tension or power lines, Use shielded wires or wiring with independent metal conduits for the shortest possible distance. Never touch the input terminals while power is being applied to the Umer to prevent electric shock. An AC power supply can be connected to the power Input terminals without regard to polarity. A DC power supply must be connected to the power input terminals as designated according to the polarity of the terminals. • A DC power supply can be connect if its ripple factor is 20% or less and the mean voltage Is within the rated operating voltage of the timer. Connect the power supply voltage through a relay or switch in such a way that the voltggo reaches a fixed value at once, otherwise the timer may not reset or a timing error could result. • WIRING TRANSISTOR OUTPUTS (H3CR -AS H3CR -A8S) The optoisolated output from the transistor allows both NPN and PNP Input devices to be connected to the H3CR's output. Connect the load to the transistor output (terminals 0 and 11) , eoeording to the NPN or PNP input requirements of the device. For NPN Input °ovine • SETTING CHANGES DURING OPERATION Do not change the time unit, time range or operation mode while the timer Is in operation. This will cause a malfunction. ■ AVOIDING SHORT- CIFRUIT CONDITIONS Parallel Connections When timers are connected in parallel, be sure to connect the same number terminals to each other, Proper Input Connections The neutral or common of the power;supply is connected 10 terminal 2 of the timer. This terminai also used as the common for the input signals. Terminal 10 should be con. netted to the 'hot' or positive of the power supply. Do not use terminal 10 as the common terminal or the timer will be damaged. For PNP Input Devicerr Tinw ►racy Rotation Usnslonrkr 1! NOW Power stagy .� • Use an Isolation transformer for the power supply of an input device. The transformer's primary and secondary windings should be mutually Isolated and the secondary winding not groun(. d. . . It S 51 Time Nnge Time units sec(onds) min(utes) hrs (hours) 10h (10 tours) 1.2 0,08 to 1.2 0.12 to 1.2 0.12 to 1.2 1.2t012 3 12 35 0.3to3 0.3to3 1,2 t o 12 0.3to3 31030 1,2 to 12 1.21012 1210120 • to 30 3 to 30 3010300 0 vim _ 3 Instantaneous output" Mode unct on •1 *say 0 Ropes! cycle/signal OFF start 02 Repeat cle/s1 >nal ON start 0 . ••r, .. ,eay 0 SignalOFF•dolay E ' Interval H3CR , omN on ''"`'; 4 H3CR ?roper Output Connections Design your control circuit using the output relay contacts to switch the load. Never switch a load with the contact that is being used as an input signal. The timer's circuitry may be damaged. More importantly, it is unsafe electrical practice to control a load by switching the common or neutral. Operation a SELECTING TIME RANGES The time unit Is selected by turning the rotary switch located on the front panel in the lower right corner. Choose seconds, minutes, hours or 10 hours. The time range is selected by fuming the rotary switch in the lower left comer. Otal digits appear in the windows around the time setting knob. The table b elo w shows dial digits that appear in the windows for each time range. Use a small flat•blade or Phillips acrewdtfvor. " Set the limo setting tutob to below zero. Use the Instants. noous output to cheat sequential operation of Input and output devices attached to tt►s timer, • SELECTING OPERATION MODES The operation mode of H3CR timers Is selected by turning the rotary switch In the lop right corner of the front panel. Baled the mode using a small nat•blade or Phillips screwdriver. Note that H3CR•A8 and H3CR•At t3 only have Mode A (ON.doisy) and Mode E (Interval). I CAUTIONS Do not change the time unit or lime range while the timer is In operation, Otherwise, the timer may malfunction or be damaged, Do sure to turn off the power supply to the timer before changing any of the selections, rvn m . r+vna oir WWI rM Knvninver •0 at H3CR Mounting a PANEL MOUNTING omRon H3CR Using Y92F -30 Adapter Insert the timer through the panel cutout. Push the Y92F•30 adapter from the rear of the timer u far forward toward the panel as possible. Wire the P3GCIO socket, then push it onto the rear of the timer. Then tighten the two retaining screws. To release the adapter, lift the lab at the tear of the adapter. Several timers may be panel mounted dose together using Y92F•30 adapter as shown here. When mounting two or more timers in a vertical line, arrange the adapters so that their molded tabs are positioned on the right and left skies. When mounting two or more dmers In a horizontal tine, arrange the adapters so that their molded tabs we positioned on the top and bottom sides. ■ TRACK MOUNTING U�Ing P2CF•O13 Socket Mounting The P2CPd70 socket has Iwo hooks that secure the timer to the socket. Se sure to allow at least 20 mm (0.70 In) clearance above and below the socket to gain access and to release the hooks for servicing and maintenance. Insert timer Into the socket. Latch hooks. Than clip rear of the socket to the track. Push the bottom onto the track until the latch hooks securely. t • .1! . Cat. No Lt6•E3.2 20 mm (0.701n) P2CF•I t Of P2CF.08 socket .4 Panel cutout for sIde•b•side mounting of two timers 4s .1sI .. 11.1,23 13.u2 : I Removal Pull the latch on the socket with a flat.biado screwdriver and remove the timer and socket • as ono unit. NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches, divide by 25.4 nor w. With Dew 1 I n lips H• !101 K MO WI Ow 11430 _4 _... CIa * 4650 tlpe _._ . 10 Mil ) JO(11 =11 Jt7U1= 39 XX110 IT 1 fain tr+btMr ttl�y�p� 300iWN N11st I IS10 $ 190 uo 1 20 1 a ks Resin CIO 10433 -2 I ¶ N * !Oren trateln t �,p i1b001 Ir A52P 100 2d It 0117 NH4 ,,��pp�� JCK41= N lcnn Maw id 3 1 1 10 20 I mo _ . • _ _ 0001 NR112 a 0601 NR45 IM1120 100 20 9rnw_ X0 141u NW MO 20 s 0 Kt O E WM) t l� MOMit 411 1170 20 11 Intiade Orde u Mar4 ve MOM to A ox itia NM 110 1 A DII Dorsw i� NAZI 1010 10 ASO MOO ! M! Iona tll 10 /yam X° Vol! NW NM20 IMO lam 1 a0 11543 3 11141106 in A., N443 111,30 00 11544 A$044 .. ... MINI ama 00441 Ter Z t,NfI34 km latremi 5100q 1140 00 A 41 hales = the Il iiN bo► T 1w ilr+ttinM numbly its . tlw,s 1 or M41 N9400 tits 1710 1041 d wieldy 1 10 # Must be ordered ur x Fa the Will Desotialo Type MN III !101 K �Relattter COD, M ! .00 .13 . 10 MI Aoa �i Retainer CIM NO $101 R. I Retainer Clip 14431 43 43 10 10 M ; g3 Resin CIO 10433 0001 RI1044 Reliina Clip N1434 J12 10 9950 NTI3 DIN Ireck Cuba "imam, Use when May am Ii wet than socket best. WldVI a weer is :197 Inches, Recormivind a 41 irW I span barman each Type HR02 or 748002 Mh•n w?tl . _. CNN 0060 hpe PAP'S 0V'g); .. Type NH4 43 10 0001 NRp2 0601 NR43 Socket Connecta. P1 between sock.ls- ref collective poet muuntif N116 =03 10 _ 0001 NR112 a 0601 NR45 Locket End Support,, Use when oafmo o u r tndrvtdwuy __ _ Ratrslnin0 Otr p, . . _ N140 NH7 .43 0.00 10 I .es MPS (NOV) # s1 ached h rtwtlstt.s the ewnWy ks&W M Descnat on G P rice p a;:C'% ..�`' r :' -, x' MN Mounting Track AlN meter s ection a 35mm NT13 $0.00 10 ,! ✓ ;. +t Mounting In/cif-End Clam For use with Type NT13 ON mounting uack. Use of end clamps prpvWes security against movement of devices on mounting track. NTtO 1.341 10 J w tt J W a d w ti X O) Snepmount Sockets 19-62 Class 8501 Type NR sockets are designed for use with plug-In Class 8501 Type K and Typo A relays, Class 8430 Type MPS phase failure relays and Class 9050 Type JCK timers. The NR45 screw terminal sockets have pressure wire clamps that accept 1 or 2 #14.22 wires, All other sockets have pressure clamps that will accept 1 or 2 #12.22 wires. • All Devices Stocked In Central Warehouse • DIN Track Mount or Direct Panel Mount • Ibbular Sockets available in Easy-to-Wire Single Tier or Space= Saving Double Tier Versions t Rated for use use i on Wage rive MPMPO a 44 I �Ii 1/Ott For additional track and end clamps, see page 20 -12. of 10 we buac packaged. Vohs. Rsled 10 Amp. 40 00 rolN by CP2 'Type NR51 Discount Schedule Socket Accessories UUCSAI How lb Order; To Order Specify; e Class Number e Type Number General Purpose Relay Type N — Sockets & Accessorie General & Order Information Class 8501 Type NR82 Type NR41 type NR34 Catalog Number lype NR82 TypearC4P1 NRUF 4v \91° File E64924 1 p . Hs 41135144 CCN SWIV2 Class 321107 Type; NR52F and N$A File 1,804913 Class 321107 Class Type L 1501 J r NR51 B Cede R X t ►k Yes Cede R X Corded Okla Po.liian Yee Mato on side Cede 0 � Op• 2 Corded Okla Po.liian ly and type Mato on side Conga Mock Requited 0 � Op• Corded Okla Po.liian ly and type Mato on side ► ), Left Righ1 lk 2 Led p,OfM IRS!. 4 PM 11 w a.n ' 0!i ; KAI � oa KA3 *2 1 0 0 ' are+urnr 1 1,. A 0 0 0 I I 0 KM O1C KM O.i KAt el 1 0 0 1 ;ow, Tao Vie y O{1 0 o 0 K et 0 t t 0 cA�l a o NNnMfwMnNed .. 1111EMPI OW= QI � / Manuel Mon Opene, !) odde' 1 3X4) 14 vMM, Key (C X Yt'iM+ C .111anMrud ) Knob dine Te6N for OWN Clot, Repent A In Ib 11 K(11 en 02 (H t7 aa code WM 1 WI: Ofdt H a KAt to Ode Vi 144 fKKttl�{{1Z Kl1 (7► .44: Itia w A "Sa� �_ Relieglefl WMI IlleingiK41 C !) 1 ft 1 1 't yy F IN NAW wet V �( oboe) V:11 .:, ..... t r'k G S aaeslm. amnewa wit.anuM alertm k r 4■44imuie hied, imam .M torte 444, ` IM i4 x 0 t am d' Push Buttons Type K — 30.5mrr Heavy Duty Selector Switches Class 9001 4 -58 Non - Illuminated 2 Position Selector Switch Operators -- UL types 4,13/NEMA types 4,13 For use in hazardous locations — See page 449. Legend plate and contact block not included unless noted. ' iw chosen horn ppu 44010AW�il end �of MN combs NN numbs and add MN tool et fhi ¶f number it we tw ilco m Add I * c de shya�iennir�le m woe st n tN►7t10 . GOO bait E Nrpiei II I K(3) Owl Ow key sail lie q► wn to the 414 within • KeIIK3 l AM key *WOW drr,aN a /ironed as sandpit w+W s 0 our** C 10 wy Nay plot nor is 80411'° 1 100. 14.10 E wait) key Otarw 1 70 ablio ) are $Yidahle a n0 mon cow OM ~on W ksytng woeia s we a 4. et is pm 041,44. a bogie muter key. The Oa Oyu e40 g%ampki Fa IndMdwl key, not meter keyed in Cri is shown. The type number to KC11I(*UL AN key OM o opinion, con . s1 d A key, Nye, Relitecim4n Iwo can $ owed y spsatl^n0 thy rsglwed i.e , C I O, For Basic Operators Page 4.84 For Boots Page 4 For Contact Blocks Pages 4.78 - 4.79 For "N" Numbers Page 4 For Lo ®end Plates Pages 4.81 - 4.82 For Lockouts Page 4.63 For Outline Dimensions Pages 4.92 - 4.93 For Retinae Page 4.78 For Replacement Parts Page 4.87 For Ring Nuts Page 4-87 For Cams Page 4-86 CP1 Discount Schedule Selector Switch Knobs (I) Key Wl hdrawsl Cede OINNIMMIN COO( Prot lw+d W+ob Vs 1 1,. EH type vi ye All /II 2 MLA V LIG KM 3 QI � / x 0 t am d' Push Buttons Type K — 30.5mrr Heavy Duty Selector Switches Class 9001 4 -58 Non - Illuminated 2 Position Selector Switch Operators -- UL types 4,13/NEMA types 4,13 For use in hazardous locations — See page 449. Legend plate and contact block not included unless noted. ' iw chosen horn ppu 44010AW�il end �of MN combs NN numbs and add MN tool et fhi ¶f number it we tw ilco m Add I * c de shya�iennir�le m woe st n tN►7t10 . GOO bait E Nrpiei II I K(3) Owl Ow key sail lie q► wn to the 414 within • KeIIK3 l AM key *WOW drr,aN a /ironed as sandpit w+W s 0 our** C 10 wy Nay plot nor is 80411'° 1 100. 14.10 E wait) key Otarw 1 70 ablio ) are $Yidahle a n0 mon cow OM ~on W ksytng woeia s we a 4. et is pm 041,44. a bogie muter key. The Oa Oyu e40 g%ampki Fa IndMdwl key, not meter keyed in Cri is shown. The type number to KC11I(*UL AN key OM o opinion, con . s1 d A key, Nye, Relitecim4n Iwo can $ owed y spsatl^n0 thy rsglwed i.e , C I O, For Basic Operators Page 4.84 For Boots Page 4 For Contact Blocks Pages 4.78 - 4.79 For "N" Numbers Page 4 For Lo ®end Plates Pages 4.81 - 4.82 For Lockouts Page 4.63 For Outline Dimensions Pages 4.92 - 4.93 For Retinae Page 4.78 For Replacement Parts Page 4.87 For Ring Nuts Page 4-87 For Cams Page 4-86 CP1 Discount Schedule Selector Switch Knobs (I) Key Wl hdrawsl Cede Oosonptbn Colo •••• ; . (KAI Price ' (I�A21 - t ?, WZA3 >�: Price WT. • ( kits . $111.20 1L2 0 • IMO ;KR18H1 ' +4.. $34.20 ItKRt : - ; KRI ' • _:1 $25.20 y KRIS .. 21.20 KRtR r Red at 34.20 • KRIRIO " , :f +• 24,4. own zuz...,..4LIA 34.20 lari ' • • t t ' ; } .. 25.20 - KRIGk?+tkit 11.20 KRIUHI3+ 34.20 -A :KKR$ c r, 2540 KRI A 25.20 151ZarEl= 21.20 , - KR38.-.0 = 25.20 *.; **RAW 11.20 11.20 MEN PULL GUARD Olhet ' • " +' + ' 3410 + T • + r ' KR:11MM_ r;- 3410 - KR3BIW - 1 . .1, ,,i1 • fled '• KR3 HI 34.20 .• KR3 .414• ± ^ t Citron , ..` + " :. • + 3440 111 '''` • .i.. 1 23.20 }X, a.,,; ,l 25.20 yw 4; FilaM 11.20 11.20 11.20 P777. Tlija ( KR3UH - , :::: 34.20 ie 1...... `.=7 NO GUARD Ofhot �7' •1 34.20 1111 '' < Ey ^ 7 • f1R1B11 ,.." ... ' .« 25.20 NM!oi}. 8 .1 34.20 Red TL .:„. 34.20 MAW � . KR2R - 25.20 ,;• KIWI I. . 11.20 Otsin : • '+ " e +' . 34•20 +• t '- T .. : • " ,+,.. : 'D 29.20 .>.tKRi(i.# = [1 ; .. " L,,, ,. 34.20 KHNIISt It . + x 21.20 :• • • 'a•.•r 11.20 MENDED GUARD OOMM ' ' +• : ' ,, 'r NO1+Nct- 21.20 t+ KR2 10.20 SNAP IN MUSHROOM SUTTON :1 KR48H % xJ $2.20 811A ?t: ,e :!!?171 -' KIN :.. ,•. 34.20 Rod .r._.:;. t r ..0 12.20 ... •,: . r y, 43.20 i.M.MirsA 31.20 1=raMMII T � �.i._'1 $4.20 Omen �, 4 .1 $1.20 =MN ',3 C 3 Z E r , +. e rr *-- J ` eali + ::.= - ;7 .7.- , .2, , ,, 41.20 KAIR0t i . 43.20 + ;,= 43.20 auzu`1 i 30.20 34.20 34.20 .1 11110:17Z =CM= 0$41 - r: :.'I' ^,; : J $2.20 R{.? - � -,11 17:71717;7,r4 47.10 47.20 43.20 : "rte 34.211 Rod nlma $2.20 1► . p�t Tq 1 '_'_, 7r "T: SL20 Mu1$RO• SUTTON =M rAri12 i 01.20 gi771 ,-.. tr.T . f' :- 7 `• LT:?,' '� S?:.. -;rX* -:; rr,' .±q : -T: %''r S a ,20 CJ I? oirN »1 43•20 i'l?i T71 ..i 1 .Tf:1I x ...11 izzr • Tr - .1M 43.20 43.10 4840 _ T' " vrfq lumo + C V.'"; EL'.:.A -gyp : T; j.,---- •t $1.10 . 1fl f!• '"rI ?: , ,1;7 - " ".': 'I :r.Ti:'• 1 1. 7 j;F' :i 14.10 ti r:' n ' ',."'f:.L1 ;Trr• 7'1 ` . r. *" _J 12.10 'r:Tr:tt^ 17 -'3:'lr'•'j . 43.10 4 3'1'11 43.10 4340 43.20 rt�'•�•�'� . �'• M4+ •.{ 7 1g1717 IN 1f 34.10 34,10 34.20 ` �_ xiil...�iLi...z.•i 1L10 Ir4Ti:irMvIT1TIT •Yr lei►•tPL:'ti aTii•T4ri",7LT•T 16L: r- :.' 1 J.k: 7. %.i 11 Es, l ;1F7,1 11.10 Mr ..= :.� •1 L 1'Tr z1 ,1:i. 'U 3 11.10 'r .-, - -. -,- ---; , -.„ `'T "LaT 'T '' {R l�li_r'd ?j '" 1'(J u.20 e h'DIAMIT MUSHROOM SUTTON =am rirr 12.30 + `'1 'T:S r�� imL.''? 43.10 ' 1-1 '+t 34.30 Cob/ Choose Cola and 3 , Code in iype Number (4 Choose Colo( a iJ Pl4 Color Code in • Number alt Motor c6' t . . E I. . S OPERATOR INTERFP ^F. 30.5 MM HEAVY DUTY OILTIGHT/WATERTIGHT OPERATORS TYPE K CLASS 9001 13 1 TM universal push button opwatots I0ntaln ono each of IM following cola insert... black, red, (peen, yellow, aaige, blue and while, t Actable below, J mob has the words "emergency Stop" in ratted letter highlighted N white for nadab4ity, 4 Soo ION below, I TMta ooeratat can be ado* complete with COMM blocks -, la matimum block usage - in page 1 3.64, Add the "N" number chosen iron page 13'10 to the end of the operaltx typo numb* end add IM cos! W t "H" number lo IM operator cost, UItAMPI,Ci K03411( 34. 30) 4H1(2- KA1)(31.00) ■KR24SH1(70.20) 13.26 NON-ILLUMINATED MOMENTARY PUSH BUTTON OPERATORS - UL TYPES 4,13 (NEMA 4,13) CONTACT BLOCKS AND LEGEND PLATE NOY INCLUDED UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED CP1 DISCOUNT SCHEDULE For Basic Operators - See page 13.64. For Boots - See page 13.53. For Contact Blocks -• See page 1348. For "H" Numbers - See page 13.50. For Legend Plates See pages 13 +51.1352. For Lockouts -- See page 13.53. For Outline Dimensions -- See pages 13.57 .13.50, For Ratings - See page 13.48. For Replacement Parts -- See page 13.56. For Ring Nuts - See page 1356, 13 f 17Ne Symbol Caws WM (nst ffindor res Blocks i S4 Stows Price Gold Fashod Contacts Name, Wks Tom**Is Typo Ouanty Tyos Pries o 0 KA2I 2S-Upa 314. !WI CIO. asJor 0 0 KA22 2S4Upa 9. KA32 it LLs 1023 2S4/0• 9. KA33 1!. "La 11 N air 024 -- — — 2&-Ups -- — IS KA31 30. Ili LW KASS 334J*• !, KA3S II. Description Symbol Typo Pnts r . f . a,+�i O O Km St I, ! L; KAI 9. • .' als KM 9, . Ala • _O N. 0, Contact Cis KM 1!, t , u ' ale N C. Contact Lai* • • . KAS !, INS r trim �YJ N � 0: .Cen$ uI CIO K44 !, VWts D•w'oaan Type Pnc• Intuctivs 1NEMA 4001 rt 35•. Power Factor Pa use n halartlo4s locations or *hire RF1 or EMI 4 a probl•m. This swtr h mo4W can W Tux l WC on any morMi P * 0nt nAr Por14n4 Om? normaay 04rk po mere snlgrmabon on tna cOnt0411 fiber Opn' iytlent ifs oagt 4 , 1 }4. KA7j $1 3. VWts AC Volts DC Intuctivs 1NEMA 4001 rt 35•. Power Factor Resistive 75 %. Power Factor Make. Break and Continuous Amperes Inductive and Re sistive Make Break Conwwous Carry&ng Amperes !dais and Break Coruvwous Carryng Amperes A,rperes VA . knows* ______.• I vA 1 KA1 KA2 K,43 1 CA 4 KA 5 KA6 120 240 480 600 60 30 15 12 6 3 1 5 1 2 I O O O Q IS. 10 t0 10 10 10 10 10 t0 125 250 600 1 1 o 55 02 1.1 0 55 02 1.1 1.1 0 55 0 2 10 10 JO Push Buttons Types K, SK, KX, and T - '.5mm Contact Blocks Class 9001 4 -78 Standard Contact Blocks Additional Circuit Arrangements Available N, c., of KM dome Wore N.O, Lia NY" • • KM KAI and Ott* Ono Too 0 T Y p KAI OvitnaPPinSo " K i4 Contact a Ala iLl u , a aloe N C. type KA3 Corium • a KM KM a_push Mon; or Iwo position Wooer 41 t pes a SK I I ok $5 a a t SWISS, , K K834, K a 1114 11 J, K a SSW, WJ, K a IOW brie K a DKSMJ) ant • rot a overtatppvtg carious on sow otwata c t = •nMNl Was Igwr• 0 Dabs Fiber Optic Switch Module The Class 9001 Type KA contact blocks have been improved. The most noticeable change is that the terminals are Fingersafetw (meet VDE 0106 Part 100). They also have one screw mounting and captive backed out plus/minus terminal screws. These contact blocks still use the same reliable double break direct acting contacts used since 1965. Because of the wiping action of these contacts, they are suitable for use with programmable controllers, All contact blocks listed below will accept up to 2 #12.#24 solid or stranded wires. 27, . Mrolrrtn orOr OWN) b 2!. Contact Blocks Listed Below Are Not Fingersale, Out Provides • Terminals that accept ring longuo/lork tongue connectors • Shod single circuit contact blocks (.76` deep vs, or deep on the Fingarsalo) • Same as old style Series t3 product available prior to March, 1060. Dimensions Maximum Block Usage Maximum Current Ratings For Control Circuit Contacts -- Types KAi•KA6,,KA21.25, KA31.35, KAIG•KA6G CP1 Discount Schedule D Page 4.92 Page 4,84 Push Buttons XB2 B 22mm Pilot Lights 4 -26 Standard Push to test Glass lens (NINA 1 only) 5pec1al Ions for neon bulbs TO ORDER TELEMECANIQUE PRODUCTS, SPECIFY QUANTITY AND CATALOG NUMBER. Operators Type .(teen.. • _282 Red , . . Z82 BUN Amber Blue. . . Clear_ Push to test Green Amber Otass lens (NM 1 only) Red Amp r Standard Special lens for neon bulbs ©teen M10er ZS1 CI" 1100 For neon bulbs. please IN R� Y82 8V O43 socessoMS, pegs 4.33. , '� D V :I pyist IIRP b Transformer type 1.2VAIOV bulb Included. Restate, type 130V bulb Included. 220180V wA 2D2 d Mounting base with contact blocks NO 0 - 1 -6 NC gig Typo Direct supply bulb Included. Resistor typo 120V bulb Included 220 rt ct blocks _ ._ t _ 111112911.---1119 *Complete catalog number by adding one of the todowing voltages; 0, 12, 24, 46 of 120V. If desired without bulb, omit voltage and deduct 65.00 from list Price, Transformer type 1.2VNOV bulb Included. n Pricing example: Catalog number Price Operator standard clear lens Z82 8V97 S3.50 + Discount Schedule Color Catalog umb teethe( liTolomecanlque! Price S3.50 3.50 282 BVOS 3.50 2 B _ ,_202 teen - __ _ Z82 0V031, .... __.6.00 .... . _Z 8 29VO4 i.. _ _......._ 00 . _2: ileac moll__ _AA Simon_ _ SVO42 _____ _ — tt O 1 . Contacts NO NC ()ired supply base Z82 8V6-120V 522.50 ... Catalog number 'Complete part number by supplying Ong 01 the loliowing numbers to specify voltage: I (24V 50/00 Ht) 2 (45V 50100 Hi) 3 (110/120V 54160 Ha) 94 (22(44OV 60 Hi) 95 (440480V 60 Hi) 90 (550/000V 60 Ht). (:sample: 7.82•0W03t 2 t 10V /50H4 4r 120V /60H1 `. Complete unit 526.00 Price _1_ : ± a► i ®wQ�a O4.00 4 FT. 4 LAMP RECESSED FLUORESCENT LIGHTING Third Party Listed mut Listed; 1570 00pen Type, General Purpose 020 Gauge Corrosion-Resistant White Enamel Finished Steel 'Compatible With Most Major Brands of Paint Booths Rear Access Model #390228 ) ■ Hinged rear door for easy access to lamps and ballasts. ■ Available in 40 or 60 watt, multiple voltages (consult factory). ■ Fixture must be mounted behind stationary lens for paint spray booth application. 12 lamp model available. A LPL. Inc. 1995 . Form 106 Front Access Model #390227+ ■ 1 piece,' die formed construction. ■ Available in 40 watt only. ■ Fixture must be mounted behind stationary lens for paint spray booth application, ■ 2 lamp model available, LOPI Co. Div. of LPI Inc. ' 800 Wisconsin St. • Mail Box 10 Eau Claire WI 54703 -8607 D Toll Free 1 -800- 657 -6956 • Fax 715 -839 -8647 INSTALLATION HARDWARE KIT (P/N 30.016) Item Description Qty. 1.... x 3/4" Open Cell Gasket 12' 2.... Light Clip 4 3.... Glass Clip 2 •4 ... Cleer Tempered Glass 3/18" x 18" x 53" 1 5....1 1/2" x 1 112" Comer Bracket 4 8.... Frame (15 3l4" Long) 2 7.... Frame (53 1/2" Long) 2 8.... 1/8" Pop Rivet 8 9.... 1/4 - 20 Una. x 314" Capscrow S Nut 10 Hole Template (12 1/2" x 50 1/4") 1 Installation Sketch 1 'Note: Itom 4 (P/N 1706) Is optlonaL Model #390220 4 Ft. 4-Lamp Rear Access Fluorescent Light Fixture s L— sr Not �Nuded In INSTALLATION DIAGRAM FOR 390228 & 390227 LIGHT FIXTURES Not Included In tit Inner Surface of Panel See Detail A•1 Model #390227 4 Ft. 4 -Lamp Front Access Fluorescent Light Fixture Not Included In Kit FIXTURE OPTIONS: • Low temperature ballasts ( -20 °F) IN Energy efficient ballasts • 50 Hz ballasts (115 or 220 volt) • 2 end wire connectors for through feed wiring (front access fixture only) • Consult factory rep for options not listed HE AVY = DUTy.EXHAUBT UNITS = pIMEN APE IFIOATIONB . '` ;i ; N oisy ` • _"A"f.' B 1►; ?' .v" V, s! • :° t `.;. gam: •1, !R ', .. "cilif „ 6049 SUN 18' 16.1/6 21.1/6 194/6 10' 7/16' 6 74 6449 S, ' 16' 16.1/6 21.1/8 194/6 16' 7/16' 6 74 6049 80 10' 16.1/6 21.1/6 194/5 16' 7/16' 6 74 6049 CO 24' 24.1/0 270/6 25.5/6 10' 7/10' 12 105 5049 GIMCE 24' 24.1/0 27.1/5 3505/8 16' 7/10' 12 105 8049 CF&CH 24' 24.1/5 27.1/5 354/8 10, 7/16' 12 105 6949 DE 27' 27.1/6 31.1/6 29.1/6 16' 7/16' 16 112 6049 DF&DH 27' 27 31.1/8 29.1/8 10' 7/16' 16 112 8049 EF, EH, EJ liEK 34' 34.1/8 38.1/5 30.1/8 24' 7/16' 16 190 8049 FHbFJ 42' 42.1/5 40.1/6 44.1/5 24' 7/10' 24 304 8049 FMFI, 42' 42.1/9 46.1/0 44.1/5 24' 7/16' 24 304 80491 48' 48.1/5 52.1/8 50-1/8 2 7/16' 24 395 0049 HK4.HI. 48' 48.1/5 52.1/5 50 -1/8 24' 7/16' 24 395 HEAVY DUTY EXHAUST UNITS Approved for General and Hazardous Locations ■ HEAVY " DUTY EXHAUST UNITS JBI Heavy Duty Exhaust Units lend themselves particularly well to spray booth, window, wall and roof located exhaust equipment installations, Since mounting can be either vertical or horizon- tal position, complicated piping connections can be advantageously avoided, These economical exhaust units afford a practical and safe means of ventilation for spray booths, ovens and other industrial equipment. These quality exhaust units are compact and easy to install. ■ CONSTRUCTION FEATURES JBI Heavy - Duty Exhaust Units are built to moot all requirements of the National poard of Fire Underwriters, local and state fire and health regulations and are listed and approved by Fac- tory Mutual Laboratories. Models are available In most capacity ratings to meet individual needs over a wide range of commercial and industrial ventilation requirements, • STANDARD FEATURES • Precision ground stool shaft, • Heavy gauge steel band and mounting ring. • Motor belt tension easily adjusted to accom- modate various size sheaves. • V -belt drive is completely protected from harm ful elements within duct area. • Rugged, vapor -tight drive enclosure, con- taminated exhaust cannot escape. • Balanced high -tech polypropylene spark and corrosion resistant fan blades, • Standard blades, -40° F to +185° F, also available in fiberglass poiyamido blades, -50° F to +250° F, • Double row ball bowing assembly we virtually service Tree, I Adjustable for proper belt tension. CONSTA•FLOWnw ' t ..,,, >. Fan size ' Part Number fly. 24' 27' 3 42' 48' __ CF-18 CF -24 CF -27 CF -34 CF -42 CF -48 - .1V - ;- AUTO = ALANCETM - °� tit' f'.,';'.. • Fan size _ ." ' - Part Number 18' =18 24' A8 -24 27' AB -27 34' AB -34 42' AS -42 48' AB -48 HEAVY- DUT'r EXHAUST UNITS Exhaust Fan Performance Chart Eon odel 8049.88 8049-80 8049.8D 8049 -CC 8049 -CD 8049 -CE 8049 -CF 8049 -CH 8049 -DE 8049 -DF 8049 -DH 8049 -EF 8049 -EH 8049 -EJ 8049 -EK 8049 -FH 8049 -FJ 8049•FK 8049 -FL 8049 -NH 8049-HJ 8049 -HK 8049 -HL 18' 18' 18' 24' 24' 24' 24' 24' 27' 27' 27' 34' 34' 34' 34' 42' 42' 42' 42' 48' 48' 48' 48' 1/3 1/2 3/4 112 3/4 1 11/2 2 1 11■2 2 11/2 2 3 5 2 3 5 71/2 2 3 8 714 1,495 1,725 1,840 1,294 1,510 1,725 1,617 1,725 1,725 1,510 1,617 1,050 1,160 1,340 1,495 1,108 1,232 1,478 1,683 988 1,084 1,305 1,490 3,540 3,750 4,125 5.850 6,800 7,800 8,200 9,070 10,150 11,900 12,300 14,200 15,800 18,000 22,800 20,000 22,200 28,800 30,200 24,900 28,150 33,100 38,000 CONSTA - FLOW' Automatically monitors and adjusts exhaust airflow to maintain a constant booth air velocity over a range of filter loading. Benefits: 1. Improves transfer efficiency. 2. Increases useful exhaust filter life, 3. Maintains capture velocities In booth openings. Includes: 1. Variable frequency drives. 2. Airflow sensing section. 3. Combination differential pressure gauge and controls for monitoring and adjusting booth airflow. )U,T gng S',T IT M +►era9s_ 7RS. r._ t iW 37 2,850 3,185 3,600 4,550 5,750 8,800 7,500 8,460 8,740 9,750 10,500 11,900 13,700 16,100 20,600 16,600 19,400 24,200 28,000 20,600 24,200 29,850 35,850 8te11C Miss. 2,420 2,640 3,120 2,800 5,050 8,200 7,050 8,060 7,920 8,750 9,800 10,750 12,700 15,400 19,200 14,700 17,800 23,000 28,900 18,250 22,250 28,180 33,850 1,925 2,230 2,650 1,800 3,200 5,250 6,550 7,650 6,650 7,700 8,800 9,400 11,550 14,200 18,800 12,500 15,000 21,500 25,700 15,850 20,150 28,450 32,150 810 1,030 1,720 2,000 3,300 4,700 6,350 3,125 5,600 8,400 6,750 9,300 12,350 15,900 8,000 12,000 18,500 23,300 10,350 15,850 22,950 20,150 1,325 1,875 3,050 4,480 1,650 3,400 4,700 3,600 6,750 10,300 12,500 8,000 15,100 20,700 10,950 19,250 28,100 S Pre 3,750 8,250 9,800 4,300 11,600 17,900 15,250 22,980 E JBI AIR BALANCING SYSTEMS AUTO - BALANCE"' Designed for use on totally enclosed pressurized paint booths, Interlorbooth pressure Is constantly monitored and the volume of exhaust air is auto- matically Increased or decreased in relation to the supply air volume, to maintain either a positive or negative interior booth pressure, Benefits: 1. Increased useful exhaust filter life, 2. Constant booth airflow, 3, Ability to control booth pressure. Includes: 1. Variable frequency drives. 2. Differential pressure gauge with controls for monitoring and adjusting booth pressure, 3, Static pressure sensing probes. New exhaust fans and motors will be required on retro -fits, 103 '= .,103 103 134 134 134 134 134 146 146 146 237 237 237 237 302 302 302 302 380 380 360 380 ELECTRIC MOTORS For Spray Booth Exhaust Fans and Pumps TEFC Motor • TEFC MOTORS I JBI guarantees quality performance by provid- ing the best components. For that reason Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled Motors are standard In all JBI products. TEFC motors are superior to opon•drip typo motors and are UL approved. 1/3 1/2 3/4 1 11/2 2 3 6 71/2 10 15 i177 TTT 234.012 234=013 234.014 234 =016 234.002 234 =048 234 =018 234 =019 234 =081 • so 60 6o 50 145T 50Hz 184T 213T 216T • se so I 68 60 1451' 1467' 1821' 184T 2131' 216T 254T 234 =001 234=002 234 =003 234.006 234 =000 234 =007 234 =008 234 =009 234.010 234 =011 234 =063 1 f 1'11 • TEFC AND EXPLOSION PROOF MOTOR FEATURES Explosion Proof Motor • EXPLOSION PROOF MOTORS A safety feature for hazardous locations. UL approved for Class 1, Group D, Class 2, Group F & 0. Corrosion resistant epoxy finish. Explo- sion proof motors feature a cast UL approved conduit box • standard. 1.00 S.F. r1 1,717 .7r rirr" TIT 1/3 1/2 3/4 1 11/2 2 3 5 71/2 10 234=033 234=034 234 =036 234 =030 234037 234 =038 • • • 68 68 68 50 1847' 1821' 1821' 1847' 2131' • 2151' 234 =021 234 =022 234 =023 234026 234 =020 234 =027 234 =028 234029 234 =030 234 =031 50 50 50 143T 146T 145T 182T 184T 213T 215T All JBI AC, polyphase induction motors are standard NEMA frame bases and are available in Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled and Explosion Proof types. All motors feature ball bearing construction. Rotors and shafts are dynamically balanced to assure smooth, vibration-free operation. Inner races are locked to shaft, outer races to end bracket, reducing end play and maintaining alignment for V•belt drives. Windings are designed for long dependable life under adverse operating conditions. Integral rotor fans in enclosed types direct cooling air over windings - reducing noise and prolonging motor life. Conduit boxes have ample hand room for easy accessibility and quick connection of leads. All motors conform to state and local fire and safety regulations, and may be mounted in either vertical or horizontal position. Motor rated for exhaust fan units (at 1750 RPM). Various RPM motors are also available. u§ JBI INCORPORATED .. PM V BooTHs & SYSTEMS 1717 Omaha Street, Osseo, WI 54758, Phone (715) 597 - 3168, FAX (715) 597 -2193 MOTOR Frame: 56 HP: 1/2 RPM 1750 Cycle: 60 HZ Phases 3 Voltage: 208 - 230/460 Amps: 11.0/5.4 -5.5 Enclosure: TEFC PAS Color: GRAY Type: ENAMEL =dent.: 236 -011 FAN MODEL # 8049 -BC -3015 DRIVEN= SHEAVES: Drive (motor) Size: 1VL40x5/8 Part #213 -051 Driven (fan) Size: AS 32x3/4 Part #213 -039 Bushing (fan) Sizes JA x 3/4 Part #213 -086 BELTS: Sizes 4L440 OPKRATING RPM: Quantity: 1 Part #211 -004 1,500 ASSEMBLED BY; DATE; SPECIAL REMARKS; FAN_BLADE Model # 17 -8 -3L -PPG Assembly # 640 -002 Blade # 210 -012 Locking Pin # 210 -025 Blank Plug # 210 -024 BEARXNC3 8OE1SXNG Assembly # 212 -100 MQTO R 8A88 Assembly # 212 -002 OPTIONAL =WA ig Internal steel frame. All welded. It springs into place, and stays there. INTAKE FILTER No matter. internal wire support and heat. sealed seams won't let media flutter. Prevents the vibration that's the major cause of dirt, unloading and fiber breakoff. Long service life. Substantially outlasts other filters and spreads installation and replace- ment costs over a longer lifetime. The Series 55* Panel Filter High Efficiency No fiber breakoff. Two plys of tough, resilient polyester fibers. Not brittle like glass fibers. Reduced labor coats. Fits frames fast without adaptors or sharp edges, Change panels quickly, easily. A better tacisifier. You can even feel the difference, Won't dry out, And it stays in place. Won't drip or blow off, U.L. Classified. Flammability is rated Class 2 923X. No Gap. ` A i gap around a filter passes as much dirty air as a 3' dia. hole right in the middle. Series 55 filters fit tight, prevent bypass of the dirty air (up to 25 or 3O'41) loose filter frames don't st op. Self•sealing gasket, Filter media overlap in a self.sealing edge that fits flush with holding frame, High efficiency. Panels extract 100% of visible atmos' pheric dust and remove 90% of 5 micron particles. A good filter costs less than a bad finish. That's why Viskon•Aire® Series 55* Panel Filters are standard equip• ment from all leading paint spray booth suppliers and why they're specified as replacement filters by major auto, truck, aircraft, and other metal finishers whose quality is critical. OUR SERIES 55* Panel Filters can help you too. They will cut down on paint defects and high finishing costs. They clean your spray booth air of particles down to 5 microns with 90% efficiency. You can't even see particles less than 40 microns. Particle Size Microns Air Supply Spray Booth Filters Reduce paint rejects with... VISKONA1RE® DOW It .. i • te a . j s X 1 i- •� % •- c • 7 • ., The Difference Between . , - -4 Air Supply a n el Filt anal Pain t Arrestor. F il t er s :1 i-;• • Air supply filters are to be used in the paint spray booth doors or in the air supply plenum. Their purpos 'is-to prevent dust particles from entering the booth and ruining costly paint jobs. , Paint arrestor filters are to be used in the exhaust plenums , u�lly found in the rear of the booth. Their purpose is to capture the paint overspray •and prey nt paint build up in the stacks and exhaust fans. The Series 55' Panel Filter and the DustMaster* filter both cost less to use and maintain thanather'panel filters because they utilize oversize pads and internal wire frames to insure a tight seal and proper fit. Just push in to • install and pull out to change. No special hardware or masking is needed. All Series 55 and DustMaster filters come in proper put.ups, too, so you can get only the correct number of filters you need. - All Series 55* and DustMaster* Panel Filters can be shipped via UPS eResistered Trademark of Viskon•Aire Corp., Salisbury, MD 21801 *Trademark, Viskon•Aire Corp. Initial Resistance Chart Illustrates results of a test run by an independent testing laboratory on the initial resistance of filters over a wide range of air velocities, r .41 . Fig. 13.1. Mark II Model No. 25 I inclined•vertical manometer. . (shown with optional A.612 portable stand) Fig. 13.2. Mark II Model No. 40.1 Inclined manometer. /11044 K' . `. .... ib A I►6 slot Fig. 13.3. Model 25 $41105 Ranges & Specifications. q t . Dimensions -H •. Note Fig. 13.4. Model 40 Series Ranges & Specifications. MARK II MOLDED 'LASTIC MANOMETERS 3% ACCURACY FOR STATIONARY AND PORTABLE APPLICATIONS AT MINIMUM COST Dwyer Mark II series molded manometers are of the inclined and inclined- vertical types. The curved inclined - vertical tube of the Model 25 gage provides higher ranges with more easily read in- crements at low readings. The Model 25 is excellent for general - purpose work. The Model 40 inclined gage provides linear cal - ibration and excellent resolution throughout its range.The Model 40 is ideally suited for air velocity and air filter gage applications. Both gage types are capable of pressure measurements above and below atmospheric as well as differential pressure measurements. Construction — Mark II manometers are economically priced, compact and available in both stationary and portable configure. tions. Portable stand is standard on Model 40, available as o tional A.612 stand for Model 25. Construction is simple with vir- tually indestructible molded white styrene•acrylonitrile housing, indicating tube and fluid wells, molded ABS knobs and zero ad- just plunger shock mounted glass level vial and leak proof "0 ". ring seals. Moderate overpressures are accommodated by an over flow tank incorporated in the Model 25. Greater protection is provided by float operated overflow traps in the Model 40. Scales are lithograph printed on aluminum and epoxy coated. Installation -- Mark 11 manometers can be mounted on any verti- cal surface with the two mounting screws rovided. A built-in spirit level simplifies leveling before mounting screws are tight- ened. Simply fill the reservoir, adjust fluid level to zero, connect the tubing, and the gage is ready for operation. Accessories — Included with each Mark II manometer are two tubing connectors for V? pipe or sheet metal ducts two mounting screws, 3 /4 ounce bottle of indicating fluid, red and green pointer flags and complete instructions, The Model 25 also includes 8 feet of flexible double column lastic tubing, Portable operation of the Model 2511 made pouible the use o the options A.612 p rtable stand, A short piece of to ing can be slipped over the Model 25 pressure connections to contain the gage oil in transit, The Model 40 contains two 4V4 foot lengths of clear plastic tubing, a plastic swing•out stand and leveling screw for opera- tion. It also features convenient rapid shutoff pressure connec• tions and integral overpressure safety traps. OEM Specials — All Dwyer Mark II molded plastic manometers can be supplied in OEM quantities with your name or special graphics and scales. Model Range ' 25 0.3 inches water column 26 0.7 inches water column MM.80 0.80 millimeters W /C. MM. 180 0.180 millimeters W.C. M•70Q,Pa 10.0.700 Pascals 2P 0.70001pm • Specifications Accuracy; a 3% full scale • , Mailroom working tomperaturo; Maximum internal working praxuret 10 psi (70 kPa) 140'F. (60°C) t Model 40.1 40.1•AV• 41.2 41.2•AV• 40.250 Pa 40-250 Pa-AV 41.600 Pe 40.25 mm 41.60 mm 011 Fluid Requirements uses .826 ip. gr. (red oil) uses 1.9 sp. gr. (blue oil) uses .826 sp. gr. (red oil) uses 1.9 sp. gr. (blue oil). uses .826 sp. gr, (red oil) uses .826 sp. gr. (red oil) 28• 0.10, 5001pm uses 1.9 ep. gr. (blue oil) 'Requital a pitot lubo at additional cost, he eultetin N • $00. Operating Rang • • • • • . . •s e•-•••• • e, '..1ti1M+ e- -•• •. z •• • Operating Ranges • Range Minor Grads .10.0.1.00' W.C. .01' W,C. 0.1.10' W.C. .01' W,C. 0.4200 f pm .20.0.2.40' W.C. 0.2.50' W.C. 0.6300 fpm 10.0.250 Pa 0.260 Pa 0 -21 mps 20 - 0 - 600 Pa 0.26 mm W.C. 0.60 mm W.C. Fluid Requirements .826 ap, F. (red oil) .826 sp. gr. (red oil) varies . • • .02' W.C. 1.910 Sp. Sr. (blue oil .02' W.C.. • • 1.910 sp. gr. (blue oil) varies 2 Pa .826 sp. gr. (red oil) 2 Pa .826 sp. gr. (red oil) varies 5 Pa 1.910 sp. gr. (blue oil) 2 mm W.C. .826 sp. gr: (red oil) 5 mm W.C. 1.910 sp. gr. (blue oil) 'Requites a pitot tube at aCaitionat cost. See Bulletin H•100. Specifications Accuracy: = 3% lull scale Maximum working temperature:130'F (54•C) Maximum internal working pressure: 15 psi (100 kPa) Scale length: Approx. 8V. (21 centimeters) Pressure is defined as a force per unit area -- and the most accurate way to measure low air pressure is to balance a col- umn of liquid of known weight against it and measure the height of the liquid column so balanced. The units of measure commonly used are inches of mercury (in. Hg.), using mercury as the fluid and inches of water (in. W.C.), using water or oil as the fluid, • 4 3 2 I 0 I 2 3 FIg. 24. Ih its simplest form the manometer Is a U'tube ebout half filled with liquid, With both ends of the: tube open, the liquid is at the some height in each log. I 4 3 2 I 0 2 3- Fig. 2.2. When positive pressure is applied to one leg, the liquid is forced down in that log and up in the other. The difference in height, "h," which is the sum of the readings above and below zero, indicates the pressure. VACUUM 3 0 FIg. 2.3. When a vacuum Is ap• plied to one leg, the liquid rises In that leg and falls in the other. The difference In height, "h," which is the sum of the readings above and below zero, indicates the amount of MUM While the basic manometer principle of hydrostatic balance is inherently 100% accurate there are factors that can affect the actual pressure measurement obtained. Careful design and construction plus careful usage can eliminate or greatly re- duo the affect of these factors, CHARACTERISTICS OF INDICATING FLUID. No manometer can be read more accurately than the accuracy with which the specific gravity of the fluid is known,The fluid must also have good "wetting" characteristics and be capable of forming a consistent, well shaped meniscus in the indicating tube to fa- cilitate accurate, repeatable readings. The fluid used also affects the operating range of the ma- nometer, Mercury being 13.6 times the weight of water will move 1113.6th the distance water will move in response to a given pressure. Dwyer .826 sp. gr. gage oil being lighter than water will move about 1.2 times farther than water in response to a given pressure. This, obviously, expands the scale for easier, more precise reading. Dwyer U -tube and well -type manometers are furnished with inch scales for use with water or mercury or adjusted scales for use with .826 sp. gr. gage oil. Dwyer solid plastic vertical, inclined and inclined - vertical gages use gage oil. SUREMENT OF PRESSURE WITH THE MANOMETER Instruments employing this principle are called manome- ters. The simplest form is the basic and well -known U-tube manometer. (Fig. 2.1).This device indicates the difference be- tween two pressures (differential pressure), or between a sin- gle pressure and atmosphere (gage pressure), when one side is open to atmosphere. If a U -tube is filled to the half way point with water and air pressure is exerted on one of the columns, the fluid will be displaced.Thus one leg of water column will rise and the other falls.The difference in height "h" which is the mum of the read- ings above and below the halfway point, indicates the pressure in inches of water column. The U -tube manometer is a primary standard because the difference in height between the two columns is always a true indication of the pressure regardless of variations in the inter- Fig. 24. At left, equal pressure is imposed on the fluid In the well and in the indicating tube. Reading is zero, At the right, a positive pressure has been Im' posed on the liquid In the well causing the level to go down very slightly. liquid level In indicating tube has risen substantially. Reading Is taken directly from scale at liquid level in indicating tubs. The scale has boon compensated for the drop In level In the well. MINIM!. MB FACTORS AFFECTING MANOMETER' Dwyer colored gage oil is a stable petroleum base oil with carefully controlled specific gravity which gives an excellent, consistent, high visibility meniscus. Dwyer manometers for use with water are furnished with a fluorescein green concen- trate which when added to water serves as a wetting agent and a dye to improve the consistency and visibility of the menitcus for easier, more accurate readability. READABILITY. As we have seen, inclining the indicating tube and scale of a manometer, the use of lower specific gravity indicating fluids and the use of fluids that give a uniform, well defined meniscus facilitate accurate reading. Scales must be clear, sharp, accurate and easy to read. For accuracy, it is essen- 11 1I11111i, . 1 MFG. Co. CAUTION: • 45E ONO CITY, INC. CLEAN ONLY WITH, MIA Fig, 2.5. Portion of the scale al a Dwyer No. 250.5 solid plastic inclined manometer shown full size. Parallax free reading is made by aligning meniscus with its reflection in the polished scale. nal diameter of the tubing. This principle makes even the Dwyer Slack -Tube* roll•up manometer as accurate as a labo- rfitory instrument.This provides a real convenience to the man who might otherwise have to board an airplane carrying a 60" long rigid glass U-tube manometer. VARIATIONS IN MANOMETER DESIGN To overcome the U-tube requirement of readings at two differ- ent; places, the well-type manometer was developed. See Fig. 2.4.The reservoir (well) may be made large enough so that the change of level in the reservoir is negligible, or the scale may be compensated for the change in 'reservoir liquid level. For purposes of a more practical instrument the Dwyer well-type manometer uses a precision bored well that requires approx- imately a 10% scale correction for well drop effect, thus avoid- ing an overly large and bulky reservoir. Tb'improve and expand readability, certain Dwyer U-tube - and well-type manometers are available with a .826 sp. gr. red oil indicating fluid, and scales compensated to read pressure directly in inches of water.To further increase readability and sensitivity the well -type manometer indicating tube is in- alined, as in Fig. 3.1, to cause a greater linear movement along the tube for a given pressure difference.The inclined manome- ter is frequently called a Draft Gage because it is widely used for determining the overtire draft in boiler uptakes and flues. Fig, 3.1, At left, aquel pressure is Imposed on the liquid In the well and the indicating tube. Reading Is zero. At the right, a positive pressure hos been Im. posed on the liquid In the Indlcating tube pushing It down to a poll it on the scale equal to the pressure. Liquid loves ip the well rises proportionately. Inclining the Indicot1n1 tube has opened up the stele to permit more preclio reading of the pressure. gERFORMANCE AND USAGE. tial that the readings be made with the lino of sight perpen- dlcular to the fluid column to eliminate parallax error. Dwyer solid plastic manometers assure parallax•ree read- ings by the use of eilk•screened scales an polished aluminum which reflect the image of the'meniscus. When the meniscus and Its reflection are aligned, the line of sight is perpendicular to the fluid column'at the meniscus and an accurate reading is assured. Smoothly machined bores further enhance the vin ibility of the meniscus. LEVELING. Accurate readings with inclined and inclined-ver- tical manometers require that the inclined portion of the scale be at the exact angle for which it is designed. All Dwyer solid plastic inclined and inclined vertical manometers are equipped with integral, sensitive spirit levels to facilitate this requirement; most also have a screw type leveling adjustment. FACTORS IN DESIGN AND MANUFACTURE THAT AFFECT INCLINED MANOMETER ACCURACY 1, "Well Drop" (ratio of the area of the reservoir to the area of the indicating tube). As the fluid rises or falls in the indicating tube the level in the reservoir will fall or rise correspondingly and the scale must be compensated accordingly. Inaccuracies in the diameter of the reservoir or the indicating tube will For an inclined manometer to be a primary device, the in- clined tube must be straight and uniform. Dwyer's precision machined solid plastic construction has been applied to a basic line .of rugged. manometers, inclined and inctined•vertical which are industry accepted as primary instruments. See din. cussion below. The combination of an inclined and a vertical manometer is very useful in air movement determination. See Fig. 3.2. For air velocity measurement, an inclined scale, generally up to r W.C. is used (r W.C. velocity pressure 4000 fpm). In the Dwyer Durablockb inclined-vertical instrument, this scale is combined 'with a vertical section allowing readings of high pressures, usually 1" W.C. to 5 or 10" WC., to be taken. The vertical section is used primarily for determining static pres- sures above the range of of the inclined section. • Many special purpose types of manometers exist. Examples are the Dwyer Hook Gage and Microtectors.These are simply U -tube manometers modifled so the liquid level can be read with a micrometer, yet retaining the basic "Physics" of the hydrostatic U -tube primary standard. Readings accurate to sr .001" W.C. in a range of differential pressures from 0.24' W.C. are accomplished with Dwyer Model No. 1425.24 Hook Gage, The Model 1430 Microtectort incorporates modern electronics to increase the accuracy of readings to .00025" WC. on a 2" W.C. scale. If Fig, 3.2. At left with equal pressure on liquid In well and Indicating tube, reading is zero. When positive pressure is Imposed on liquid In indicating tube, liquid level Is depressed In tube and rises slightly In well. Reading Is direct since scale is compensated for change of level in well, • create errors In this compensation. In glass tube instruments this error can only be minimized by a large ratio ofreservoir to indicating tube area, by the use of precision,boro tubing or by both, In the Dwyer solid plastic design, the use ofmichlning techniques accurate to .0002' for .wells and indicating bores reduces this error to insignificance. 2. Indicating Bore Straightness. This is a very real problem with glass tubing, Even with precision bore glass tubing, con- centricity between I.A. and O.D. is difficult to control. Addi- tionally, there Is the problem of supporting the tube by its O.D. in perfect linearity with its I.D. Magnitude of error.from this cause is, therefore, a function of the quality of this particular piece of precision bore tubing and the manner of tube mount.. ing. Variations in accuracy from gage to gage and in a given gage over a period of time can be anticipated as the tube is bumped or bent in use. In contrast, indicating tube bores up to 24" long in Dwyer solid plastic manometers' are straight to within .002" over their entire length. It should also be noted that in the Dwyer design with a massive solid block of acrylic plastic, this straightness tolerance is effective for the life of the instrument. JB� INSTALLATION: INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE OF THE MARK 11 MANOMETER 1. Manometer may be mounted inside or outside of booth in a convenient location at approximately (5) feet. 2. After mounting the manometer, run the tubing supplied with the manometer to the filter bank. Place the tube from the high side part of the manometer to the air entering side of the filter. Place the tube from the low side of the manometer to the air leaving side of the filter bank. NOTE: On a down draft booth with an exhaust pit in the floor, tubing from the low side of the manometer should be run into the pit and as close as possible to the filter bank for the greatest accuracy. SET -UP: 1. Fill the manometer with fluid as per manufacturer's instructions. 2. With the booth off, adjust the manometer to read zero. 3. Start up the booth with clean filters and observe the rise in the manometer reading. This reading should now be marked with the green arrow supplied with the manometer. From this reading add .30 and mark with the red arrow. This will be your dirty filter mark for fiberglass paint arrest filters. For other style filters, the differential setting should be adjusted to the manufacturers recommendations. BULLETIN E.55 Air Filter and Air Flow Switch nstallation and Operating Instructions Mounting and operating instructions and parts lists and should be referred to in making installation. PARTS LIST 2 — Static pressure tips with Integral compression fittings. 2 -r S' lengths. 1/4' aluminum tubing. 2 — 1 /e' SPT compression fittings. GRNERAL INSTRUCTIONS it is generally recommended that fan of duct total pressure be used to operate the air flow switch, This is true since its rna$nitude provides the best assurance of reliable switch operation. Velocity pressure should, however be used when its magnitude is sufficiently gnat. Switch range selection should be made on the basis of a check at the proposed location. Use a Dwyer IKagnehelic or other suitabic gage to chock available pressure. t • AIR FILTER SWITCH INSTALLATION 1. Select a convenient location near filter bank and mount air fitter switch In accordance with instructions provided with switch. AIR FLOW SWITCH INSTALLATION • iJ- .T. r�+,�. • = •.4. ,,;A '.i _ �•a, ...: =y, � >�.,'r ,•.•!-. � n+v .. • w '+r%�+• •^ :41.. �C1�WY, I:N:S� MV1 ESN :1"- 1 N �j -- .. -: '�, ri: rr:-1 i.?.:. �a- c - ' s :i...�....» - ar.fir. . v ;• - i`:. .1 �: ,• • ` ' S - --.:� •,- . " YBOX� ' 373 4,•�s MICHIG A N 'CiTY;t' INDIAN 46360,: U.S:A. '' are pocked with the switches 2. Drill two 7/18` holes In the duct. one on each side of the filter and at least 12" distant.* Secure the static pressure tips as in the drawing at the left, with the tips directed Into the air flow. 3. Connect 1/4' metal tubing from the static pressure tips to the switch. The tip on the downstream side of the filter leads to the low pressure connection of the switch and the upstream tip is connected to the high pressure connection of the switch. 4. Adjust and wits the switch according to the instructions pro. vided with the switch. *NOTE ON LOCATION OF STATIC PRESSURE TIPS. The location of italic pressure tips is of primary Importance in securing reliable readings. For maximum accuracy, it is is senile( that the influence of the velocity of the air be eliminated to permit sensing the true static pressure. Note that some in. stallations do not provide a straight duct approach to the filter bank which may cause air to swirl and eddy. Tips should be located as recommended by the sped/Vine engineer or by the filter manufacturer. In the absence of such recommendstlonr, locate the tips at least 12" upstream and downstream from the filters in a eons of minimum turbulence. DUCT HFATUR SAFETY CONTROL , 1. Select a convenient location near duct heater and mount Mr Flow Switch in accordance with instructions provided with switch. 2. Because of the unusually low pressures In the use of a duct heater, total pressure should be used for mutlrnum force to operate the switch. T. A pitco of 1/4" aluminum tubing, bent to face into the air stream will sense the total pressure. 4. The pressure being used to actuate the switch must be In excess of the lowest act point possible, determined by the range of the switch, 5. The 1/4' aluminum tubing is connected to the high pressure connection of the switch with a compression fitting (Dwyer accessory A-324) B. The low pressure connection is left open to the atmosphere. in dusty environments use Filter -Plug (Dwyer accessory A•331) 7. To adjust and wire switch see bulletin provided with switch. 20-440247•00 h r.Phanei 219 /872 91 r Specifications... • MODEL 1910.00 1910.0 1910.1 19105 • Model 1910 Our newest, smallest, lowest cost preci• sfon pressure switch (3W' dia.). It out performs many larger, more expensive units. "Z'° bracket mounting is simple and all connections are conveniently lo- cated on one side. Set point adjustment screw is protected inside the conduit enclosure. RANGE inches -WA. ,07 to .15 .15 to .55 .4 to 1.75 1.4 to 5.5 No. A-602 A.F. Kit. Accessory package for using switch without a gage consists of two static tips with integral compression fittings, two five-foot lengths of 1/4" alu- minum tubing and two '/a" NPT to 1/4" tubing compression fittings, THREE BASIC MODELS MADE EXCLUSIVELY FOR VERY LOW DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE RANGES • Our most popular compact, low cost, pressure switch (4" dia.), for general industrial service. Performance has been field proven In many thousands of sue- ' cessful installations, It features high re• petitive accuracy, easy set point adjust- meat, and convenient spud mounting. MODEL 162300 18230 16231 1823.2 1823.5 SPECIFICATIONS - ALL MODELS Electrical Ratings 15 amp 120.480V AC, Ve HP @ 125V AC, le4 HP 250V AC Wiring Connections, (3) Screw type - common, normally open, normally closed Switch: Single.pole.double.throw snap type Maximum Pressure Surges Model 1910, 10 PSI: Models 1823, 1638, 25 PSI Pressure Connections: (2) V" NPT Request Bulletin E•30 for other pressure switches. OPTIONAL ACCESSORY KITS FOR AIR FILTER SWITCHES DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES FOR AIR FILTER SERVICE UL & CSA LISTED, FM APPROVED Model 1823 RANGE Inches -W.C. .07 to .22 ,15 to .5 .3 to 1.0 .5 to 2.0 1.5 to 5.0 No. A•603 "T" Kit. Accessory package for using switch in conjunction with A.F. Kit equipped 2000 Series Magnehelic or 250• AF Series gages. Consists of two V*" NPT to Y4" tubing compression fittings and two compression tees. MODEL 1638.0 16384 1638.2 16385 This quality switch (7%" dia.) provides power and precision for the most de- manding switching applications includ- ing extremely low ranges. Repetitive accuracy and reliability are unsurpassed. Set point is visually adjustable for maxi- mum convenience. RANGE Inches W.O. .0 to .25 .20 to 1.0 1.0 to 3.0 2.0 to 6.0 osocts- No, A•604 "T" ( Kit. Accessory package for using switch in conjunction with Mark LT gages consists of two plastic tubing connector tees and two plastic tubing to WI NPT adaptors. SERIES 1900 PRESSURE SWITCH Installation and Operating Instructions INSTALLATION i, Select a location that is free from excessive vibration, corrosive atmosphere and where the ambient temperature Is within the limits (or these switches. 2. Mount standard switches with the diaphragm Ina vertical plane and with switch lettering and Dwyer nameplate in en upright position. Some switches are position sensitive and may not reset properly unless they are mounted with the diaphragm vertical. (Special units can be furnished for other than vertical mounting arrangements if required.) 3. Connect switch to source of Pressure, vacuum or differently' pressure, Metal tubing with 1/4' O.D. Is recommended, but sn,' tubing which will not restrict the sir flow can be used. Connect to the two 1 /0" NPT female pressure ports as noted below: A. Differential preseurea — connect pipes or tubes from source of greater pressure to high pressure port marked 131•PR end from source of lower pressure to low pressure On marked LO•PR. S, Pressure only above atmospheric) — connect tube from source of pressure to high pressure port. The tow pressure port is left open to atmosphere. C. Vacuum only (below atmospheric pressure! —coo. nect tube from source of vacuum to low pressure port. The high pressure port is left open to atmosphere. 4. Electrical connections to the standard single pole, double throw snap switch are provided by means of screw terminals marked "common ", "norm open", and "norm closed ", The norm• ally open contacts close and the normally closed contacts open when pressure Increases beyond the sac point. 5. Switch loads should not exceed the maximum specified current rating of 15 amps resistive. Switch capabilities decrease with an in• crease in ambient temperature above 130°F. high load inductance. or rapid cycle rates. Whenever an application involves one or more of these factors, the user may find it desirable to limit the switched current to 10 amps or less in the interest of prolonging switch life. LITHO w LISA. hies 1900 SWITCH OUTLINE DIMENSIONS uv..L41 UV 44.30 Page 2 OPERATION Pressure acting on the power diaphragm rotates the empUlyit lever, which in turn extends the range spring and rotates the ens switch input lever. When the set point is reached, the snap switch is actuated and the electrical contacts rusks or break, ADJUSTMENT. To change the set point, proceed as foltowat A. Remove the snap•on cover from the conduit enclosure by loosening its retaining screw and pulling firmly at eta bottom end. Turn the slotted Adjustment Screw it the top of range spring. housing clockwise to raise the set point pressure and counterclockwise to lower the set ppoint. B. The recommended procedure for calibrating or checking calibration is to use a "T" assembly with three rubber tubing leads, ell as short es possible and the entire asaembtyaflering minimum flow restriction. Run one lead to the pressure switch, another to the manometer of known accuracy and appropriate range, end apply pressure through the third tube. Make final approach to the set point very slowly. Note that manometer and pressure switch will have different response times due to different intereet volumes, lengths of tubing, fluid drainage. etc. Be certain the switch is checked in the position it will as. sums In use. I.e. with diaphragm in a vertical plane and switch lettering and Dwyer nameplate in an upright position. C. For highly critical applications It is a good idea to check the set /saint adjustment and reset it as necessary once or twice in the first few months of operation. This will compensate for any change in initial tension which may occur In the spring and diaphragm. For most applications this change will not be significant and no resetting will be required. MAINTENANCE Moving parts of these switches are sealed in and are permanently tamper proof. The single adjustment Is that of the set point. Care should be taken to keep the switch reasonably dry and free from dust or dirt. No lubrication or unusual precautions are required for normal use. 26- •44O232CO ,M.iFit`�' :T�,'.3'► %: 7.+ �c1 •. G2a '� �•- :, .a �t27 ►!i n`:.�..yLrra.� y Tii.. ��DWYE�R.,INSTRUMENTS INC s� � 7 -� r f r _wyer. v ..P.0.:Bbx373; M . . , . ln d iana AG360,.0 SA.`2 z = ti �" " � s no' v�• !f ■Per el,'•? 1 t• ••„: .C .ix. •: :siw,�•�: •.•; • � r:..•ts ... ° F� �o . a n n n:;i'„i-,Y• 'Gala - G.v- •I1aIQ7� - •. .- :� ..,. . ..�. r. - -..,a f : To order specify Model Number Operating Range Inches, W.C. A proximate Soad Band At Min. Set Point _ At Max, Set Point 191000 0.07 to 0,15 1910-0 0.15 to 0.55 0.10 0.10 1910.1 0,4 to 1,75 0,15 0.16 19105 1.4 to 5,5 0,3 0.30 191010 3.0 to 11.75 0.4 0.40 191020 4.0. to 20,0 0,4 0,50 Series 1910 pressure switch. All and sit poinelectrical a ttenntn ts connections on one side point easy installation. '_ _• 4140 Weatherproof Enclosure 16.ga, steel enclosure for unusually wet or oily conditions. Withstands 200 hour salt spray test. Gasketed cover. Wt. 5 lbs. Switch must be in stalled at factory. Specify suffix WP after model number. Rated NEMA 4. Explosion -Proof Housing Cast iron base with alu• minum cover. Wt. 7 lbs. Specify EXPL after model number. Rated NEMA 7 8 9; CI1, Gr 0, CIII, Our smallest, lowest cost precision switches. Six standard ranges —Set points from 0.07" to 20" W.C. Repetitive accuracy within 3% µI w• wW .wit tA.Mtt �ow ao%•∎•1 I M$V/ :1111 ;seas Compact Low Difl1entiaI Pressure Switches Series 1910 switch with conduit enclosure off. Shows electric switch and set point adjustment screw. Our most popular series combines advanced design and precision construction to make these switches able to per. orm many of the tasks of larger; costlier units. Dealggnned for air conditioning service, they also servo many fluidics, refrigeration, oven and dryer applications. For air and non - combuatible compatible gases, series 1900 switches have set points from 0.07 to 20 in. W.C. Set point adjustment is easy with range screw located inside conduit enclosure. Internal location helps prevent tampering. SPECIAL MODELS AND ACCESSORIES 1900-5-MR DUCT PRESSURE KIT includes special 1,4.5,5' W.C. range 1000 pressure switch with manual reset snap switch, Pre- vents duct blowout by shutting down blower when excess pressure occurs. Won't allow start-up again until condition Is corrected and switch is manually reset, includes switch, duct pressure sensor, tubing & adapters. MANUAL RESET MODEL 1900 MR Includes special snap switch which latches on pressure Increase above set point, Must be man- ually reset after pressure drops below set point. To order, change model to 1000 and add MR suffix after range number. Example 190010 -MR. Available on -1, -5, -10 or -20 ranges only. Not U,L,, C.S.A. or F.M. listed. P/N A -329 ALUMINUM STREET ELL simplifies installations requir- ing right angle connections.'14vo required for differential pressures 314' 2W SET POINT ADJUSTMENT SCREW SNAP -ON COVER SCREW TYPE ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS SPOT SNAP SWITCH SILICONE RUBBER DIAPHRAGM ALUMINUM DIAPHRAGM PLATE RANGE SPRING FORCE•MOTION AMPLIFIER LEVER CONDUIT ENCLOSURE W CONDUIT CONNECTION The Dwyer- engineered force•motion amplifier increases the leverage of diaphragm movement and results in a switch with excellent sensitivity and repeatability. PHYSICAL DATA lttrmpereture limits: - 301P for dry air or gas to NOT Maximum surge preuuro:10 psig. Rated pressure: 45' H Pressure connections: W NP1', Electrical NUN): 15 amps, 120.40 125 volts,, H R to 250 volts, 00 Hz. AC. Dome to 10 amps for openden at high cycle rates. Wiring connections: 3 screw typo. common, nomtiaily open and =many closed. Set point adjustment: Screw type In. side oonduft enclosure, p�p � coating for coy. roslon protection; lino plated steel Diaphragm: Molded Swoons n:bbalr, Aluminum diaphragm plate. Calibration spring: Stainless steel. Weight :l lb. Installation: Diaphragm verbal, CAUTION: FOR USE ONLY WITH AIR OR COMPATIBLE OASES. MODEL 1910 SWITCHES: OPERATING RANGES AND DEAD BANDS. • = Suggested Specification Differential pressure switches shall be diaphragm operated with 31/2" diaphragm to actuate a single pole double throw snap switch. Motion of the diaphragm shall be restrained by a calibrated spring that can be adjusted to set the exact pressure differential at which the electrical switch will be actuated. Motion of the diaphragm shall be transmitted to the switch button by means of a direct mechanical linkage. Switches shall be Dwyer Instruments, Inc. Catalog No. 1910. for the required operating ranges. ro - INFRATECH. MD Series MODEL W4024 No../ �? CORPORATION FLUSH MOUNT BOOTH HEATERS W Serlee Heater Infratech aimeather heaters are available Individually or with standard (MF series) mounting frames and with combination flush mount frame and dust covers (MFD series), There is an infratech System to meet every code requirement, Before attempting to design your own system, consult the factory endtor your local building and fire inspectors to Insure that your system will comply with all focal codes In your area, MOUNTING FRAMES WIDTH LENm SHIP, W1 MF20 12" 43" 10 MF30 12" 68" 15 ---MFD 20 with cover 13" 54" 36 MFD 30 with cover 13" 69" 45 HEATERS MODEL WATTS VOLTS AMPS LENGTH SHIP. WT. W2024 vertical 2000 240 83 39 15 W2024 •w ag); - 7 2000 240 83 39 18 W3024 3 o a-i 3000 240 128 81v4 23 4000 240 16.6 811/4 23 1770 Workman Street, Los Angeles, CA 90031.3394 • (213) 223.1041 • 14800) 421.9455 Page 8 • INFRATECH CORPORATION THE INFRATECH SYSTEM FEATURES THE FOLLOWING SAFETY FEATURES 1. 18 ga. minimum Galvanized Steel construction 2. All Electrical Components are U/L listed 3. Access Doors secured with Brixton Safety Latches 4. Exhaust Filters, 20" x 20 ", are 2" fiberglass 5, Intake Filters, 20" x 20" Tacky one side are designed to filter down to 5 microns, 6. Exhaust systems: Every Booth is designed with a minimum air flow of 100 lineal feet per minute over intake filter area and at least 6 air changes per minute. 7. All Doors are interlocked with Air Solenoid Valve 8. All non explosion proof wiring is located outside of Booth at least 18" above floor and 3 feet from any opening 9. Heat System is mounted flush with interior walls of Booth behind Dust Covers 10. Oust Covers are interlocked with Heat System, Oven Fan, and Air Solenoid Valve 11, Purge System is Interlocked with Fan, Air Solenoid and Heat System 12. Spraybooth walls never exceed 125 • or ambient air temperature + 10' whichever is higher 13. infratech Ail•Weather Heaters have been tested by United States Testing Laboratories and found safe even when used without Dust Covers. Copies of report are available for any authority who may require such. 1770 Workman Street, Los Angeles, CA 90031.3394 * (213) 223.1041 • 1 (800) 421.9455 Page 18 a§ 1NFRATECHN CORPORATION Recommended Heater Layout L.. Typical System Overview orloolowsm p TIMM If the Lamps are to be Installed In a cure room where there Is no spraying then only the breaker panel and small exhaust fan Is required. We suggest you show this booklet to your fire Inspector or building inspector to get any necessary permits or approval you may need. These diagrams show the most efficient place- ment of the Heat Lamps to provide total Infrared coverage for almost any size car. All dimensions are from the center line of the Booth. The layout 1s based on a maximum car size of 21' x 7: The system is designed with a 50% overlap al- lowed in the heat pattern. This allows the units to be moved up to 18" from their recommended position without affect on the effectiveness of the system. For Spraybooth installation eliminate roof Heaters and use 4000 watt Heaters in gables. All Heaters In oven or Spraybooth must be mounted 18" above floor. CAUTION When a room or Booth is narrower than eleven feet or wider than eighteen foot or the coiling Is lower than seven foot, special engineering Is required. Call the Factory for assistance. When Heat Lamps are In use a minimum of 500 cubic feet per minute exhaust is required. When Lamps are used In a Spray Booth the elec• tricot system f ist prevent their use while spray Ing and for at least 3 minutes after spraying before heat is turned on, Following wiring diagrams will show you how to do it. The basic system consists of a main disconnect, a selector switch for spray or heat, an air solenoid valve, a large contact- or for heat load with a time delay and some kind of indivi- dual fuoing for each heat lamp. We find the best and leant ex- pensive way to fuse the heat lamps Is with a breaker panel. 1770 Workman Street, Los Angeles, CA 90031 • (213) 223.1041 • 1•(800) 421 Page 16 4 1NFRATECH CORPORATION CONTROL SYSTEMS STATE OF THE ART CONTROLS FEATURE: * Circuit Breaker Protection for Heat Zones * Main Contactor to Disconnect Load * Patented Purge System for Safety * 60 Minute Mechanical Timer * Air Solenoid Valve Standard * Pilot Lights for Heat Zones * Many Options Available AUTOMOTIVE CONTROL PANEL ACBP 200 SPECIFICATIONS A complete control system operates fan, heaters, air solenoid valve and micro switches. System Includes heat zone control, timer and patented purge system. Handles up to 180 amps total load, single or 3 phase. TRUCK CONTROL PANEL TCBP 300 Same as Automotive Control except has 250 amp capacity with 5 heat zones. CUSTOM SYSTEMS AND TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE Infratech will custom design a control system or spray booth and curing system, or tell you how to install heaters in your existing booth, Our engineers will be glad to answer any questions you may have, or to quote on your requirements, 1770 Workman Street, Los Angeles, CA 00031 3394 • (213) 223.1041 • 14800) 421.9455 Page 15 v6: ACTIVITY NUMBER: M2000 -099 PROJECT NAME: AUTO TRIM DESIGN SITE ADDRESS: 17000 WEST VALLEY HY XX Original Plan Submittal Response to Correction Letter # Revision # After Permit Is Issued DEPARTMENTS: vzN tgl Bp ilding Division CC.. 6 Public Works 1--1 DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Incomplete ❑ Complete Comments: TUES /THURS ROUT G: Please Route REVIEWER'S INITIALS: AMMO S OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions REVIEWER'S INITIALS: „ DUE DATE Approved Approved with Conditions ❑ Not Approved (attach comments) Li REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: C_oION DETERMINATION: DOC w. PERMIT COORD COPY PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP DATE:. 5-73.2000 fleJentign Structural Structural Review Required Response to Incomplete Letter #____ -__. DATE: Planning Division ❑ Permit Coordinator DUE DATE: 5-16-2000 Not Applicable ❑ No further Review Required DATE: 0 DUE DATEAA , Not Approved (attach comments) 3 1 g City of Tukwila Fire Department Fire Department Review Control #M2000 -09 (512) May 16, 2000 Re: Auto Trim Design - 17000 West Valley Highway Dear Sir: Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East Steven M. Mullet, Mayor Thomas E Keefe, Fire Chief The attached set of building plane have been reviewed by The Fire Prevention Bureau and are acceptable with the following concerns: 1. An approved automatic tire - extinguishing system is required for this project. All new automatic fire-extinguishing systems and all modifications to existing automatic fire - extinguishing systems shall have fire department review and approval of drawings prior to installation or modification. A notice of construction ermit must be obtained from the Puget Sound Air Pollution Control Agency prior to the installation of the spray booth. The permit shall be posted at the jobsite. Maintain fire extinguisher coverage throughout. Extinguishers shall be located so ao to be in plain view (if at all possible), or if not in plain view, they shall be identified with a sign stating, "Fire Extinguisher", with an arrow pointing to the unit, (NFPA 10, 1 -6.3) (UFC Standard 10 -1) One or more ortable fire extinguishers having a rating of not lees than 20 -B shall be located not lees than 10 feet (3048 mm) or more than 50 feet (15240 mm) from any Class 1 or 11 liquid storage area located outside of a liquid storage room. (UFC 7902.5.11,5.2) Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206.575.4404 • Fax: 206.5754439 City of Tukwila Steven M Mullet, Mayor Fire Department Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief Page number 2 2. Exit doors shall be openable from the inside without the use of a key or any special knowledge or effort. Exit doors shall not be locked, chained, bolted, barred, latched or otherwise rendered unusable. All locking devices shall be of an approved type. (UFC 1207.3) Dead bolts are not allowed on auxiliary exit doors unless the dead bolt is automatically retracted when the door handle is engaged from inside the tenant space. (UFC 1207.3) Aisles leading to required exits shall be provided from all ortions of buildings. Aisles located within an accessible route of travel shall also comply with the Building ode requirements for accessibility. (UFC 1204.11 Combustible material shall not be stored in exits or exit enclosures. (UFC 1103.3.2.3) 3. All new sprinkler systems and all modifications to existing sprinkler systems shall have fire department review and approval of drawings prior to installation or modification. New sprinkler systems and all modifications to sprinkler systems involving more than 50 heads shall have the written approval of the W.S.R.B., Factory Mutual, Industrial Risk Insurers, Kemper or any other representative designated and /or recognized by The City of Tukwila, prior to submittal to the Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No sprinkler work shall commence without approved drawings. (City Ordinance #1742) Contact The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau to witness all required inspections and testa. (UFC 10.503) (City Ordinance #1742) 4. All new fire alarm systems or modifications to existing systems shall have the written approval of The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No work shall commence until a fire department permit has been obtained. (City Ordinance #1742) (UFC 1001.3) Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206•S7S•4404 • Fax: 206•S7S•4439 Ciz of Tukwila Page number 3 The Tukwila Fire Preve ton Bureau cc: TFD fle ncd Steven M. Mullet, Mayor Fire Department Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief t Call the Tukwila Fire Department at 575 -4407 for approval of any system shut down. Have job site address, name and the Tukwila Fire Department Job Number available to confirm shut down approval. (City Ordinance #1742) Contact The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau to witness all required inspections and tests. (UFC 10.503) (City Ordinance #1742) �} 5. All electrical work and equipment shall conform (NFPA 70) strictly to the standards of The National Electrical Code. 6. This review limited to speculative tenant space only - special fire pp ermits may be necessary depending on detailed description of intend ed use. Any overlooked hazardous condition and /or violation of the adopted Fire or Building Codes does not imply approval of such condition or violation. Yours truly, Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206.575.4404 • Fax: 206.57S•4439 ALLAN'S MECHANICAL SRVCS LLC 3709 NS 19TH ST ., f " RENTON W 8056 • , . ,• a •1 . ,., •,.., ' •' : . ' } . a, 4 0 t «I '', , , m ,., ,,t, 4 Vol / — 4, :: .. * . $• ', P' . . " : ... — . -”,.. 7 ,g, .t 1 1111.1p? . • .. '4,. ..4, , :q , , I ' ,4 . 1 ,, ,,ff 11 i ''"+ 4 ..:: .4 ,' ' , , „If ,r • , ; , e , * ..., 4" • • . • . • ••••• = • • . ' 41 fir •alla • • : •• "• -a ja " - t • •• • • • • . • , REGISTERED AS PROVIDED BY LAW AS" ' CONST CONT GENERAL REGIST. # EXP. DATE CCO1 ALLANMS0088C 05/12/2001 EFFECTIVE DATE 01/03/2000 SIgnatu !mail 1 'MBNT OF LABOR 'IsiND IND ST 4 $ • t • • - • • •• •< • • -t 4 dit-.. k k1' ; 4$ "i $ sr ,!4$ • r ".4- -• rt SCALE: HORIZ.: VERT. : v_ w w _ 1 " 7` Ve - r — 0• AS NOTED DATE: DRAWN BY: SHEET NUMBER I I A l OF l REVISION `°= ' I —7---' v_ w w _ 1 " 7` 1 � i I I I I `°= ' I \` IM, N -�I 4 F ' I t n 1 i I I I L_—___I 11 ' 1 II i___ j. 12 18 1. 0 MY o 0 0 V LL 0 II•DIA EXHAUST STACK ---°' 8 112' MAY VARY CURTIS 11/3 10 SCREW COMPRESSOR SH SECTIONAOf\ SPEOEICATIONS GRAPHICS I PAINT MIXING ROOM I EXHAUST OISCHAROE POINT UP fIOW CANOPY DAMPER CAP ROOF FLASHING !\ 1' PREP - STATION 110' O' PARTS PAINT BOOTH 13 T NAUST STACK SEE SECTION S Of SIfCIFICATIONS SMAII TAINT MIXING ROOM 3001A.EXHAUST STACK 2A•DIA.RAMGUARD PARTS PAINT BOOTH 80 0' F L O O R P L A N ve - - 0 arns Allans ;Mechanical Service Nation Wide Paint Booth Installation SIT AUTO TRIM DESIGN 17000 W. VALLEY HWY TUKWILLA WA., 98055 cx ( 253 j •39 -41512 RECEIVED OITY OP TUKWILA AA .5c ASSOCIATES HOME PLANS • RENDERINGS • T.I. • PERMITS LUNCH ROOM